HomeMy WebLinkAbout2014-200CINDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not proceed with installation until all wet work such as concrete, terrazzo, plastering and
painting has been completed and thoroughly dried out.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less than half width units at borders, and comply
with reflected ceiling plans. Coordinate panel layout with mechanical and electrical fixtures.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install suspension system and panels in compliance with ASTM C636, with the authorities hav-
ing jurisdiction, and in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions:
1. MetalWorks Tegular Installation Instructions, LA 295519
2. MetalWorks Cutting Instructions, LA 295518
B. Suspend main beam from overhead construction with hanger wires spaced 4 feet on center
along the length of the main runner. Install hanger wires plumb and straight. Hanger wires shall
not be installed in convenience holes.
C. Install wall moldings at intersection of suspended ceiling and vertical surfaces. Miter corners
where wall moldings intersect or install corner caps.
D. Follow the instructions found in "MetalWorks Tegular Installation Instructions", LA -295519
for border treatment of the MetalWorks Tegular panels. The face of the suspension system rests
directly on the molding or trim flange.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Replace damaged and broken panels.
B. Clean exposed surfaces of ceilings panels, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension
members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch up of minor finish
damage. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to perma-
nently eliminate evidence of damage
END OF SECTION 09545
ACOUSTICAL METAL PAN CEILINGS 09545-6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 096223 - BAMBOO FLOORING
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Standard no -added formaldehyde bamboo strip flooring installed by the nail or staple method.
B. Related Sections
1. Section 06 16 23 — Subflooring
2. Section 06 16 29 — Acoustical Underlayment
3. Section 06 46 19 — Wood Base and Shoe Moldings
1.02 REFERENCED STANDARDS
A. ASTM — American Society for Testing and Materials
1. ASTM E648: Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor -Covering Systems
Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source
2. ASTM D1037: Standard Test Methods for Evaluating Properties of Wood -Base Fiber and
Particle Panel Materials
3. ASTM D3501: Standard Test Methods for Wood -Based Structural Panels in
Compression
4. ASTM D3359: Standard Test Method for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test
5. ASTM D4060: Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by
the Taber Abraser
6. ASTM D4442: Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of
Wood and Wood -Base Materials
B. NWFA — National Wood Flooring Association: Technical Reference Manual
1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
A. Compatibility with Radiant Floor Heating Systems: Compatible.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Reference Section 01 33 00; Submit the following items:
1. Product Data
BAMBOO FLOORING 096223-1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
a. Each product specified
2. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals:
a. NWFA Technical Reference Manual.
b. Proof of bamboo flooring manufacturer's qualifications.
c. Test Reports: Reports for specified Physical Property Performance Requirements.
3. Shop Drawings: Show installation details including location, layout, fastening method,
and transition of each type of flooring and accessory.
4. Samples:
a. 6 inch (150 mm) long strip of flooring material
b. Fasteners
c. One of each specified accessory, minimum 4 inches (100 mm)
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications
1. Manufacturer:
a. Minimum 10 years experience in manufacturing and distributing bamboo flooring
products.
b. Member: National Wood Flooring Association, American Bamboo Society, U.S.
Green Building Council.
2. Installer: Minimum 5 years experience in hardwood flooring installation.
B. Reference Section 01 31 19.33; Pre -Installation Meeting:
1. Convene meeting at project site within one week of scheduled start of installation with
representatives of the following in attendance: Owner, Architect, General Contractor,
Sub -Contractor.
2. Review substrate conditions, requirements of related work, requirements for operation of
HVAC system, installation instructions, storage and handling procedures, and protection
measures.
3. Keep minutes of meeting including responsibilities of various parties and deviations from
specifications and installation instructions.
4. Distribute minutes to attendees within 48 hours.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver flooring materials in original unopened cartons.
B. Reference Section 01 66 00: Product Handling and Storage Requirements.
BAMBOO FLOORING 096723-2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1. Deliver flooring after completion of all wet work and after all moisture has dissipated
from this work. Wet work includes, but is not limited to, concrete, plaster, tile, drywall,
grouting, and painting.
2. Store flooring in a warm, dry, well -ventilated, and weather -tight location.
3. Open the boxes, acclimate, and confirm moisture content compatibility. Flooring should
acclimate for a minimum of 72 hours.
4. Do not store directly on concrete or near outside walls.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. The temperature and relative humidity (RH) of the installation area should be stabilized with
nounal year-round conditions a minimum of one week before installation. For optimum
performance manufacturer's recommended temperature range of 50-80°F and an RH of 30-50%
should be maintained year-round.
1.08 SCHEDULING
These items must be completed before delivery and installation of flooring.
A. Building must be water -tight with all windows and doors installed.
B. Completion of all wet work and after all moisture has dissipated from this work. Wet work
includes but is not limited to: concrete, plaster, tile, drywall, grouting, and painting.
C. Environmental and humidity control system is operating for 14 days in installation and storage
areas at the temperature and humidity of the occupied building.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. Warranty for Smith & Fong Flooring referenced at www.plyboo.com
1.10 MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION
A. Maintain and protect installed work at all times per the manufacturer's instructions.
B. Do not protect the flooring with plastic sheeting or moisture retardant membranes.
C. Use hard surface protection such as hardboard over kraft paper. Tape kraft paper and hardboard
to prevent grit infiltration.
PART 2— PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. Smith & Fong Company, San Francisco, CA 94103
BAMBOO FLOORING 096213-3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1. Tel: (866) 835-9859
2. E-mail: sales@plyboo.com
3. Website: www.plvboo.com
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Bamboo Strip Flooring
1. Species: Moso (Phyllostachys Pubescens)
2. Manufactured without added urea -formaldehyde
3. FSC certified
4. FloorScore certified
5. Edge Configuration: Tongue and groove, 4 sides
6. Type: No alternates accepted.
a. Prefinished: 3-5/8 inches wide by 5/8 inches thick by 72 inches in length.
7. Physical/Mechanical Properties
a. ASTM E648: Critical Radiant Flux
(1) Flat Grain prefinished: Class 1
(2) Edge Grain prefmished: Class 1
b. ASTMD1037:
(1) Dimensional Stability, 50% to 20% RH
Linear Expansion: Edge Grain: Parallel —0.02%, Perpendicular -0.07%
Thickness Swell: Edge Grain: -0.34%
(2) Hardness (Janka Ba11 Test)
Edge Grain Amber: 1,300 lbf (avg)
d. ASTM D3501: Compressive Strength
(1) Compressive Strength / Max Load
Edge Grain: 6,160 lbs / 12,201 lbf (avg)
e. ASTM D3359: Adhesion by Tape Test
(1) Edge Grain: Class 4B
f. ASTM D4060: Taber Abrasion
(1) Avg. Wear -through / Wear Rate
Edge Grain Amber: 20,000 cycles / 6,897 cycles per 0.001 inch
g. ASTM D4442: Moisture Content
(1) Flat and Edge Grain: 6%— 9% (average range)
h. ASTM D5116-06: Organic Emissions [CA Section 01350; Indoor Air Quality]
(1) Office scenario / Classroom scenario: Flat and Edge Grain: Pass / Pass
B. Fasteners:
1. Comply with both the Manufacturer Installation Instructions and the NWFA's
Technical Reference Manual.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
Flat and edge grain accessories referenced at
http://plyboo.com/images/plyboo/downloads/sf_plybooaccessories.pdf.
A. Base Shoe: Prefinished, 1" thick by 3/4" wide by 72" long
BAMBOO FLOORING 096223-4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1. Amber Edge.
B. Baseboard: Prefinished, 5/8" thick by 3" wide by 72" long
1. Amber Edge.
C. Reducer: Prefinished, 5/8" thick by 2" wide by 72" long
1. Amber Edge.
D. Standard Threshold: Prefinished, 9/16" thick by 3-5/8" wide by 72" long
1. Amber Edge.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, and other
conditions affecting performance of flooring.
B. Verify substrate is dry, clean and free of loose material, grease, and other contaminates.
D. Do not install bamboo flooring if wood substrate exceeds 12% moisture.
E. Do no install bamboo flooring if moisture variation between substrate and bamboo exceeds 3%.
F. Verify HVAC System is operating and maintaining temperature and humidity conditions in
compliance with Manufacturer's Installation Instructions.
G. Coordinate with responsible entity to correct unsatisfactory conditions.
H. Commencement of work by installer is acceptance of substrate conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Humidity: maintain indoor air humidity levels between 30% and 50% for two weeks before
installation and continually thereafter.
B. Temperature: maintain temperature of materials and installation area between 62 degrees and
68 degrees during installation.
C. Acclimatization: Open flooring boxes and remove packing minimum 3 days prior to start of
installation.
D. Grind and fill subfloor using methods and materials appropriate to the subfloor construction to
eliminate high spots and depressions exceeding 3/16 inch (5 mm) inch in 10 feet (3048 mm).
BAMBOO FLOORING 0962123-5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
3.03 INSTALLATION OF SMITH & FONG PLYBOO FLOORING
A. Flooring: Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions.
Available for download at:
http://plyboo.com/images/plyboo/downloads/plyboo_flooring install_instructionsmdf
3.04 CLEANING: Reference Section 01 74 00: Cleaning and Waste Management
A. Repair or replace damaged installed products.
B. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to Owner's
acceptance.
3.05 PROTECTION
B. Protect installed product from damage during construction by covering with heavy kraft -paper
or other suitable covering. Maintain covering throughout remainder of construction period.
END OF SECTION 096223
BAMBOO FLOORING 096Y23-6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 096466 - WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes wood athletic flooring.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 096400 "Wood Flooring" for traditional solid -wood and engineered -wood, strip,
plank, and parquet flooring.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for wood athletic
flooring.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor assembly and accessory. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work. Include the following:
1. Expansion provisions and trim details.
2. Layout, colors, widths, and dimensions of game lines and markers.
3. Locations of floor inserts for athletic equipment installed through flooring assembly.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing colors and glosses available
for the following:
1. Floor finish.
2. Game -line and marker paint.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of wood athletic flooring and accessory required;
approximately [12 inches (300 mrn) long] and of same thickness and material indicated for the
Work.
1. Include sample sets showing the full range of normal color and texture variations
expected in wood flooring.
2. Include Sample sets showing finishes and game -line and marker paint colors applied to
wood flooring.
WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING 096466 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified manufacturer.
B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for wood athletic flooring system.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For wood athletic flooring and finish systems to include in maintenance
manuals.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain -of -custody
certification by an FSC -accredited certification body.
B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual that has been approved by MFMA as an accredited
Installer according to the MFMA Accreditation Program.
C. Installer Qualifications: An experienced Installer who has completed wood athletic flooring
installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose
work has resulted in installations with a record of successful in-service performance.
1. Installer responsibilities include installation and field finishing of wood athletic flooring
components and accessories, and application of game lines and markers.
D. Maple Flooring: Comply with MFMA grading rules for species, grade, and cut.
1. Certification: Provide flooring that carries MFMA mark on each bundle or piece.
E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. To set quality standards for installation, install mockup of floor area as shown on
Drawings.
2. Prepare finished mockup of floor area as shown on Drawings to set quality standards for
sanding and application of field finishes and game lines and markers.
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver assembly materials in unopened cartons or bundles.
WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING 096466 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
B. Protect wood from exposure to moisture. Do not deliver wood components until after concrete,
masonry, plaster, ceramic tile, and similar wet work is complete and dry.
C. Store wood components in a dry, warm, well -ventilated, weathertight location and in a
horizontal position.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Conditioning period begins not less than seven days before wood athletic flooring installation, is
continuous through installation, and continues not less than seven days after installation.
1. Environmental Conditioning: Maintain an ambient temperature between 65 and 75 deg F
(18 and 24 deg C) and relative humidity planned for building occupants, but not less than
35 percent or more than 50 percent, in spaces to receive wood athletic flooring during the
conditioning period.
2. Wood Conditioning: Move wood components into spaces where they will be installed, no
later than beginning of the conditioning period.
a. Do not install wood athletic flooring until wood components adjust to relative
humidity of, and are at same temperature as, spaces where they are to be installed.
b. Open sealed packages to allow wood components to acclimatize immediately on
moving wood components into spaces in which they will be installed.
B. After conditioning period, maintain relative humidity and ambient temperature planned for
building occupants.
C. Install wood athletic flooring after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of wood athletic flooring systems with floor inserts for
gymnasium equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5. Mondo.
6. Robbins S
Sport Court International.
WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING 096466 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
7. WD Floorin.-, LLC.
2.2 DESCRIPTION
A. System Type: Floating.
B. Overall System Height: 2-1/8 inches (54 mm.
2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide wood athletic flooring systems tested by a qualified testing agency according to
DIN V 18032-2 and shown to meet the following requirements:
1. Shock Absorption: Minimum 53 percent.
2. Vertical Deflection: Minimum 0.09 inch (2.3 innr)
3. Area of Deflection: Maximum 15 percent.
4. Ball Bounce: Minimum 90 percent.
5. Surface Friction: Not less than 0.5 or more than 0.7.
6. Rolling Loads: No damage when subjected to 337 lbf 0..500 N) applied through a single
wheel.
B. FloorScore Compliance: Wood athletic flooring shall comply with requirements of FloorScore
Standard.
C. Low -Emitting Materials: Wood athletic flooring systems shall comply with the testing and
product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for
the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale
Environmental Chambers."
2.4 FLOORING MATERIALS
A. Certified Wood: Provide wood flooring produced from wood obtained from forests certified by
an FSC -accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD -01-001, "FSC Principles and
Criteria for Forest Stewardship."
B. Random -Length Strip Flooring: Northern hard maple (Acer saccharum), kiln dried, random
length, tongue and groove, and end matched.
1. Grade: MFMA-RL Second and Better.
2.5 SUBFLOOR MATERIALS
A. Wood Sleepers: Standard grade; 48 inches (1200 trim) long; kiln -dried Eastern hemlock, fir,
pine, or spruce.
1. Size: Nominal] [2 by 4 inches (50 by 100 mm)].
WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING 096466 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
2. Sleeper Anchors: Manufacturer's standard drive pins recommended by anchor
manufacturer to achieve minimum 900-lbf (4000-N) pullout strength in 3000 -psi (20.7-
MPa) concrete.
3. Sleeper Shims: In size and type recommended in writing by flooring manufacturer for
application indicated.
4. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41.
5. Asphalt Mastic: ASTM D 312, Type I, cold -applied dead -level asphalt or Type III, hot -
applied steep asphalt, as recommended in writing by manufacturer.
2.6 FINISHES
A. Floor -Finish System: System of compatible components recommended in writing by flooring
manufacturer, and MFMA approved.
1. Floor -Sealer Formulation: Pliable, penetrating type. MFMA Group 1, Sealers.
2. Finish -Coat Formulation: Formulated for gloss finish indicated and multicoat application.
3. Game -Line and Marker Paint: Industrial enamel compatible with fmish coats and
recommended in writing by manufacturers of finish coats, and paint for this use.
2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Resilient Wall Base: Molded, vented, rubber or vinyl cove base; 4 by 3 by 48 inches (l UO by 75
by 1200 mm); with premolded outside corners.
1. Color: Black.
B. Fasteners: Type and size recommended by manufacturer, but not less than those recommended
by MFMA for application indicated.
C. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compound: Latex -modified, hydraulic -cement -based
formulation approved by wood athletic flooring manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Grind high spots and fill low spots on concrete substrates to produce a maximum 1/8 -inch (3 -
mm) deviation in any direction when checked with a 10 -foot (3-m) straight edge.
1. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.
B. Remove coatings including curing compounds and other substances on substrates that are
incompatible with installation adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; use
mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING 096466 - 5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
C. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before product installation.
After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed
with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with wood athletic flooring manufacturer's written instructions, but not less
than written recommendations of MFMA applicable to flooring type indicated.
B. Pattern: Lay flooring parallel with long dimension of space to be floored unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Expansion Spaces: Provide as indicated, but not less than that required by manufacturer's
written instructions and MFMA's written recommendations at walls and other obstructions, and
at interruptions and terminations of flooring.
1. Cover expansion spaces with base molding, trim, and saddles, as indicated on Drawings.
D. Vapor Retarder: Cover entire slab area beneath wood flooring. Install with joints lapped a
minimum of 6 inches (150 nun) and sealed.
E. Underlayment: Install perpendicular to direction of flooring, staggering end joints in adjacent
rows.
F. Sleepers:
1. Prime entire slab beneath wood floor area with asphalt primer at coverage rate
recommended by manufacturer.
2. Install sleepers perpendicular to direction of flooring, staggering end joints a minimum of
[24 inches (610 mm)] <Insert dimension>.
3. Space at spacing recommended by manufacturer for system components indicated
4. Shim and level sleepers and install anchors at spacing recommended by manufacturer,
but not less than 30 inches (760 mm) o.c.
5. Anchor predrilled sleepers through resilient pads.
G. Installation Tolerances: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 in) of variance from level.
3.3 SANDING AND FINISHING
A. Allow installed flooring to acclimate to ambient conditions before sanding
B. Follow applicable recommendations in MFMA's "Industry Recommendations for Sanding,
Sealing, Court Lining, Finishing, and Resurfacing of Maple Gym Floors."
C. Machine sand with coarse, medium, and fine grades of sandpaper to achieve a level, smooth,
uniform surface without ridges or cups. Remove sanding dust by tack or vacuum.
D. Finish: Apply seal and fmish coats of finish system according to finish manufacturer's written
instructions. Provide no fewer than four coats total and no fewer than two finish coats.
WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING 096466 - 6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1. Water -Based Finishes: Use finishing methods recommended by finish manufacturer to
reduce grain raise and sidebonding effect.
2. Game -Line and Marker Paint: Apply game -line and marker paint between final seal coat
and first finish coat according to paint manufacturer's written instructions.
a. Mask flooring at game lines and markers, and apply paint to produce lines and
markers with sharp edges.
b. Where game lines cross, break minor game line at intersection; do not overlap
lines.
c. Apply fmish coats after game -line and marker paint is fully cured.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect wood athletic flooring during remainder of construction period to allow finish to cure
and to ensure that flooring and finish are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion.
1. Do not cover flooring after finishing until finish reaches full cure and not before seven
days after applying last finish coat.
2. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over flooring. Protect fully cured floor
finishes and surfaces with plywood or hardboard panels to prevent damage from storing
or moving objects over flooring.
END OF SECTION 096466
WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING 096466 - 7
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 09 65 00 - RESILIENT WALL BASE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Resilient Wall Base
1.02 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS
A. ASTM International:
1. F 1861 Standard Specification for Resilient Wall base
2. E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
3. F 386 Standard Test Method for Thickness of Resilient Flooring Materials Having Flat
Surfaces
4. E 648 Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Flooring systems Using a Radi-
ant EnergySource.
5. E 662 Test Method for Specific Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials.
6. F 925 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Chemicals of Resilient Flooring.
7. F 137 Standard Test Method for Flexibility of Resilient Flooring Materials with Cylin-
drical Mandrel Apparatus
8. F 1515 Standard Test Method for Measuring Light Stability of Resilient Vinyl Flooring
by Color Change
B. Other Referenced Documents
1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA 255, Test Method for Crit cal Radi-
ant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Energy Source
2. National Fire Protection Association (NEPA) 258 Test Method for Specific Density of
Smoke Generated by Solid Materials.
3. California Safe Drinking Water and Toxic Enforcement Act of 1986 (Proposition 65).
4. The Collaborative for High Performance Schools (CHPS)
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product data, including manufacturer's specification summary sheet for
specified products
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, fmish colors, patterns and textures.
C. Samples: Submit selection and verification samples for finishes, colors, and textures.
RESILIENT WALL BASE 096500-1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
D. Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit the following:
I. Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance char-
acteristics and physical properties.
2. Manufacturer's Instructions: Manufacturer's installation and maintenance instructions.
E. Submit the following:
1. Maintenance Data: Maintenance data for installed products in accordance with Division 1
sections. Include methods for maintaining installed products, and precautions against
cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and performance.
2. Warranty: Warranty documents specified herein.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced in performing work of this section who has spe-
cialized in installing work similar to that required for this project.
B. Regulatory Requirements
1. Fire Performance characteristics: Provide resilient sheet vinyl floor covering with the fol-
lowing fire performance characteristics as determined by testing products in accordance
with ASTM method (and) NFPA method) indicated below by a certified testing laborato-
ry or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
a. ASTM E 648 (NFPA 253), Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems: Class
1, > 1.0 W/cm2
b. ASTM E 662 (NEPA 258), Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid
Materials: Passes, <450
c. ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255), Surface Building Characteristics of Building Materials:
Class C
C. Single -Source Responsibility: Obtain resilient wall base and manufacturer's recommended ad-
hesive from a single supplier.
D. Pre -Installation Meetings: Conduct pre -installation meeting to verify project requirements, sub-
strate Conditions & manufacturer's recommended substrates and required preparation
manufacturer' installation instructions and manufacturer's warranty requirements. Comply
with requirements in Division 1.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Comply with requirements in Division 1.
B. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to
avoid construction delays.
C. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with
identification labels intact.
RESILIENT WALL BASE 096500-2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
D. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions
and acclimated to site conditions at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by
manufacturer.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements/Conditions: hi accordance with manufacturer's recommendations,
areas to receive resilient wall base shall be clean, fully enclosed, weather tight with the perma-
nent HVAC set at a uniform temperature of 65-85 degrees F for 48 hours prior to during, and
thereafter installation of resilient wall base. Resilient wall base and adhesive shall be condi-
tioned in the same manner. Resilient wall base must be unboxed acclimated in area of use at
least 48 hours prior to installation. Minimum temperature shall be a 65 degrees F after installa-
tion.
B. Existing Conditions: Ensure all existing walls are suitable for resilient base installation. Bring
all unacceptable areas to owner's attention prior to commencement of work.
1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Finishing Operations: Install resilient wall base after finishing operations, including floor cov-
ering painting and ceiling operations etc., have been completed.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Materials Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard
warranty document. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other
rights Owner may have under Contract Documents.
1. Warranty Period: 1 year limited warranty commencing on Date of Substantial Comple-
tion. Notice of any defect must be made in writing to manufacturer within thirty (30) days
after buyer learns of the defect.
2. Limited Wear Warranty: 3 year limited wear warranty.
1.09 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials: Deliver to Owner extra materials from same production run as products in-
stalled. Package products with protective covering and identify with descriptive labels. Comply
with Division One Closeout Submittals (Maintenance Materials) Section.
1. Quantity: Furnish quantity of Resilient Wall Base equal to 5% of amount installed.
2. Delivery, Storage and Protection: Comply with Owner's requirements for delivery, stor-
age and protection of extra materials.
B. Maintenance of finished floor covering to be conducted per Manufacturer's Maintenance
Guide.
RESILIENT WALL BASE 096500-3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 RESILIENT WALL BASE
A. Manufacturer: Roppe Corporation
1. Contact: P.O. Box 1158 Fostoria, Ohio USA 44830-1158. Phone: (419) 435-8546 Fax:
(419) 435-1056
B. Test results:
1. Thickness tolerance: Complies with ASTM F-386
2. Flexibility: Complies with ASTM F-137
3. Resistance to Heat Aging: Complies with ASTM F-1515
4. Resistance to Detergents: Complies with ASTM F-925
5. Resistance to Alkalis: No fading or softening
6. Dimensional Stability: Complies with ASTM F 1861
7. Squareness: 90 degrees +/- 0.5 degrees
8. Does do not contain any of the hazardous chemicals listed in California Proposition 65
9. Collaborative for High Performance Schools (CHPS) 01350 Low -Emitting Material Cri-
teria: Pass
C. Proprietary Product:
1. Roppe Pinnacle Rubber Base
a. Complies with ASTM F-1861 Type TS (Thermoset Vulcanized Rubber), Group 1
(Solid)
b. Contains 10% natural rubber
c. Thickness: 1/8" ( 3.175 mm) nominal
d. Color: As specified on Finish Material List
e. Profile: Standard Toe (Cove Base)
1) Nominal Height: 4"
2) Lengths: 120' coils
3) Corners: Factory pre -formed outside corners (6")
2.02 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions: No substitutions permitted.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation.
RESILIENT WALL BASE 096500-4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
B. Adhesive: (select one) Roppe 205 Wall Base Adhesive or 210 White Acrylic Wall Base Adhe-
sive
C. Caulking: Roppe Colored Caulk
3.02 EXAMINATION
Site Verification of Conditions: Verify substrate conditions are acceptable for installing product
in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Material Inspection: In accordance with manufacturer's installing requirements, visually inspect
materials prior to installing. Material with visual defects shall not be installed.
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Adjacent Surfaces Protection: Protect adjacent work areas and finish surfaces from damage
during product installation.
B. Surface Preparation, General: Prepare substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Substrate: Prepare manufacturer's recommended substrates to be smooth, rigid, flat, lev el,
permanently dry, clean and free of foreign materials such as paint, dust, grease, oils, solvent,
old adhesive residue, vinyl wall coverings, non -porous surfaces and all other contaminants that
may interfere with adhesive bond.
3.04 INSTALLING
A. Manufacturer's instructions for specifications on installing resilient wall base.
B. Resilient wall base colors, heights and profiles: As selected by Architect.
C. Roppe Adhesive
D. Roppe Colored Caulk
3.05 FIELD QUALITY REQUIREMENT
A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Upon Owner's request and with minimum 72 hours notice, pro-
vide manufacturer's field service consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site
visits to confirm installing of product is in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Site Visits On site visit shall occur on the first day of resilient wall base installation.
RESILIENT WALL BASE 096500-5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
3.06 CLEANING
A. Cleaning: Repair or replace damaged installed products. Clean installed products in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions prior to owner's acceptance. Remove construction debris from
project site and legally dispose of debris.
END OF SECTION 096500
RESILIENT WALL BASE 096500-6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Resilient vinyl tile flooring.
B. Related Sections: Sections related to this section include:
1. Procurementf and Contracting Requirements: Division 00 General Conditions.
2. General Requirements: Division 01 Specification Sections.
3. Concrete: Division 03 Concrete Sections.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
1. ACI 302.1 Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction.
2. ACI SP -15 Field Reference Manual - Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete.
ASTM International:
1. ASTM D2047 Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish -Coated
Floor Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine.
2. ASTM E648 Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor -Covering
Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.
3. ASTM E662 Standard Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated
by Solid Materials.
4. ASTM E1643 Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in
Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs.
5. ASTM E1745 Standard Specification for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with
Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs.
6. ASTM F137 Standard Test Method for Flexibility of Resilient Flooring Materials with
Cylindrical Mandrel Apparatus.
7. ASTM F386 Standard Test Method for Thickness of Resilient Flooring Materials
Having Flat Surfaces.
8. ASTM F536 Test Method for Size of Resilient Floor Coverings. (This test method was
withdrawn by ASTM in 2004).
9. ASTM F540 Test Method for Squareness of Resilient Floor Tile by Dial Gage Method.
(This test method was withdrawn by ASTM in 2004).
10. ASTM F710 Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient
Flooring.
11. ASTM F925 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Chemicals of Resilient Flooring.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519-1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
12. ASTM F970 Standard Test Method for Static Load Limit.
13. ASTM F1482 Standard Guide to Wood Underlayment Products Available for Use
Under Resilient Flooring.
14. ASTM F1514 Standard Test Method for Measuring Heat Stability of Resilient Vinyl
Flooring by Color Change.
15. ASTM F1515 Standard Test Method for Measuring Light Stability of Resilient Vinyl
Flooring by Color Change.
16. ASTM F 1700 Standard Specification for Solid Vinyl Floor Tile.
17. ASTM F1869 Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of
Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride.
18. ASTM F1914 Standard Test Method for Short -Term Indentation and Residual
Indentation of Resilient Floor Covering.
19. ASTM F2170 Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete
Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes.
C. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) of 1990.
D. Federal Specifications (FS):
1. Federal Standard Number 501a (Notice 1) Federal Test Method Standard for Floor
Covering, Resilient, Non -Textile, Sampling and Testing Method 6211 Dimensional
Stability.
E. International Organization for Standardization (ISO):
1. ISO 9001 Quality Systems - Model Quality Assurance in Production, Installation, and
Servicing.
2. ISO 14001 Environmental Management Systems - Specification with Guidance for Use.
F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. NFPA 253 Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux for Floor Covering
Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.
2. NFPA 258 Recommended Practice for Determining Smoke Generation of Solid
Materials.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements:
1. The manufacturer of the flooring product must be accredited to both ISO 9001 (Quality
Management System) and ISO 14001 (Environmental Management System).
2. Provide resilient tile flooring which has been manufactured and can be installed to
maintain performance criteria stated by manufacturer without defects, damage or failure.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519-2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division
01 Submittal Procedure Section(s).
B. Product Data: Submit product data, including manufacturer's technical specifications, for each
type of specified products.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, pattern and colors.
D. Samples: Submit selection and verification samples for finish and colors.
E. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: Submit the following:
1. Test Reports: Upon request, submit test reports of physical performance and
characteristics from recognized test laboratories.
2. Technical Specifications: Submit manufacturer's technical specification document that
certifies products meet or exceed specified requirements.
3. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit manufacturer's installation instructions for resilient
flooring.
F. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following:
1. Maintenance Data: Maintenance data for installed products in accordance with Division
01 Closeout Submittals, Maintenance Data and Operation Data Section. Include methods
for maintaining installed products and precautions against cleaning materials and
methods detrimental to finishes and performance.
2. Warranty: Submit warranty documents specified herein.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: The manufacturer of the flooring product must be accredited to both ISO 9001
(Quality Management System) and ISO 14001 (Environmental Management System).
B. Flooring Contractor Qualifications:
1. The awarded contractor shall be an established firm with experience in the installation of
the specified product and have access to all manufacturers' required technical,
maintenance, specifications and related documents.
2. The flooring contractor shall have completed at least 3 projects of similar scope, material
and complexity, and must provide project reference details including contact names and
telephone numbers.
C. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer, as determined by contractor, who has
specialized in the installation of work similar to that required for this project is to perform the
work of this section.
1. Installation procedures should be in strict accordance with Amtico International
published technical documentation and shall not begin until the work of all other trades
has been completed.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519-3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
D. Test Floors: Install test floor at project site using acceptable products and manufacturer
approved installation methods. Obtain Owner's and Architect's acceptance of maintainability
and workmanship standard. Comply with Division 01 Quality Control (Test Floor
Requirements) Section.
1. Test Floor Size: 8'x8'
2. Maintenance: Maintain test floor during construction for workmanship comparison;
remove and legally dispose of test floor when no longer required.
3. Incorporation: Test floor may be incorporated into final construction upon Owner's
approval.
E. Preinstallation Meetings: Conduct preinstallation meeting to verify project requirements,
substrate conditions, manufacturer's installation instructions and manufacturer's warranty
requirements. Comply with Division 01 Project Management and Coordination (Project
Meetings) Section.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
A. General: Comply with Division 01 Product Requirements Section.
B. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead time requirements to
avoid construction delays.
C. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with
identification labels intact.
D. Storage and Protection: Store materials flat, protected from exposure to harmful weather
conditions, between 50 degrees F - 81 degrees F (10 - 27 degrees C) and 50% (± 10%) relative
humidity.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Substrate Conditions: Use the current test methods described below to determine the dryness as
required to ensure initial and long-term success:
1. Comply with ASTM F1869 testing procedures.
2. Comply with ASTM F2170 testing procedures.
3. The General Contractor shall be responsible for conducting in situ relative humidity
testing (ASTM F2170) or calcium chloride testing (ASTM F1869). Perform minimum of
3 tests for the first 1000 square feet, and at least one test for each additional 1000 square
feet, to ensure concrete internal relative humidity does not exceed 80% or moisture vapor
emissions do not exceed 5.0 lb per 1000 square feet within a 24 hour period.
4. Contingency for High Moisture Readings: If at the time of testing the moisture readings
are in excess of 80% internal relative humidity or 5.0 lb moisture vapor emissions, the
Architect will initiate testing using petrographic analysis to determine the Water/Cement
Ratio and if sufficient hydration has taken place. If the Specifications were not followed
in their entirety, water/cement ratio (as specified), and/or the concrete surface has been
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519-4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
inadequately hydrated, the Contractor responsible for the placement of the cement shall
be responsible for the costs associated with the petrographic analysis and subsequent
remediation requirements.
B. The Flooring Contractor shall verify in writing to the Owner, a minimum of thirty (30) days
prior to scheduled resilient flooring installation, the following substrate conditions:
1. Moisture: Maximum of 80% internal relative humidity tested in accordance with the
current ASTM F2170 or maximum of 5.0 lb Moisture Vapor Emission Rate tested in
accordance with the current ASTM F1869.
2. Alkalinity (ASTM F710): Between 7.0 - 10.0 pH.
3. Suitability of Substrate Surface: Ensure that substrate surface is sound, smooth and flat to
1/8 inch in 10 feet (3.2 nun in 3.1 m).
4. For substrate conditions that require additional preparation, Flooring Contractor shall
furnish Owner and General Contractor with written documentation detailing
noncompliance, proposed remediation, timing and cost.
C. Environmental Requirements/Conditions: In accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Areas to receive flooring shall be clean, fully enclosed, weathertight with
stable environmental conditions between 64 degrees F - 81 degrees F (18 - 27 degrees C) and
50% (* 10%) relative humidity. The flooring material shall be conditioned in the same manner.
D. Temperature Requirements: Maintain air temperature and relative humidity levels in spaces
where products will be installed for time period before, during and after installation as
recommended by manufacturer.
1. Temperature Conditions: Maintain 64 degrees F - 81 degrees F (18 - 27 degrees C) for 48
hours before, during and continuously after installation.
2. Relative Humidity Conditions: Maintain 50% (± 10%) relative humidity for 48 hours
before, during and continuously after installation.
E. Close spaces to traffic during resilient flooring installation and for time period after installation
recommended in writing by the manufacturer.
1. No foot traffic for 24 hours after installation.
2. No point loads for 48 hours after installation.
3. Wait 5 days after installation before any wet maintenance is performed.
F. Install resilient flooring material and accessories after all other finishing operations, including
painting, have been completed.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Project Warranty: Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty provisions.
B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit manufacturer's Commercial Limited Wear Warranty for
Owner's acceptance. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other
rights Owner may have under the Contract Documents.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519-5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1. Warranty Period: Twenty years commencing on Date of Substantial Completion.
2. Warranty Acceptance: Owner is sole authority who will determine acceptability of
manufacturer's warranty documents.
1.09 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials: Deliver extra materials from same production run as products installed to
Owner. Package products with protective covering and identify with descriptive labels.
Comply with Division 01 Closeout Submittals (Maintenance Materials) Section.
1. Quantity: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 5% of amount installed.
2. Delivery, Storage and Protection: Comply with Owner's requirements for delivery,
storage and protection of extra materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Specifier Note: Retain Article for proprietary method specification. Add product attributes, performance
characteristics, material standards and descriptions as applicable. Use of such phrases as "or equal" or "or
approved equal" or similar phrases may cause ambiguity in specifications. Such phrases require
verification (procedural, legal and regulatory) and assignment of responsibility for determining "or equal"
products.
2.01 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
A. Luxury Vinyl Tile - Manufacturer: Patcraft Design Catalyst
1. Contact: (800)241-4014, P.O. Box 2128, Dalton, GA 30722, www.patcraft.com
2. Product(s): As specified in Finish Material List.
3. Wearlayer: 20 mil
4. Wearlayer Thickness: .120 (3 mm)
5. Reference Specification ASTMF 1700:
a. Class III printed film vinyl tile
b. Type A (smooth)
6. Finish: ExoGuard Quartz Enhanced Urethane
7. Installation: Glue down
8. Recommended Adhesive: Shaw 4100 or 5150
9. Antimicrobial: FlorSept
10. Tile Size: 18" x 18"
B. Acceptable Alternate Manufacturers:
1. Amtico
2. Centiva
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519-6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
C. Vinyl Composition Tile Flooring — Armstrong
1. Contact: Armstrong, P.O. Box 3001, Lancaster, PA 17604, 1-800-233-3823,
www.amrstrong.com
2. Products: As specified on drawings.
D. Azrock VCT, SOLIDS & FEATURE STRIPS specify — Resilient Vinyl Composition Tile
Flooring with the following physical characteristics:
1. Complies with requirements for ASTM F 1066, Class 1 (Solid Color) Standard
Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile
2. Wear layer/Overall thickness: 1/8" (3.2 mm)
3. Tile sizes: 12" x 12" (30.5 cm x 30.5 cm)
4. Slip Resistance: ADA Compliant
5. ASTM F 970, Standard Test Method for Static Load Limit — 150 PSI
6. ASTM E 648, Standard Test method for Critical Radiant Flux of 0.45 watts/cm2 or
greater, Class I
7. Warranty: 5 year Manufacturer's Warranty
2.02 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION
A. Substitutions: No substitutions permitted.
2.03 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Leveling and Patching Compounds: Refer to Division 03 Concrete Section.
B. Concrete Curing, Sealing, Hardening and Parting Compounds: Refer to Division 03 Concrete
Section.
C. Expansion Joint Covers: Refer to Division 07 Joint Protection Sections.
D. Vapor Retarders: Refer to Division 07 Vapor Retarder Section.
2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Source Quality Control: Obtain resilient tile flooring proprietary products, including vinyl tile,
from a single manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's product data for substrate condition, preparation and
installation, including product technical bulletins, product catalog installation instructions and
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519-7
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
product packaging instructions for installation. Flooring contractor must examine areas and
conditions under which resilient flooring and accessories are to be installed and must notify
General Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of
work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner
acceptable to Owner and Architect.
3.02 EXAMINATION
A. Substrates: Examine and verify that all substrates, which have been previously installed under
other sections, are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
B. Coordinate with Division 01 General Requirements for testing and allowances, Division 3
Concrete Section and Division 7 Vapor Retarder Section. To ensure a good quality appearance
and good adhesion, the subfloor must be hard, smooth, clean, dry and free from defects. Slab
on -grade and below -grade subfloors must incorporate an approved vapor retarder (ASTM
E1745) properly installed (ASTM E1643) to ensure they are sufficiently dry and to reduce
ground moisture vapor transmission from entering the slab after construction. This can be
checked by using a suitable moisture test method. More detailed information is available on the
preparation of specific subfloor types.
C. Concrete Substrate Testing: Prior to flooring installation, test concrete substrates for internal
relative humidity (maximum 80% per ASTM F2170) or water vapor emission (maximum 5.O lb
per ASTM F1869) and alkalinity (7.0 - 10.0 pH per ASTM F710) harmful to resilient flooring
installation performance. Consult resilient flooring manufacturer for requirements pertaining to
proprietary resilient flooring products. Include testing costs in contract sum. Refer to Division
01 Quality Requirements.
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation:
1. Concrete subfloors shall be constructed in accordance with ACI 302.1 and ACI SP -15,
utilizing a water -to -cement ratio of 0.45 or less containing no admixtures or surface
treatments that are adverse to the installation of resilient flooring.
2. Concrete subfloors must be finished and cured without additives or surface treatments
that will adversely affect the flooring materials according to ACI and ASTM F710 with a
minimum compressive strength of 3500 psi (24,115 kPa).
3. Wood subfloors and underlayment panels must be acclimated to within 3% and have an
equilibrium moisture content of 14% or less.
4. Floors must be clean, dry and smooth.
5. Incompatible Compounds: Remove compounds and other substances harmful or
incompatible with installation adhesives and flooring products. This includes any surface
materials, such as paint, wax, grease, oil, adhesive residues, etc. Chemical adhesive
removers must be completely removed. Floors must be free of any sealers, curing,
hardening or parting compounds that would adversely affect the adhesive used with the
flooring. Refer to ACI and ASTM F710.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519-8
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
6 A vapor retarder shall be installed prior to pouring of on grade or below grade slabs.
Moisture vapor transmission shall not exceed 80% internal Relative Humidity per ASTM
F2170 In -Situ Relative Humidity Test and/or 5.0 lb/1000 ftP2P/24 hours per ASTM
F1869 Calcium Chloride Test.
7. Wood floors must be double construction with a minimum thickness of 1 inch (25.4
mm). The top layer of wood shall be APA Underlayment Grade Plywood or other wood
underlayment panel approved and warranted beneath resilient flooring. Refer to ASTM
F1482.
8. Maintain room temperature, adhesive and flooring material at 64 degrees F - 81 degrees
F (18 - 27 degrees C) and 50% (*10%) relative humidity for 48 hours before, during and
continuously after installation.
9. Broom clean or vacuum surfaces to be covered and inspect substrate. Start of flooring
installation indicates acceptance of subfloor conditions and full responsibility for
completed work.
10. Adjacent Surfaces Protection: Protect adjacent work areas and finish surfaces from
damage during product installation.
11. Substrate Cleaning and Preparation: Comply with manufacturer's requirements for
substrate cleaning and preparation for resilient flooring products.
12. Leveling and Patching: Use only Portland cement based leveling and patching
compounds, in accordance with compound manufacturer's requirements, to fill
depressions, holes and cracks and to smooth substrate surface to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) in a
10 foot (3.1 m) radius to receive resilient flooring.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. Resilient Tile Installation: Install tiles from established center marks so that tiles at opposite
room edge are of equal tile width. Follow installation procedures in accordance with Amtico
International published Technical documentation, and do not begin until the work of all other
trades has been completed.
1. Patterns: Install tiles with grain running in one direction.
2. Rolling: Roll floor using 100 Ib roller in both directions within 1 hour.
B. Adhesive: Apply adhesive to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,
including trowel notching, adhesive mixing and adhesive open and working times.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Upon Owner's request, provide manufacturer's field service
consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visit for inspection of product
installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Site Visits: At commencement of installation and at flooring installation completion.
3.06 CLEANING & PROTECTION
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519-9
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
A. Initial Cleaning: Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. When
installation has been finished for 24 hours, inspect workmanship and repair or replace damaged
installed products. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
prior to Owner's acceptance. Remove construction debris from project site and legally dispose
of debris.
1. Pick up litter and sweep floor to remove debris using a non -treated dust mop or vacuum
cleaner with hard surface attachment.
2. Initial Wet Cleaning: Wait at least 48 hours after installation is complete before
performing the initial wet cleaning process. This will allow the adhesive to cure.
3. Clean new floor thoroughly using a proprietary cleaner/maintainer solution of neutral pH
detergent diluted in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Machine scrub the wet
floor using a 3M Red scrubbing pad or equivalent. When finished, remove remaining
cleaning solution using a mop or wet vacuum. Rinse floor with clean water and allow to
dry thoroughly.
4. In conditions of heavy soiling, pre -wash the floor using a proprietary cleaner solution of
neutral pH detergent mixed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Allow the
solution to stand for 5 - 10 minutes before machine scrubbing or in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
5. For floors requiring the application of a floor fmish, initial cleaning should be carried out
using a suitable floor stripper.
6. When floor finishes are used, Amtico International recommends at least 2 coats of a satin
or low gloss floor finish be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Products used should be suitable for the intended usage.
7. Routine Maintenance: Frequency of mop or machine cleaning should be determined
based upon daily usage and soiling conditions. Perform routine maintenance in
accordance with the Amtico International Maintenance Procedures.
8. Protection: Protect installed product's fmish surfaces from damage during construction.
After the floor has been installed, it should be maintained in a manner that provides a
clean and slip resistant surface for occupant safety.
3.07 SCHEDULES
A. Schedules: Refer to Finish Floor Plan for location of resilient tile flooring.
END OF SECTION 096519
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519-10
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 09 67 23 - RESINOUS FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Industrial resinous flooring systems.
2. High-performance resinous flooring systems.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for sealants installed at joints in resinous flooring
systems.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's technical data,
application instructions, and recommendations for each resinous flooring component required.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish required.
C. Samples for Verification: For each resinous flooring system required, 6 inches (150 mm)
square, applied to a rigid backing by Installer for this Project.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified
requirements.
B. Material Certificates: For each resinous flooring component, from manufacturer.
C. Material Test Reports: For each resinous flooring system.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For resinous flooring to include in maintenance manuals.
RESINOUS FLOORING 09 67 23 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for installation of flooring systems required for this Project.
1. Engage an installer who is certified in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer as
qualified to apply resinous flooring systems indicated.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain primary resinous flooring materials, including primers, resins,
hardening agents, grouting coats, and topcoats, from single source from single manufacturer.
Provide secondary materials, including patching and fill material, joint sealant, and repair
materials, of type and from source recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing
manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage and mixing with other
components.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions
for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other conditions
affecting resinous flooring application.
B. Lighting: Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate
permanent lighting conditions during resinous flooring application.
C. Close spaces to traffic during resinous flooring application and for not less than 24 hours after
application unless manufacturer recommends a longer period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Key Resin
Company — Key Urecon SL or comparable product by one of the following:
1. BASF Construction Chemicals, Inc.; BASF Building Systems.
2. ChemMasters.
3. Delta Polymers, Inc.
4. Dur -A -Flex, Inc.
5. Epoxy Systems, Inc.
6. Tnemec Company, Inc.
7. Tufco International Inc.
8. Valspar Flooring.
RESINOUS FLOORING 09 67 23 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
2.2 MATERIALS
A. VOC Content of Liquid -Applied Flooring Components: Mot more than 100 g/L when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
B. Low -Emitting Materials: Flooring system shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental
Chambers."
2.3 INDUSTRIAL RESINOUS FLOORING
A. Resinous Flooring: Abrasion-, impact- and chemical -resistant, industrial -aggregate -filled, resin -
based, monolithic floor surfacing designed to produce a seamless floor[ and integral cove
base].
B. System Characteristics:
1. Color and Patten: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2. Wearing Surface: Manufacturer's standard wearing surface.
3. Overall System Thickness: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm.
C. System Physical Properties: Provide resinous flooring system with the following minimum
physical property requirements when tested according to test methods indicated:
1. Compressive Strength: 7500 psi per ASTM C 579, 7 days.
2. Tensile Strength: 1100 psi per ASTM C 307.
3. Flexural Modulus of Elasticity: 2600 psi per ASTM C 580.
4. Passes Thermal Shock Resistance (ASTM C-884).
5. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion: 2 x 10-5 per °F per ASTM C 531.
6. Passes Chemical Resistance (ASTM D-1308).
7. Impact Resistance: Withstands 16 ft./lbs. with no chipping, cracking, or delamination and
not more than 1/16 -inch (1.6 -mm) permanent indentation per MIL -D-3134.
8. Resistance to Elevated Temperature: No slip or flow of more than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) per
MIL -D-3134.
9. Flammability: Self -extinguishing per ASTM D 635.
10. Hardness: 80 - 85, Shore D per ASTM D 2240.
11. Bond Strength: 300 psi minimum tensile strength, 100 percent concrete failure per
ACI 503R.
12. Will not support Fungus & Bacteria Growth per MIL -F-52505.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Primer: Type recommended by manufacturer for substrate and body coats indicated.
B. Patching and Fill Material: Resinous product of or approved by resinous flooring manufacturer
and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated.
RESINOUS FLOORING 09 67 23 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. General: Prepare and clean substrates according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written
instructions for substrate indicated. Provide clean, dry substrate for resinous flooring
application.
B. Concrete Substrates: Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence,
curing compounds, form -release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants
incompatible with resinous flooring.
1. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to resinous flooring manufacturer's
written instructions.
2. Verify that concrete substrates are dry and moisture -vapor emissions are within
acceptable levels according to manufacturer's written instructions.
a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with application
of resinous flooring only after substrates have maximum moisture -vapor -emission
rate of 3 Ib of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) of slab area in 24
hours or as per manufacturer's requirements.
b. Perform plastic sheet test, ASTM D 4263. Proceed with application only after
testing indicates absence of moisture in substrates.
c. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with
installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity
level measurement or as per manufacturer's requirements.
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Verify that concrete substrates have pH within
acceptable range. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with application
only after substrates pass testing.
C. Resinous Materials: Mix components and prepare materials according to resinous flooring
manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrates according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Treat control joints and other nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from reflecting
through resinous flooring according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.2 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply components of resinous flooring system according to manufacturer's written
instructions to produce a uniform, monolithic wearing surface of thickness indicated.
1. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum adhesion of resinous flooring
system to substrate, and optimum intercoat adhesion.
2. Cure resinous flooring components according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Prevent contamination during application and curing processes.
RESINOUS FLOORING 09 67 23 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
3. At substrate expansion and isolation joints, comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's
written instructions.
B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.
C. Apply waterproofing membrane, where indicated, in manufacturer's recommended thickness.
1. Apply waterproofing membrane to integral cove base substrates.
D. Apply reinforcing membrane to substrate cracks.
E. Integral Cove Base: Apply cove base mix to wall surfaces before applying flooring. Apply
according to manufacturer's written instructions and details including those for taping, mixing,
priming, troweling, sanding, and topcoating of cove base. Round internal and external corners.
1. Integral Cove Base: 4 inches (100 mm) high.
F. Apply self -leveling slurry body coats in thickness indicated for flooring system.
1. Broadcast aggregates at rate recommended by manufacturer and, after resin is cured,
remove excess aggregates to provide surface texture indicated.
G. Apply troweled or screeded body coats in thickness indicated for flooring system. Hand or
power trowel and grout to fill voids. When cured, remove trowel marks and roughness using
method recommended by manufacturer.
H. Apply grout coat, of type recommended by resinous flooring manufacturer, to fill voids in
surface of final body coat and to produce wearing surface indicated.
I. Apply topcoats in number indicated for flooring system and at spreading rates recommended in
writing by manufacturer.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Core Sampling: At the direction of Owner and at locations designated by Owner, take one core
sample per 1000 sq. ft. (92.9 sq. m) of resinous flooring, or portion of, to verify thickness. For
each sample that fails to comply with requirements, take two additional samples. Repair damage
caused by coring and correct deficiencies.
B. Protect resinous flooring from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period.
Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing
by resinous flooring manufacturer.
RESINOUS FLOORING 09 67 23 - 5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
END OF SECTION 09 67 23
RESINOUS FLOORING 09 67 23 - 6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 09 6813 -TILE CARPETING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Tile carpeting.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Review methods and procedures related to carpet tile installation including, but not limited
to, the following:
a. Review delivery, storage, and handling procedures.
b. Review ambient conditions and ventilation procedures.
c. Review subfloor preparation procedures.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product data for each carpet material and installation accessory required.
Submit written data on physical characteristics, durability, resistance to fading, and flame
resistance characteristics.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where
cutouts are required in carpet tiles.
2. Type of subfloor.
3. Type of installation.
4. Pattern of installation.
5. Pattern type, location, and direction.
6. Pile direction.
C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each
Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated
on Drawings and in schedules.
1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample.
2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12 -inch -long Samples.
TILE CARPETING 096183-1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
D. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
E. Qualification Data: For Installer.
F. Product Test Reports: For carpet tile, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
G. Sample Warranty: For warranty indicated.
H. Maintenance Data; For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:
L Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain -removal products and
procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.
2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile.
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
L Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated,
but not less than 10 sq. yd.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the International Certified
Floorcovering Installers Association Advanced Commercial certification level.
B. Fire -Test -Response Ratings: Provide carpet tile identical to those of assemblies tested for fire
response according to NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with CRI 104.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations.
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and
weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity
conditions are maintained at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to
bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components
of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
TILE CARPETING 096183-2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY
JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic,
failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.
2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, runs,
dimensional stability, excess static discharge, loss of tuft bind strength, loss of face fiber,
abrasive wear and delamination.
3. Warranty Period: Lifetime from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.l TILE CARPETING
A. Products and Manufacturers: Refer to Material List Sheet A1.02.20, Basis of Desi en:
Sub'ect to compliance with reuirements, provide Products and Manufacturers as listed in the
Material List. or comparable products from an approved manufacturer.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. CPT -1, CPT -2, CPT -3, CPT -4:
1. Fiber Content: Eco Solution q Nylon, 62% solution dyed / 38% yam dyed.
2. Pile Characteristic: Multi -Level Pattern Loop pile.
3. Density: 6990 oz./cu. yd.
4. Pile Thickness: 0.103.
5. Stitches: 9.0
6. Gage: 1/12
7. Tufted Yarn Weight: 20 oz./sq. yd..
8. Backing System: Synthetic EcoWorx Tile
9. Size: 24.9" h x 28.8" dia x 14.4" side
10. Applied Soil -Resistance Treatment: SSP Shaw Soil Protection
11. Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material
12. Performance Characteristics: As follows:
a. Appearance Retention Rating: Heavy traffic, 3.0 minimum according to ASTM D
7330.
b. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
c. Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 100 Ibf according to ASTM D 2646.
d. Delamination: Not less than 4 lbf/in. according to ASTM D 3936.
e. Dimensional Tolerance: Within 1/32 inch of specified size dimensions, as
determined by physical measurement.
f. Dimensional Stability: 0.2 percent or less according to ISO 2551 (Aachen Test).
g. Resistance to Insects: Comply with AATCC 24.
h. Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4, wet and dry, according to AA'TCC 165.
i. Colorfastness to Light: Not less than 4 after 60 AFU (AATCC fading units)
according to AATCC 16, Option E.
j. Antimicrobial Activity: Not less than 2 -mm halo of inhibition for gram -positive
bacteria, not less than 1 -mm halo of inhibition for gram-negative bacteria, and no
fungal growth, according to AATCC 174.
k. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.5kV according to AATCC 134.
TILE CARPETING 096183-3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
B. CPT -5, CPT -6:
1. Fiber Content: Eco Solution q Nylon, 100% solution dyed:
2. Pile Characteristic: Random tip shear.
3. Density: 6887 oz./cu. yd.
4. Pile Thickness: 0.115.
5. Stitches: 9.5 s.p.i.
6. Gage: 1/12
7. Surface Pile Weight: 22 oz/
8. Primary Backing / Backcoating: Synthetic Ecoworx
9. Size: 24.9" h x 28.8" dia. x 14.4" side
10. Applied Soil -Resistance Treatment: SSP Shaw Soil Protection
11. Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material
12. Performance Characteristics: As follows:
a. Appearance Retention Rating: Heavy traffic, 3.5 minimum according to ASTM D
7330.
b. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I -Not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
c. Tuft Bind: Not less than 6.25 lbf according to ASTM D 1335.
d. Delamination: Not less than 3.5 Ibf/in. according to ASTM D 3936.
e. Dimensional Tolerance: Within 1/32 inch of specified size dimensions, as
determined by physical measurement.
f. Dimensional Stability: 0.2 percent or less according to ISO 2551 (Aachen Test).
g. Resistance to Insects: Comply with AATCC 24.
h. Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4, wet and dry, according to AATCC 165.
i. Colorfastness to Light: Not less than 4 after 60 AFU (AATCC fading units)
according to AATCC 16, Option E.
j. 10. Antimicrobial Activity: Not less than 2 -mm halo of inhibition for gram -positive
bacteria, not less than 1 -mm halo of inhibition for gram-negative bacteria, and no
fungal growth, according to AATCC 174.
k. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.5kV according to AATCC 134.
1. NSF 140 Certification: PLATINUM certified.
B. CPT -7, CPT -8:
1. Fiber Content: Eco Solution q
2. Pile Characteristic: Multi-level pattern loop, 100% solution dyed.
3. Density: 4993 oz./cu. yd.
4. Pile Thickness: .0280.
5. Stitches: 10.0 s.p.i.
6. Gage: 1/12
7. Surface Pile Weight: 19 oz
8. Primary Backing / Backcoating: Synthetic Ecoworx
9. Size: 24" x 24"
10. Applied Soil -Resistance Treatment: SSP Shaw Soil Protection
2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, hydraulic-cementbased
formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
TILE CARPETING 096183-4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew -resistant, nonstaining, pressure -sensitive type to suit
products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for
installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation.
1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40
CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
C. Metal Edge/Transition Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of profile and width shown, of
height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running
joints.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other
conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and
potential defects.
B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:
1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other
materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness
characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile
manufacturer.
2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 03 3000 "Cast -in -Place
Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet tile.
3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile
manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive
carpet tile installation.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks,
holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch unless more
stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.
Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written
installation inst uctions.
B. Installation Method: Full spread, pressure -sensitive adhesive with antimicrobial.
TILE CARPETING 096183-5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
C. Installation Direction: As shown on Drawings.
D. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.
E. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture
including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as
recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
F. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open -bottomed obstructions, removable
flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by
repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking
device.
H. Stagger joints of carpet tiles so carpet tile grid is offset from access flooring panel grid. Do not fill
seams of access flooring panels with carpet adhesive; keep seams free of adhesive.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:
1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner
recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface.
3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face -beater element.
B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, "Protecting Indoor Installations".
C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and
fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or
recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 09 6813
TILE CARPETING 096183-6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 09 72 50 - DECORATIVE QUARTZ EPDXY FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Work of this Section as shown or specified shall be in accordance with the requirements of the
Contract Documents.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to com-
plete epoxy flooring incorporating ceramic coated colored inorganic quartz aggregate and inte-
gral base as selected on drawings and/or specified herein.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Concrete - Section 03300
B. Floor drains - Division 15
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data application instructions and general
recommendations for decorative quartz epoxy flooring specified herein.
C. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's color charts showing range of
standard colors available.
1. Submit 2-1/2" x 4" samples in color and quartz aggregate combination as selected.
D. Material certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that the decorative quartz epoxy flooring
submitted complies with requirements specified herein.
E. Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer's written instructions for recommended
maintenance practices.
DECORATIVE EPDXY FLOORING 09725-1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer or applicator who has specialized in
installing resinous flooring types similar to that required for this Project and who is acceptable
to manufacturer of primary materials.
B. Single -Source Responsibility: Obtain epoxy component of floring materials, including primers,
resins, hardening agents, and fmish or sealing coats, from a single manufacturer. Obtain
ceramic -coated quartz aggregate from primary manufacturer of that product.
1.6 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers with seals unbroken and bearing
manufacturer's labels containing brand name and directions for storage and mixing with other
components.
B. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's directions to prevent deterioration from
moisture, heat, cold, direct sunlight, or other detrimental effects.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Comply with epoxy resin composition flooring manufacturer's
directions for maintenance of ambient and substrate temperature, moisture, humidity,
ventilation, and other conditions required to execute and protect work.
B. Lighting: Permanent lighting will be in place and working before installing decorative quartz
epoxy flooring.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Decorative quartz epoxy flooring shall be Dex-O-Tex Decor-Flor as manufactured by
Crossfield Products Corp. in Rancho Dominguez, California and Roselle Park, New Jersey.
B. Approved alternate Manufacturers Key quartz Sanseam.
2.2 PROPERTIES
A. Colors: As indicated, or if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's standard color combinations.
DECORATIVE EPDXY FLOORING 09725-2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
B. Physical Properties: Provide flooring system that meets or exceeds the listed minimum
physical property requirements when tested according to the referenced standard test method in
parenthesis.
Compressive Strength
Complete System (ASTM C109)
Resin Component (ASTM D695)
Surface Hardness (ASTM D2240)
8,556 psi.
12,900 psi.
Durometer D 85
Aggregate Hardness (Moh's Mineral Scale) 6 1/2-7
Indentation Characteristics (MIL -PRF -3134)
Para. 4.7.4.2.1 -Steadily Applied Load) 0.005 indentation
Impact Resistance (MIL -PRF -3134) 0.011 indentation
Para. (4.7.3) No cracking, loss of bond
Adhesion (ACI Comm. 503.1-92) 345 psi. (100% failure in concrete)
Water Absorption (MIL -PRF -3134) Less than 1%
Abrasion Resistance (ASTM C501) 19 Wear Index (H-22 Wheel)
Tensile Strength (ASTM D638) 4,400 psi.
Resin Component
Elongation (ASTM D638) 19.6%
Resin Component
2.3 SUPPLEMENTAL MATERIALS
A. Waterproofing Membrane: Type recommended or produced by manufacturer of epoxy resin
composition flooring system for type of service and floor condition indicated.
B. Anti -Microbial Additive: Incorporate antimicrobial chemical additive to control growth of
most bacteria, fungi, algae and actinomycetes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine the areas and conditions where decorative quartz epoxy flooring is to be installed and
notify the Architect of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected by the
Contractor in a manner acceptable to the Architect.
DECORATIVE EPDXY FLOORING 09725-3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Substrate: Perform preparation and cleaning procedures according to flooring manufacturer's
instructions for particular substrate conditions involved, and as specified. Provide clean, dry,
and neutral substrate for flooring application.
B. Concrete Surfaces: Shot -blast, acid etch or power scarify as required to obtain optimum bond
of flooring to concrete. Remove sufficient material to provide a sound surface, free of laitance,
glaze, efflorescence, and any bond -inhibiting curing compounds or form release agents.
Remove grease, oil, and other penetrating contaminates. Repair damaged and deteriorated
concrete to acceptable condition. Leave surface free of dust, dirt, laitance, and efflorescence.
C. Materials: Mix epoxy resin components when required, and prepare materials according to
flooring system manufacturer's instructions.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply each component of decorative quartz epoxy flooring system according to
manufacturer's directions to produce a uniform monolithic flooring surface of thickness
indicated.
B. Broadcast Coats: Apply liberal application of clear epoxy resin mixture, allow to self -level,
broadcast (by hand or spray machine) ceramic coated quartz aggregate, allow to set to hardness,
sweep off excess unbonded aggregate and repeat process to achieve total nominal thickness of
1/16"-1/8".
C. Finish or Sealing Coats: After quartz filled broadcast coats have cured sufficiently, apply finish
coats of type recommended by flooring manufacturer to produce finish matching approved
submittal sample and in number of coats and spreading rates recommended by manufacturer.
1. Finished floor shall be 1/16"-1/8" thick, uniform in color and free of trowel marks.
D. Cove Base: Apply cove base mix to wall surfaces at locations shown to form cove base height
of 4 inches unless otherwise indicated. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions and details
including taping, mixing, priming, troweling, sanding, and top -coating of cove base.
3.4 CURING, PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Cure decorative quartz epoxy flooring materials according to manufacturer's directions, taking
care to prevent contamination during application stages and before completing curing process.
Close application area for a minimum of 24 hours.
END OF SECTION 09725
DECORATIVE EPDXY FLOORING 09725-4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 098433 - SOUND -ABSORBING WALL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes shop -fabricated, fabric -wrapped panel units tested for acoustical performance,
including:
1. Sound -absorbing wall panels.
2. Sound -diffusing wall panels.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.
B. SAA: Sound Absorption Average.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type ofpanel edge, core material, and mounting indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For sound -absorbing wall units. Include mounting devices and details; details
at panel head, base, joints, and corners; and details at ceiling, floor base, and wall intersections.
Indicate panel edge and core materials.
1. Include elevations showing panel sizes and direction of fabric weave and pattern
matching.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of fabric facing from sound -absorbing wall unit
manufacturer's full range.
D. Samples for Verification: For the following products, prepared on Samples of size indicated
below:
1. Panel Edge: 12 -inch- (300 -mm-) long Sample(s) showing each edge profile, comer, and
finish.
2. Core Material: 12 -inch- (300 -mm-) square Sample at corner.
3. Mounting Devices: Full-size Samples.
SOUND -ABSORBING WALL UNITS 098433 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Elevations and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following
items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items
involved:
1. Items penetrating or covered by sound -absorbing wall units including the following:
a. Lighting fixtures.
b. Air outlets and inlets.
c. Speakers.
d. Alarms.
e. Sprinklers.
f. Access panels.
g.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of sound -absorbing wall unit, from manufacturer.
C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For sound -absorbing wall units to include in maintenance manuals. Include
fabric manufacturers' written cleaning and stain -removal recommendations.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain sound -absorbing wall units from single source from single
manufacturer.
B. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide sound -absorbing wall units meeting the following
as determined by testing identical products by UL or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
1. Surface -Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing per ASTM E 84.
a. Flame -Spread Index: [25] or less.
b. Smoke -Developed Index: [450] or less.
2. Fire Growth Contribution: Meeting acceptance criteria of local code and authorities
having jurisdiction when tested according to [NFPA 265] [NFPA 286].
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [Project site].
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with fabric and sound -absorbing wall unit manufacturers' written instructions for
minimum and maximum temperature and humidity requirements for shipment, storage, and
handling.
SOUND -ABSORBING WALL UNITS 098433 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
B. Deliver materials and units in unopened bundles and store in a temperature -controlled dry place
with adequate air circulation.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install sound -absorbing wall units until spaces are enclosed
and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work at and above ceilings is
complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels
indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
B. Lighting: Do not install sound -absorbing wall units until a permanent level of lightingis
provided on surfaces to receive the units.
C. Air -Quality Limitations: Protect sound -absorbing wall units from exposure to airborne odors,
such as tobacco smoke, and install units under conditions free from odor contamination of
ambient air.
D. Field Measurements: Verify locations of sound -absorbing wall units and actual dimensions of
openings and penetrations by field measurements before fabrication.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of sound -absorbing wall units that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Acoustical performance.
b. Fabric sagging, distorting, or releasing from panel edge.
c. Warping of core.
2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 SOUND -ABSORBING WALL UNITS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirementsavailable manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
B. Basis -of -Desi m Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Acoustical Panel Systems (APS, Inc.).
2. Acoustical Solutions, Inc.
3. Armstrong World industries.
SOUND -ABSORBING WALL UNITS 098433 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY
JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
4. AVI, Svstems, Ino.
5. Benton Brothers Solutions, I_nc.
6. Coned Desiguscape; an Owens Coming company.
7. Decoustics Limited; a CertainTeed Ceilings unman
8. Essi Acoustical Products.
9. Goltennan c&_Sabo.
10. Kinetics Noise Control, the.
11. Lanvin, Inc.
12. MBI Products Company, Inc.
13. Panel Solutions, Inc.
14. Perdue Acoustics.
15. Pinta Acoustic, Inc.
16. Proudfoot Com any Ina The .
17. Sound Concepts Canada,_Inc.
18. Sound Manacement Group 1JLC.
19. Tectum Inc.
20. Wall Technology, Inc.; an Owens Conlin:, companv.
21. Working Walls Inc.
22. <Insert manufacturer's name>.
C. General Requirements for Sound -Absorbing Wall Units: Units shall comply with the testing and
product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for
the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale
Environmental Chambers."
D. Sound -Diffusing Wall Panel
1. Basis -of -Design Product: Tectum V -Line Wall Panels;
a. Thiness: 2 inches
b. Edge: Long edge beveled
c. Color: Custom Colors
d. Accessories: Panel Edge Spline- furnich vinyl splines, clips, molding, painted head
fastners, and touch-up paint necessary for the intended installation. Colors to be
coordinated with panel colors, as selected by Architect.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General:
a. Material: Aspen wood fibers bonded with inorganic hydraulic cement
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine fabric, fabricated units, substrates, areas, and conditions, for compliance with
requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of sound -
absorbing wall units.
SOUND -ABSORBING WALL UNITS 098433 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install sound -absorbing wall units in locations indicated with vertical surfaces and edges plumb,
top edges level and in alignment with other units, faces flush, and scribed to fit adjoining work
accurately at borders and at penetrations.
B. Comply with sound -absorbing wall unit manufacturer's written instructions for installation of
units using type of mounting devices indicated. Mount units securely to supporting substrate.
C. Align and level fabric pattern and grain among adjacent units.
3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Plumb and Level: Plus or minus [1/16 inch (1.6 mm)].
B. Variation of Panel Joints from Hairline: Not more than [1/16 inch (1.6 mm)] [1/32 inch (0.79
mmwide.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clip loose threads; remove pills and extraneous materials.
B. Clean panels on completion of installation to remove dust and other foreign materials according
to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 098433
SOUND -ABSORBING WALL UNITS 098433 - 5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 09 90 00 - INTERIOR, EXTERIOR AND INDUSTRIAL PAINTS AND COATINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Interior paint and coatings systems(LEED-09 NC/Cl/CS COMPLIANT) including surface
preparation.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03300 - Concrete: Surface coordination and curing provisions.
B. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Shop priming structural steel.
C. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Shop priming ferrous metal.
D. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Shop priming architectural woodwork.
E. Section 06400 - Architectural Woodwork: Shop -applied stains and transparent finishes.
F. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames: Factory priming steel doors and frames.
G. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Surface preparation of gypsum board.
H. Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods: Mechanical identification.
L Section 16050 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods: Mechanical identification.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC):
1. SSPC-SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning.
2. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning.
3. SSPC-SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning.
4. SSPC-SP5/NACE No. 1, White Metal Blast Cleaning.
5. SSPC-SP6/NACE No. 3, Commercial Blast Cleaning.
6. SSPC-SP7/NACE No. 4, Brush -Off Blast Cleaning.
7. SSPC-SP1O/NACE No. 2, Near -White Blast Cleaning.
8. SSPC-SP11, Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal.
9. SSPC-SP12/NACE No. 5, Surface Preparation and Cleaning of metals by Waterjetting
Prior to Recoating.
10. SSPC-SP 13 / NACE No. 6 Surface Preparation for Concrete.
INTERIOR, EXTERIOR AND INDUSTRIAL PAINTS AND COATINGS 09900-1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
B. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA): Method 24 - Determination Of Volatile Matter
Content, Water Content, Density, Volume Solids, And Weight Solids Of Surface Coatings.
C. South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD): Rule 113 - Architectural
Coatings.(January 1, 2004)
D. Green Seal, Inc.:
1. GS -11 Standard for Paints and Coatings.(lst Edition, May 20,1993)
2. GC -03 - Environmental Criteria for Anti -Corrosive Paints.
E. United States Green Building Council (USGBC): LEED-09 NC/Cl/CS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: For each paint system indicated, including.
1. Product characteristics.
2. Surface preparation instructions and recommendations.
3. Primer requirements and finish specification.
4. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
5. Application methods.
6. Cautions for storage, handling and installation.
C. Selection Samples: Submit a complete set of color chips that represent the full range of
manufacturer's products, colors and sheens available.
D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, submit samples that represent actual
product, color, and sheen. Provide full 8 x 11 draw down sheets.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
E. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar
in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in
applications with a record of successful in-service performance.
F. Paint exposed surfaces. If a color of finish, or a surface is not specifically mentioned, Architect
will select from standard products, colors and sheens available.
G. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and
labels unless indicated.
H. Mock -Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application
workmanship.
1. Finish surfaces for verification of products, colors and sheens.
2. Finish area designated by Architect.
3. Provide samples that designate primer and finish coats.
INTERIOR, EXTERIOR AND INDUSTRIAL PAINTS AND COATINGS 09900-2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
4. Do not proceed with remaining work until the Architect approves the mock-up.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: Deliver manufacturer's unopened containers to the work site. Packaging shall bear the
manufacturer's name, label, and the following list of information.
1. Product name, and type (description).
2. Application and use instructions.
3. Surface preparation.
4. VOC content.
5. Environmental issues.
6. Batch date.
7. Color number.
B. Storage: Store and dispose of solvent -based materials, and materials used with solvent -based
materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Store materials in an area that is within the acceptable temperature range, per manufacturer's
instructions. Protect from freezing.
D. Handling: Maintain a clean, dry storage area, to prevent contamination or damage to the coatings.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental
conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the
quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with labels
describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
B. Furnish Owner with an additional one percent of each material and color, but not less than 1 gal
(3.8 1) or 1 case, as appropriate.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Sherwin-Williams, which is located at: 101 Prospect Ave. ;
Cleveland, OH 44115; Toll Free Tel: 800-524-5979; Tel: 216-566-2000; Fax: 440-826-1989;
Email: request info (sherwin ultlead.com); Web:
www.sherwin-williams.com/pro/services/architects designers/?WT.mc id=SWRedirect ProSe
rvices Architects
B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600.
INTERIOR, EXTERIOR AND INDUSTRIAL PAINTS AND COATINGS 09900-3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
2.2 APPLICATIONS/SCOPE
A. Interior Paints and Coatings:(LEED-09 NC/CI/CS COMPLIANT)
1. Concrete: Poured, precast, tilt -up, cast -in-place, cement board, plaster.
2. Concrete: Floors.
3. Masonry: Concrete masonry units, including split -face, scored, and smooth block.
4. Metal: Aluminum, galvanized steel.
5. Metal: Structural steel, joists, trusses, beams, partitions and similar items.
6. Wood: Walls, ceilings, doors, trim and similar items.
7. Wood: Floors, painted.
8. Wallboard: Gypsum drywall.
2.3 PAINT MATERIALS - GENERAL
A. Paints and Coatings.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide factory -mixed coatings. When required, mix coatings
to correct consistency in accordance with manufacturer's instructions before application.
Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is
specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.
2. For opaque finishes, tint each coat including primer coat and intermediate coats, one-half
shade lighter than succeeding coat, with final finish coat as base color. Or follow
manufactures product instructions for optimal color conformance.
B. Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer
categorized as "best" by the manufacturer.
C. Coating Application Accessories: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths,
sanding materials, and clean-up materials required, per manufacturer's specifications.
D. Color: Refer to Finish Schedule for paint colors, and as selected.
E. Refer to the current MSDS/EDS for exact VOCs. VOCs may vary by base. Some colors may not
be 0 VOC after tinting with conventional colorants.
2.4 INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS
A. CONCRETE - (Walls and Ceilings, Poured Concrete, Precast Concrete, Unglazed Brick, Cement
Board, Tilt -Up, Cast -In -Place) including PLASTER - (Walls, Ceilings).
1. Latex Systems:
a. Eg-Shel / Satin Finish (Low Odor - Zero VOC Finish):
1) 1st Coat: S -W Loxon Acrylic Masonry Primer, A24W8300 (8 mils wet, 3.2
mils dry).
2) 2nd Coat: S -W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Eg-Shel, B20-2600 Series.
3) 3rd Coat: S -W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Eg-Shel, B20-2600 Series (4
mils wet, 1.6 mils dry per coat).
INTERIOR, EXTERIOR AND INDUSTRIAL PAINTS AND COATINGS 09900-4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
B. METAL - (Structural Steel Columns, Joists, Trusses, Beams, Miscellaneous and Ornamental
Iron, Structural Iron, Ferrous Metal)
1. Alkyd System
a. Semi -Gloss Finish (Water Base):
1) 1st Coat: S -W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series (5-10
mils wet, 2-4 mils dry).
2) 2nd Coat: S -W ProMar 200 Waterbased Acrylic/Alkyd Semi -Gloss,
B34-8200 Series.
3) 3rd Coat: S -W ProMar 200 Waterbased Acrylic/Alkyd Semi -Gloss, B34-8200
Series (4 mils wet, 1.7 mils dry per coat).
2. Epoxy System (Water Base)
a. Semi -Gloss Finish:
1) 1st Coat: S -W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series (5-10
mils wet, 2-4 mils dry).
2) 2nd Coat: S -W Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy, B70W211/ B60V25.
3) 3rd Coat: S -W Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy, B70W211/ B60V25 (2.5 - 3
mils dry per coat).
C. DRYWALL - (Walls, Ceilings, Gypsum Board and similar items)
1. Latex Systems:
a. Eg-Shel / Satin Finish (Low Odor - Zero VOC ):
1) 1st Coat: S -W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer, B28W2600 (4
mils wet, 1.5 mils dry)..
2) 2nd Coat: S -W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Eg-Shel, B20-2600 Series.
3) 3rd Coat: S -W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Eg-Shel, B20-2600 Series (4
mils wet, 1.6 mils dry per coat).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared; notify Architect of
unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of
another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
B. Proceed with work only after conditions have been corrected and approved by all parties,
otherwise application of coatings will be considered as an acceptance of surface conditions.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
INTERIOR, EXTERIOR AND INDUSTRIAL PAINTS AND COATINGS 09900-5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
A. General: Surfaces shall be dry and in sound condition. Remove oil, dust, dirt, loose rust, peeling
paint or other contamination to ensure good adhesion.
1. Remove mildew before painting by washing with a solution of 1 part liquid household
bleach and 3 parts of warm water. Apply the solution and scrub the mildewed area. Allow
the solution to remain on the surface for 10 minutes. Rinse thoroughly with clean water and
allow the surface to dry 48 hours before painting. Wear protective glasses or goggles,
waterproof gloves, and protective clothing. Quickly wash off any of the mixture that comes
in contact with your skin. Do not add detergents or ammonia to the bleach/water solution.
2. Remove items including but not limited to thermostats, electrical outlets, switch covers and
similar items prior to painting. After completing painting operations in each space or area,
reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved.
3. No exterior painting should be done immediately after a rain, during foggy weather, when
rain is predicted, or when the temperature is below 50 degrees F (10 degrees C), unless
products are designed specifically for these conditions. On large expanses of metal siding,
the air, surface and material temperatures must be 50 degrees F (10 degrees F) or higher to
use low temperature products.
B. Aluminum: Remove all oil, grease, dirt, oxide and other foreign material by cleaning per
SSPC-SP1, Solvent Cleaning.
C. Block (Cinder and Concrete): Remove all loose mortar and foreign material. Surface must be free
of laitance, concrete dust, dirt, form release agents, moisture curing membranes, loose cement,
and hardeners. Concrete and mortar must be cured at least 30 days at 75 degrees F (24 degrees C).
The pH of the surface should be between 6 and 9, unless the products are designed to be used in
high pH environments. On tilt -up and poured -in-place concrete, commercial detergents and
abrasive blasting may be necessary to prepare the surface. Fill bug holes, air pockets, and other
voids with a cement patching compound.
D. Concrete, SSPC-SP13 or NACE 6: This standard gives requirements for surface preparation of
concrete by mechanical, chemical, or thermal methods prior to the application of bonded
protective coating or lining systems. The requirements of this standard are applicable to all types
of cementitious surfaces including cast -in-place concrete floors and walls, precast slabs, masonry
walls, and shotcrete surfaces. An acceptable prepared concrete surface should be free of
contaminants, laitance, loosely adhering concrete, and dust, and should provide a sound, uniform
substrate suitable for the application of protective coating or lining systems.
E. Cement Composition Siding/Panels: Remove all surface contamination by washing with an
appropriate cleaner, rinse thoroughly and allow to dry. Existing peeled or checked paint should
be scraped and sanded to a sound surface. Pressure clean, if needed, with a minimum of 2100 psi
pressure to remove all dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose particles, laitance, foreign material, and
peeling or defective coatings. Allow the surface to dry thoroughly. The pH of the surface should
be between 6 and 9, unless the products are designed to be used in high pH environments.
F. Copper and Stainless Steel: Remove all oil, grease, dirt, oxide and other foreign material by
cleaning per SSPC-SP 2, Hand Tool Cleaning.
G. Exterior Composition Board (Hardboard): Some composition boards may exude a waxy material
that must be removed with a solvent prior to coating. Whether factory primed or unprimed,
exterior composition board siding (hardboard) must be cleaned thoroughly and primed with an
alkyd primer.
INTERIOR, EXTERIOR AND INDUSTRIAL PAINTS AND COATINGS 09900-6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
H. Drywall - Exterior: Must be clean and dry. All nail heads must be set and spackled. Joints must be
taped and covered with a joint compound. Spackled nail heads and tape joints must be sanded
smooth and all dust removed prior to painting. Exterior surfaces must be spackled with exterior
grade compounds.
I. Drywall - Interior: Must be clean and dry. All nail heads must be set and spackled. Joints must be
taped and covered with a joint compound. Spackled nail heads and tape joints must be sanded
smooth and all dust removed prior to painting.
J. Galvanized Metal: Clean per SSPC-SP1 using detergent and water or a degreasing cleaner to
remove greases and oils. Apply a test area, priming as required. Allow the coating to dry at least
one week before testing. If adhesion is poor, Brush Blast per SSPC-SP7 is necessary to remove
these treatments.
K. Plaster: Must be allowed to dry thoroughly for at least 30 days before painting, unless the
products are designed to be used in high pH environments. Room must be ventilated while
drying; in cold, damp weather, rooms must be heated. Damaged areas must be repaired with an
appropriate patching material. Bare plaster must be cured and hard. Textured, soft, porous, or
powdery plaster should be treated with a solution of 1 pint household vinegar to 1 gallon of water.
Repeat until the surface is hard, rinse with clear water and allow to dry.
L. Steel: Structural, Plate, And Similar Items: Should be cleaned by one or more of the surface
preparations described below. These methods are used throughout the world for describing
methods for cleaning structural steel. Visual standards are available through the Society of
Protective Coatings. A brief description of these standards together with numbers by which they
can be specified follow.
1. Solvent Cleaning, SSPC-SP1: Solvent cleaning is a method for removing all visible oil,
grease, soil, drawing and cutting compounds, and other soluble contaminants. Solvent
cleaning does not remove rust or mill scale. Change rags and cleaning solution frequently
so that deposits of oil and grease are not spread over additional areas in the cleaning
process. Be sure to allow adequate ventilation.
2. Hand Tool Cleaning, SSPC-SP2: Hand Tool Cleaning removes all loose mill scale, loose
rust, and other detrimental foreign matter. It is not intended that adherent mill scale, rust,
and paint be removed by this process. Before hand tool cleaning, remove visible oil,
grease, soluble welding residues, and salts by the methods outlined in SSPC-SPI.
3. Power Tool Cleaning, SSPC-SP3: Power Tool Cleaning removes all loose mill scale, loose
rust, and other detrimental foreign matter. It is not intended that adherent mill scale, rust,
and paint be removed by this process. Before power tool cleaning, remove visible oil,
grease, soluble welding residues, and salts by the methods outlined in SSPC-SP1.
4. White Metal Blast Cleaning, SSPC-SP5 or NACE 1: A White Metal Blast Cleaned surface,
when viewed without magnification, shall be free of all visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, mill
scale, rust, paint, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter. Before blast
cleaning, visible deposits of oil or grease shall be removed by any of the methods specified
in SSPC-SP1 or other agreed upon methods.
INTERIOR, EXTERIOR AND INDUSTRIAL PAINTS AND COATINGS 09900-7
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
5. Commercial Blast Cleaning, SSPC-SP6 or NACE 3: A Commercial Blast Cleaned surface,
when viewed without magnification, shall be free of all visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, mill
scale, rust, paint, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter, except for staining.
Staining shall be limited to no more than 33 percent of each square inch of surface area and
may consist of light shadows, slight streaks, or minor discoloration caused by stains of rust,
stains of mill scale, or stains of previously applied paint. Before blast cleaning, visible
deposits of oil or grease shall be removed by any of the methods specified in SSPC-SP1 or
other agreed upon methods.
6. Brush -Off Blast Cleaning, SSPC-SP7 or NACE 4: A Brush -Off Blast Cleaned surface,
when viewed without magnification, shall be free of all visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, loose
mill scale, loose rust, and loose paint. Tightly adherent mill scale, rust, and paint may
remain on the surface. Before blast cleaning, visible deposits of oil or grease shall be
removed by any of the methods specified in SSPC-SP 1 or other agreed upon methods.
7. Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal, SSPC-SP11: Metallic surfaces that are prepared
according to this specification, when viewed without magnification, shall be free of all
visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, mill scale, rust, paint, oxide corrosion products, and other
foreign matter. Slight residues of rust and paint may be left in the lower portions of pits if
the original surface is pitted. Prior to power tool surface preparation, remove visible
deposits of oil or grease by any of the methods specified in SSPC-SP1, Solvent Cleaning,
or other agreed upon methods.
8. Near -White Blast Cleaning, SSPC-SP10 or NACE 2: A Near White Blast Cleaned surface,
when viewed without magnification, shall be free of all visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, mill
scale, rust, paint, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter, except for staining.
Staining shall be limited to no more than 5 percent of each square inch of surface area and
may consist of light shadows, slight streaks, or minor discoloration caused by stains of
rust, stains of mill scale, or stains of previously applied paint. Before blast cleaning, visible
deposits of oil or grease shall be removed by any of the methods specified in SSPC-SPI or
other agreed upon methods.
9. High- and Ultra -High Pressure Water Jetting for Steel and Other Hard Materials:
SSPC-SP12 or NACE 5: This standard provides requirements for the use of high- and
ultra-high pressure water jetting to achieve various degrees of surface cleanliness. This
standard is limited in scope to the use of water only without the addition of solid particles
in the stream.
10. Water Blasting, SSPC-SPI2/NACE No. 5: Removal of oil grease dirt, loose rust, loose
mill scale, and loose paint by water at pressures of 2,000 to 2,500 psi at a flow of 4 to 14
gallons per minute.
M. Vinyl Siding, Architectural Plastics, EIFS and Fiberglass: Clean thoroughly by scrubbing with a
warm, soapy water solution. Rinse thoroughly. Do not paint vinyl siding with any color darker
than the original color, unless the product and color are designed for such use. Painting with
darker colors may cause siding to warp.
N. Stucco: Must be clean and free of any loose stucco. If recommended procedures for applying
stucco are followed, and normal drying conditions prevail, the surface may be painted in 30 days.
The pH of the surface should be between 6 and 9, unless the products are designed to be used in
high pH environments such as Loxon.
O. Wood: Must be clean and dry. Prime and paint as soon as possible. Knots and pitch streaks must
be scraped, sanded, and spot primed before a full priming coat is applied. Patch all nail holes and
imperfections with a wood filler or putty and sand smooth.
INTERIOR, EXTERIOR AND INDUSTRIAL PAINTS AND COATINGS 09900-8
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Apply all coatings and materials with manufacture specifications in mind. Mix and thin
coatings according to manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Do not apply to wet or damp surfaces. Wait at least 30 days before applying to new concrete or
masonry. Or follow manufacturer's procedures to apply appropriate coatings prior to 30 days.
Test new concrete for moisture content.
C. Apply coatings using methods recommended by manufacturer.
D. Uniformly apply coatings without runs, drips, or sags, without brush marks, and with consistent
sheen.
E. Apply coatings at spreading rate required to achieve the manufacturers recommended dry film
thickness.
F. Regardless of number of coats specified, apply as many coats as necessary for complete hide, and
uniform appearance.
G. Inspection: The coated surface must be inspected and approved by the Architect just prior to each
coat.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished coatings from damage until completion of project.
B. Touch-up damaged coatings after substantial completion, following manufacturer's
recommendation for touch up or repair of damaged coatings. Repair any defects that will hinder
the performance of the coatings.
END OF SECTION 09900
INTERIOR, EXTERIOR AND INDUSTRIAL PAINTS AND COATINGS 09900-9
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 09 91 13 - EXTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following
exterior substrates:
1. Concrete.
2. Cementitious Siding Planks.
3. Concrete masonry units (CMU).
4. Steel.
5. Galvanized metal.
6. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated).
7. Wood.
8. Plastic trim fabrications.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint
systems on interior substrates.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523.
B. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523.
C. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523.
D. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
E. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
F. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 13 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application
instructions.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat.
1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square.
2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
3. Label each coat of each Sample.
4. Label each Sample for location and application area.
D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations
indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified,
with the proposed product highlighted.
3. VOC content.
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. MPI Standards:
1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved
Products List."
2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well -ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C).
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 13 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are
between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).
B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at
temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Benjamin Moore & Co.
2. Color Wheel Paints & Coatings.
3. Flex Bon Paints.
4. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.
5. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
6. Tower Paint.
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 BLOCK FILLERS
A. Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler: MPI #4.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2 or E3.
2.4 PRIMERS/SEALERS
A. Bonding Primer (Solvent Based): MPI #69.
1. VOC Content: E Range of El, E2 or E3.
EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 13 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
2.5 METAL PRIMERS
A. Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI #79.
1. VOC Content: E Range of El or E2.
B. Quick -Drying Alkyd Metal Primer: MPI #76.
1. VOC Content: E Range of El, E2 or E3.
C. Waterborne Galvanized -Metal Primer: MPI #134.
1. VOC Content: E Range of El, E2 or E3.
2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 1, EPR 2 or EPR 3.
D. Quick -Drying Primer for Aluminum: MPI #95.
1. VOC Content: E Range of El, E2 or E3.
2.6 EXTERIOR LATEX PAINTS
A. Exterior Latex (Flat): MPI #10 (Gloss Level 1).
1. VOC Content: E Range of El, E2 or E3.
B. Exterior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #11 (Gloss Level 5).
1. VOC Content: E Range of El, E2 or E3.
2.7 EXTERIOR ALKYD PAINTS
Exterior Alkyd Enamel (Semigloss): MPI #94 (Gloss Level 5).
1. VOC Content: E Range of El or E2.
2.8 QUICK -DRYING ENAMELS
A. Quick -Drying Enamel (Semigloss): MPI #81 (Gloss Level 5).
1. VOC Content: E Range of El, E2 or E3.
2.9 ALUMINUM PAINT
A. Aluminum Paint: MPI #1.
1. VOC Content: E Range of El, E2 or E3.
EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 13 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter
as follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Masonry (CMU): 12 percent.
3. Plaster: 12 percent.
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces
are dry.
1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and
conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual"
applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.
B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are
not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,
provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface -applied protection.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease,
and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie
coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do
not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that
permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content
or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written
instructions.
EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 13 - 5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods
recommended in writing by paint manufacturerRetain "Shop -Primed Steel Substrates"
Paragraph below if primers are shop applied and are not removed in the field.
G. Shop -Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop
paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with
SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop -primed surfaces.
H. Galvanized -Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by
mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of
subsequently applied paints.
I. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation.
J. Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might
impair bond of paints to substrates.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final
installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only.
B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of
same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide
sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film
has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any
time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied:
1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials
being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed,
and certified in presence of Contractor.
2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance of paint materials with product
requirements.
3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being
used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying -
paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with
rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from
EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 13 - 6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are
incompatible.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and
leave in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces.
3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:
1. Latex System: MPI EXT 3.1A.
a. Prime Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat.
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Exterior latex (flat).
B. CMU Substrates:
1. Latex System: MPI EXT 4.2A.
a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior latex block filler.
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Exterior latex (semigloss).
C. Steel Substrates:
1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D.
a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel (semigloss).
D. Galvanized -Metal Substrates:
1. Latex Over Water -Based Primer System: MPI EXT 5.3H.
a. Prime Coat: Waterborne galvanized -metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Exterior latex (semigloss).
E. Aluminum Substrates:
1. Latex System: MPI EXT 5.4H.
a. Prime Coat: Quick -drying primer for aluminum.
EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 13 - 7
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Exterior latex (semigloss).
F. Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates:
1. Latex System: MPI EXT 6.8A.
a. Prime Coat: Bonding primer (solvent based).
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Exterior latex (semigloss).
G. Stucco Substrates:
1. Latex System: MPI EXT 9.IA.
a. Prime Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat.
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Exterior latex (flat).
END OF SECTION 09 91 13
EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 13 - 8
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 09 91 23 - INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following
interior substrates:
1. Concrete.
2. Concrete masonry units (CMU).
3. Steel.
4. Galvanized metal.
5. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated).
6. Wood.
7. Gypsum board.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint
systems on exterior substrates.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523.
B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according
to ASTM D 523.
C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523.
D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523.
E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
G. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application
instructions.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.
1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square.
2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
3. Label each coat of each Sample.
4. Label each Sample for location and application area.
D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations
indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in
Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.
3. VOC content.
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. MPI Standards:
1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved
Products List."
2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well -ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C).
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are
between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).
B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5
deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Benjamin Moore & Co.
2. Color Wheel Paints & Coatings.
3. Flex Bon Paints.
4. ICI Paints.
5. M.A.B. Paints.
6. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.
7. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
8. Tower Paint.
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
B. VOC Content of Field -Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with
the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24); these requirements do not
apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:
1. Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.
2. Nonflat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L.
3. Anti -Corrosive and Anti -Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250
g/L.
4. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L.
5. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L.
6. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L.
7. Flat Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.
8. Nonflat Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L.
INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
9. Anti -Corrosive and Anti -Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250
g/L.
10. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L.
11. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L.
12. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L.
13. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC content of not more than 200 g/L.
14. Dry -Fog Coatings: VOC content of not more than 400 g/L.
15. Zinc -Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: VOC content of not more than 340 g/L.
16. Pre -Treatment Wash Primers: VOC content of not more than 420 g/L.
C. Chemical Components of Field -Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide topcoat paints
and anti -corrosive and anti -rust paints applied to ferrous metals that comply with the following
chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in
a fabrication or finishing shop:
1. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by
weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more
benzene rings).
2. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following:
a. Acrolein.
b. Acrylonitrile.
c. Antimony.
d. Benzene.
e. Butyl benzyl phthalate.
f. Cadmium.
g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate.
h. Di -n -butyl phthalate.
i. Di-n-octyl phthalate.
j. 1,2 -dichlorobenzene.
k. Diethyl phthalate.
I. Dimethyl phthalate.
m. Ethylbenzene.
n. Formaldehyde.
o. Hexavalent chromium.
p. Isophorone.
q. Lead.
r. Mercury.
s. Methyl ethyl ketone.
t. Methyl isobutyl ketone.
u. Methylene chloride.
v. Naphthalene.
w. Toluene (methylbenzene).
x. 1,1,1 -trichloroethane.
y. Vinyl chloride.
2.3 BLOCK FILLERS
A. Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler: MPI #4.
INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
2.4 PRIMERS/SEALERS
A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50.
B. Interior Alkyd Primer/Sealer: MPI #45.
C. Wood -Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint
systems indicated.
2.5 METAL PRIMERS
A. Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI #79.
B. Quick -Drying Alkyd Metal Primer: MPI #76.
C. Rust -Inhibitive Primer (Water Based): MPI #107.
D. Cementitious Galvanized -Metal Primer: MPI #26.
E. Waterborne Galvanized -Metal Primer: MPI #134.
F. Vinyl Wash Primer: MPI #80.
G. Quick -Drying Primer for Aluminum: MPI #95.
2.6 WOOD PRIMERS
A. Interior Latex -Based Wood Primer: MPI #39.
2.7 LATEX PAINTS
A. Interior Latex (Flat): MPI #53 (Gloss Level 1).
B. Interior Latex (Low Sheen): MPI #44 (Gloss Level 2).
C. Interior Latex (Eggshell): MPI #52 (Gloss Level 3).
D. Interior Latex (Satin): MPI #43 (Gloss Level 4).
E. Interior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #54 (Gloss Level 5).
F. Interior Latex (Gloss): MPI #114 (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at 60 deg).
G. High -Performance Architectural Latex (Low Sheen): MPI #138 (Gloss Level 2).
H. High -Performance Architectural Latex (Eggshell): MPI #139 (Gloss Level 3).
I. High -Performance Architectural Latex (Satin): MPI #140 (Gloss Level 4).
J. High -Performance Architectural Latex (Semigloss): MPI #141 (Gloss Level 5).
INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
2.8 ALKYD PAINTS
A. Interior Alkyd (Flat): MPI #49 (Gloss Level 1).
B. Interior Alkyd (Eggshell): MPI #51 (Gloss Level 3).
C. Interior Alkyd (Semigloss): MPI #47 (Gloss Level 5).
D. Interior Alkyd (Gloss): MPI #48 (Gloss Level 6).
2.9 QUICK -DRYING ENAMELS
A. Quick -Drying Enamel (Semigloss): MPI #81 (Gloss Level 5).
B. Quick -Drying Enamel (High Gloss): MPI #96 (Gloss Level 7).
2.10 DRY FOG/FALL COATINGS
A. Latex Dry Fog/Fall: MPI #118.
B. Waterbome Dry Fall: MPI #133.
C. Interior Alkyd Dry Fog/Fall: MPI #55.
2.11 FLOOR COATINGS
A. Interior Concrete Floor Stain: MPI #58.
B. Interior/Exterior Clear Concrete Floor Sealer (Water Based): MPI #99.
C. Interior/Exterior Clear Concrete Floor Sealer (Solvent Based): MPI #104.
2.12 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:
1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials.
Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If
paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at
Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.
2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.
3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials
being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove
noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces
painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials
from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two
paints are incompatible.
INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter
as follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
3. Wood: 15 percent.
4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
5. Plaster: 12 percent.
C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that fmishing compound is sanded smooth.
D. Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured.
E. Spray -Textured Ceiling Substrates: Verify that surfaces are dry.
F. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
G. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual"
applicable to substrates indicated.
B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are
not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,
provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface -applied protection if any.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease,
and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie
coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do
not paint surfaces if moisture content or allcalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that
permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 7
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content
or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written
instructions.
F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods
recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.
G. Shop -Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop
paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with
SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop -primed surfaces.
H. Galvanized -Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal
fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that
promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.
L Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation.
J. Wood Substrates:
1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.
2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic
wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
K. Cotton or Canvas Insulation Covering Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material
that might impair bond of paints to substrates.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.
Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture
with prime coat only.
3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar
hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of
same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide
sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film
has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 8
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
E. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and
occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Mechanical Work:
a. Uninsulated metal piping.
b. Uninsulated plastic piping.
c. Pipe hangers and supports.
d. Tanks that do not have factory -applied final finishes.
e. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets
and outlets.
f Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering
or other paintable jacket material.
g. Ductwork both insulated and uninsulated and mechanical equipment that is
exposed to view in normally occupied spaces.
h. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory -primed finish for field
painting.
2. Electrical Work:
a. Switchgear.
b. Panelboards.
c. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory -primed finish for field
painting.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and
leave in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces.
3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Substrates, Non -traffic Surfaces:
1. Latex System: MPI INT 3.1E.
a. Prime Coat. Interior latex matching topcoat.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior latex (low sheen).
INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 9
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
2. High -Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 3.1C.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.
b. Intermediate Coat: High-performance architectural latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: High-performance architectural latex (low sheen).
B. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces (where stain is scheduled or indicated):
1. Concrete Stain System: MPI INT 3.2E.
a. First Coat: Interior concrete floor stain.
b. Topcoat: Interior concrete floor stain.
C. CMU Substrates:
1. Latex System: MPI INT 4.2A.
a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior latex block filler.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior latex (low sheen).
2. High -Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 4.2D.
a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior latex block filler.
b. Intermediate Coat: High-performance architectural latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: High-performance architectural latex (low sheen).
D. Steel Substrates:
1. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 5.1Q.
a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior latex (satin).
E. Galvanized -Metal Substrates:
1. High -Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 5.3M.
a. Prime Coat: Waterborne galvanized -metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: High-performance architectural latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: High-performance architectural latex (satin).
F. Galvanized -Metal Roof Deck at Gymnasium (finish color matching adjacent steel roof
structure):
1. Water -Based Dry -Fall System: MPI INT 5.3H.
a. Prime Coat: Waterborne dry fall.
b. Topcoat: Waterborne dry fall.
G. Steel Roof Structure at Gymnasium (fmish color matching adjacent roof deck):
INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 10
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1. Water -Based Dry -Fall System: MPI INT 5.1C.
a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer.
b. Topcoat: Waterborne dry fall.
H. Aluminum (Not Anodized or Otherwise Coated) Substrates:
1. High -Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 5.4F.
a. Prime Coat: Quick -drying primer for aluminum.
b. Inteiuiediate Coat: High-performance architectural latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: High-performance architectural latex (satin).
I. Dressed Lumber Substrates: Including architectural woodwork and doors not indicated to be
factory finished.
1. Latex Over Allcyd Primer System: MPI INT 6.3U.
a. Prime Coat: Interior alkyd primer/sealer.
b. Intermediate Coat. Interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior latex (semigloss).
2. Alkyd System: MPI INT 6.3B.
a. Prime Coat: Interior alkyd primer/sealer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd (semigloss).
J. Gypsum Board Corridor Wall Substrates (not where "epoxy paint" is indicated):
1. High -Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 9.2B.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.
b. Intermediate Coat: High-performance architectural latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: High-performance architectural latex (low sheen).
K. Gypsum Board Non -Corridor Wall and Ceiling Substrates (not where "epoxy paint" is
indicated):
1. Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior latex (low sheen).
L. Plaster Substrates:
1. Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior latex (low sheen).
INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 11
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
END OF SECTION 09 9123
INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 12
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 09 60 00 - HIGH PERFORMANCE COATING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Work of this Section as shown or specified shall be in accordance with the requirements of the
Contract Documents.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to
complete epoxy flooring incorporating ceramic coated colored inorganic quartz aggregate and
integral base as selected on drawings and/or specified herein.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Concrete - Section 03300
(Note to specifier: Concrete should be either water cured or cured using sodium silicate curing
compounds only. Other types of curing compounds are generally not acceptable. Concrete
should be cured for a minimum of 28 days. On grade floors should have functioning vapor
retarder beneath slab.)
B. Floor drains - Division 15
(Note to Specifier: Floor drains, clean -outs etc. should be of the floor -flange type
manufactured for use with composition floors by most major drain manufacturers.)
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data application instructions and general
recommendations for decorative quartz epoxy flooring specified herein.
C. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1 and Credit MR 4.2: For products having recycled
content, submit documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and
preconsumer recycled content.
a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
b. Include LEED Product Information Form for LEED Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2.
HIGH PERFORMANCE COATING 099600-1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.2: For field applied, interior, paints coatings and primers,
include printed statement of VOC content indicating compliance with Credit
requirements.
a. Include LEED Product Information Form for LEED Credit EQ 4.2.
3. Provide additional documentation for products as required to achieve each Credit(s).
D. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's color charts showing range of
standard colors available.
1. Submit 2-1/2" x 4" samples in color and quartz aggregate combination as selected.
E. Material certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that the decorative quartz epoxy flooring
submitted complies with requirements specified herein.
F. Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer's written instructions for recommended
maintenance practices.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer or applicator who has specialized in
installing resinous flooring types similar to that required for this Project and who is acceptable
to manufacturer of primary materials.
B. Single -Source Responsibility: Obtain epoxy component of flooring materials, including
primers, resins, hardening agents, and finish or sealing coats, from a single manufacturer.
Obtain ceramic -coated quartz aggregate from primary manufacturer of that product.
1.6 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers with seals unbroken and bearing
manufacturer's labels containing brand name and directions for storage and mixing with other
components.
B. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's directions to prevent deterioration from
moisture, heat, cold, direct sunlight, or other detrimental effects.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Comply with epoxy resin composition flooring manufacturer's
directions for maintenance of ambient and substrate temperature, moisture, humidity,
ventilation, and other conditions required to execute and protect work.
B. Lighting: Permanent lighting will be in place and working before installing decorative quartz
epoxy flooring.
HIGH PERFORMANCE COATING 099600-2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Decorative quartz epoxy flooring shall be Dex-O-Tex Decor-Flor as manufactured by
Crossfield Products Corp. in Rancho Dominguez, California and Roselle Park, New Jersey.
2.2 PROPERTIES
A. Colors: As indicated, or if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's
standard color combinations.
B. Physical Properties: Provide flooring system that meets or exceeds the listed minimum
physical property requirements when tested according to the referenced standard test method in
parentheses.
Compressive Strength
Complete System (ASTM C109)
Resin Component (ASTM D695)
8,556 psi.
12,900 psi.
Surface Hardness (ASTM D2240) Durometer D 85
Aggregate Hardness (Moh's Mineral Scale) 6 1/2-7
Indentation Characteristics (MIL -PRF -3134)
Para. 4.7.4.2.1 -Steadily Applied Load) 0.005 indentation
Impact Resistance (MIL -PRF -3134) 0.011 indentation
Para. (4.7.3) No cracking, loss of bond
Adhesion (ACI Comm. 503.1-92) 345 psi. (100% failure in concrete)
Water Absorption (MIL -PRF -3134) Less than 1%
Abrasion Resistance (ASTM C501) 19 Wear Index (H-22 Wheel)
Tensile Strength (ASTM D638) 4,400 psi.
Resin Component
Elongation (ASTM D638) 19.6%
Resin Component
HIGH PERFORMANCE COATING 099600-3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
2.3 SUPPLEMENTAL MATERIALS
A. Waterproofing Membrane: Type recommended or produced by manufacturer of epoxy resin
composition flooring system for type of service and floor condition indicated. (Note to
Specifier: The use of waterproof membrane is optional and is generally confined to suspended
floors and in rooms having floor drains and subject to very wet spillage and service. All areas
requiring membrane treatment should be clearly shown on plans and finish schedules.)
B. Anti -Microbial Additive: Incorporate antimicrobial chemical additive to control growth of
most bacteria, fungi, algae and actinomycetes. (Note to Specifier: The use of antimicrobial
additive is optional. Its use poses no health hazard.)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine the areas and conditions where decorative quartz epoxy flooring is to be installed and
notify the Architect of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected by the
Contractor in a manner acceptable to the Architect.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Substrate: Perform preparation and cleaning procedures according to flooring manufacturer's
instructions for particular substrate conditions involved, and as specified. Provide clean, dry,
and neutral substrate for flooring application.
B. Concrete Surfaces: Shot -blast, acid etch or power scarify as required to obtain optimum bond
of flooring to concrete. Remove sufficient material to provide a sound surface, free of laitance,
glaze, efflorescence, and any bond -inhibiting curing compounds or form release agents.
Remove grease, oil, and other penetrating contaminates. Repair damaged and deteriorated
concrete to acceptable condition. Leave surface free of dust, dirt, laitance, and efflorescence.
C. Materials: Mix epoxy resin components when required, and prepare materials according to
flooring system manufacturer's instructions.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply each component of decorative quartz epoxy flooring system according to
manufacturer's directions to produce a uniform monolithic flooring surface of thickness
indicated.
B. Broadcast Coats: Apply liberal application of clear epoxy resin mixture, allow to self -level,
broadcast (by hand or spray machine) ceramic coated quartz aggregate, allow to set to hardness,
sweep off excess unbonded aggregate and repeat process to achieve total nominal thickness
of 1/16"-1/8".
HIGH PERFORMANCE COATING 099600-4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
C. Finish or Sealing Coats: After quartz filled broadcast coats have cured sufficiently, apply finish
coats of type recommended by flooring manufacturer to produce finish matching approved
submittal sample and in number of coats and spreading rates recommended by manufacturer.
1. Finished floor shall be 1/16"-1/8" thick, uniform in color and free of trowel marks.
D. Cove Base: Apply cove base mix to wall surfaces at locations shown to form cove base height
of 4 inches unless otherwise indicated. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions and details
including taping, mixing, priming, troweling, sanding, and top -coating of cove base.
3.4 CURING, PROTECTION AND CLEANING.
A. Cure decorative quartz epoxy flooring materials according to manufacturer's directions, taking
care to prevent contamination during application stages and before completing curing process.
Close application area for a minimum of 24 hours.
DEX-O-TEX PRODUCT LINE
Crossfield Products Corp.
www.dexotex.com
END OF SECTION 099600
3000 E. Harcourt Street
Rancho Dominguez, CA 90221
Tel: (310) 886-9100
Fax: (310) 886-9119
140 Valley Road
Roselle Park, NJ 07204
Tel: (908) 245-2800
Fax: (908) 245-2583
HIGH PERFORMANCE COATING
099600-5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 101100 - VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Visual display board assemblies.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, finishes, and accessories for visual display units.
2. Include electrical characteristics for motorized units.
B. Shop Drawings: For visual display units.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment to other work.
2.
3. Include sections of typical trim members.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of visual display unit indicated, for units with
factory -applied color fmishes, and as follows:
1. Samples of facings for each visual display panel type, indicating color and texture.
2. Actual factory -finish color samples, applied to substrate.
3. Include accessory Samples to verify color selected.
D. Samples: For each type of visual display unit indicated.
1. Visual Display Panel: Not less than 8-1/2 by 1.1 inches (215 by 280 mm), with facing,
core, and backing indicated for fmal Work. Include one panel for each type, color, and
texture required.
2. Trim: 6 -inch- (150 -mm-) long sections of each trim profile.
3. Display Rail: 6 -inch- (150 -mm-) long section of each type.
4.
E. Product Schedule: For visual display units.
VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 101100 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for surface -burning characteristics of tackboards.
C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and
approved by manufacturer.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver factory -fabricated visual display units completely assembled in one piece. If dimensions
exceed maximum manufactured unit size, or if unit size is impracticable to ship in one piece,
provide two or more pieces with joints in locations indicated on approved Shop Drawings.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install visual display units until spaces are
enclosed and weathertight, wet -work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is
complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and
humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with visual display
units by field measurements before fabrication.
1. Allow for trimming and fitting where taking field measurements before fabrication might
delay the Work.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for Porcelain -Enamel Face Sheets: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
porcelain -enamel face sheets that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
I. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Surfaces lose original writing and erasing qualities.
b. Surfaces exhibit crazing, cracking, or flalcing.
2. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.
VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 101100 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of visual display unit from single source from single
manufacturer.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Surface -Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing
agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Flame -Spread Index: 25 or less.
2. Smoke -Developed Index: 50 or less.
2.3 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARD ASSEMBLY
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
B. Basis -of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or comparable
product by one of the following:
1. A -I Visual Systems.
2. AARCO Products. Inc.
3. ADI_Lemcoo Inc.
4. Architectural School Products Ltd.
5. Aristocrat industries, Inc.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Bangor Cork Company, Inc.
Best -Rite Manufacturing: a brand division of MooreC:o, Inc.
Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.
an_Vt. 1.1 l lnc.
'White: a division ofGlenroa Inc.
Csllent Manufacturing, Inc.
Marsh Industries, Inc.; Visual Products Group.
Newtine Productsjnc.
Peter PeePer Products, Inc.
Platinum Visual Systems: a division ofABC School Er ui n
C. Visual Display Board Assembly: factory fabricated.
1. Assembly: markerboard.
2. Corners: Square.
3. Width: As indicated on Drawings .
4. Height: As indicated on Drawings .
5. Mounting Method: Direct to wall.
VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 101100 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
D. Markerboard Panel: [Porcelain -enamel -faced]
faced] markerboard panel on core indicated.
1. Color: White .
E. Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricated from not less than 0.062 -inch- (1.57 -mm-) thick,
extruded aluminum; standard size and shape .
[High-pressure laminate -faced] [Melamine -
1. Field -Applied Trim: Manufacturer's standard, snap -on trim with no visible screws or
exposed jointsslip-on trim.
2. Aluminum Finish: Clear anodic finish.
F. Chalktray: Manufacturer's standard; continuous.
1. Box Type: Extruded aluminum with slanted front, grooved tray, and cast -aluminum end
closures.
2. Solid Type: Extruded aluminum with ribbed section and smoothly curved exposed ends.
G. Display Rail: Manufacturer's standard, extruded -aluminum display rail with plastic -
impregnated -cork insert, end stops, and continuous paper holder, designed to hold
accessories.
1. Size: [1 inch (25 mm)] [2 inches (50 mm)] [3 inches (75 rnm)] high by [full length of
visual display unit] [length indicated on Drawings].
2.
2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical fmishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations
in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved
Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.5
A.
B.
C.
ALUMINUM FINISHES
Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.
Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A32/A34, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.
Baked -Enamel or Powder -Coat Finish: AAMA 2603, except with a minimum dry film thickness
of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning,
conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.
VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 101100 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, surface conditions of wall, and other conditions affecting performance of
the Work.
B. Examine roughing -in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of connections
before installation of motorized, sliding visual display units.
C. Examine walls and partitions for proper preparation and backing for visual display units.
D. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth where sliding visual display units will
be installed.
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.
B. Clean substrates of substances, such as dirt, mold, and mildew, that could impair the
performance of and affect the smooth, finished surfaces of visual display boards.
C. Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings,
cracks, defects, projections, depressions, and substances that will impair bond between visual
display units and wall surfaces.
D. Prime wall surfaces indicated to receive visual display units and as recommended in writing by
primer/sealer manufacturer and visual display unit manufacturer.
E. Prepare recesses for sliding visual display units as required by type and size of unit.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on
Drawings, or if not indicated, at heights indicated below. Keep perimeter lines straight, level,
and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and
accessories necessary for complete installation.
B. Factory -Fabricated Visual Display Board Assemblies: Attach concealed clips, hangers, and
grounds to wall surfaces and to visual display board assemblies with fasteners at not more than
16 inches (400 mm) o.c. Secure tops and bottoms of boards to walls.
C. Visual Display Board Assembly Mounting Heights: Install visual display units at mounting
heights indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated, at heights indicated below.
VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 101100 - 5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean visual display units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach one
removable cleaning instructions label to visual display unit in each room.
B. Touch up factory -applied fmishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
C. Cover and protect visual display units after installation and cleaning.
END OF SECTION 101100
VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 101100 - 6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 101423 - PANEL SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Illuminated panel signs.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Accessible: In accordance with the accessibility standard.
B. Illuminated: Illuminated by lighting source integrally constructed as part of the sign unit.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Furnish templates for placement of sign -anchorage devices embedded in permanent
construction by other installers.
B. Furnish templates for placement of electrical service embedded in peunanent construction by
other installers.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For panel signs.
1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work.
2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by
others, and accessories.
3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elementsand layout for each sign at least .
4. Show locations of electrical service connections.
5. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign assembly, exposed component, and exposed
finish.
1. Include representative Samples of available typestyles and graphic symbols.
PANEL SIGNAGE 101423 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign assembly showing all components and with the
required finish(es), in manufacturer's standard size unless otherwise indicated and as follows:
1. Panel Signs• Not less than 12 inches (300 mm) square, including corner.
2. Exposed Accessories: Full-size Sampleof each accessory type.
E. Sign Schedule: Use same designations specified or indicated on Drawings or in a sign schedule.
F. Delegated -Design Submittal:
1. Include structural analysis calculations for signs indicated to comply with design loads;
signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installerandmanufaeturer.
B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained
and approved by manufacturer.
1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify locations of anchorage devices andelectrical service embedded in
permanent construction by other installers by field measurements before fabrication, and
indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering.
b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image.
c. Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PANEL SIGNAGE 101423 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PANEL SIGNS, GENERAL
A. Regional Materials: Panel signs shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of Project
site.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000
"Quality Requirements," to design sign structure and anchorage of illuminated panel sign
type(s) to withstand design loads .
B. Thermal Movements: For exterior signs, allow for thermal movements from ambient and
surface temperature changes.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material
surfaces.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2.3 SIGNS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirementsavailable manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Ac
2.
3. Allen Industies�Ino.
4. Allen ial_ki gs International.
5. APCO Graphics, Inc.
6. ASE, Inc.
7. ASI Si
; Braille -Tac Division.
8.
9. Bun
10. Clarke Systems.
11. Dislce Sian Cern ra
12.
13. InPro Corporation.
14. Mohawk Sign Systems.
15. Nelson -Harkins Industries.
16. Poblocki Si nCom
17. Seton Identifie
18. Su:. ersi
19.
20. Vowar Products, I
Vista System.
Products.
nv
The ; Division of Stamp -Rite, Inc.
PANEL SIGNAGE 101423 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
B. Panel Sign : Sign with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and characters having uniform
faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows:
1. Illuminated Panel Sign: Backlighted construction with [ LED lighting including
transformers, insulators, and other accessories for operability, with provision for
servicing and concealing connections to building electrical system. Use tight or sealed
joint construction to prevent unintentional light leakage. Space lamps apart from each
other and away from sign surfaces as needed to illuminate evenly.
a. Power: As indicated on electrical Drawings.
b. Weeps: Provide weep holes to drain water at lowest part of exterior signs. Equip
weeps with permanent baffles to block light leakage without inhibiting
drainage.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signage,
noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following:
1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed.
2. For exterior exposure, furnish [nonferrous -metal] [stainless-steel] [or] [hot -dip
galvanized] <Insert requirement devices unless otherwise indicated.
3. Exposed Metal -Fastener Components, General:
a. Fabricated from same basic metal and finish of fastened metal unless otherwise
indicated.
b. Fastener Heads: For nonstructural connections, use [flathead] [or] [oval
countersunk] <Insert shape> screws and bolts with tamper-resistant [Allen -
head] [spanner -head] [or] [one -way -head] <Insert slot design> slots unless
otherwise indicated.
4. Sign Mounting Fasteners:
a. Concealed Studs: Concealed (blind), threaded studs welded or brazed to back of
sign material or screwed into back of sign assembly, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Projecting Studs: Threaded studs with sleeve spacer, welded or brazed to back of
sign material or screwed into back of sign assembly, unless otherwise indicated.
c. Through Fasteners: Exposed metal fasteners matching sign finish, with type of
head indicated, installed in predrilled holes.
5. Inserts: Furnish inserts to be set by other trades into concrete or masonry work.
B. Adhesives: As recommended by sign manufacturer and with a VOC content of [70] <Insert
value> g/L or less for adhesives used inside the weatherproofing system and applied on-site
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
C. Adhesives: As recommended by sign manufacturer and that comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental
Chambers."
PANEL SIGNAGE 101423 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
D. Two -Face Tape: Manufacturer's standard high -bond, foam -core tape, 0.045 inch (1.14 mm)
thick, with adhesive on both sides.
E. Hook -and -Loop Tape: Manufacturer's standard two-part tape consisting of hooked part on sign
back and looped side on mounting surface.
F. Magnetic Tape: Manufacturer's standard magnetic tape with adhesive on one side.
G. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated.
1. Preassemble signs and assemblies in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble
signs and assemblies only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly
mark units for reassembly and installation; apply markings in locations concealed from
view after final assembly.
2. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist
water penetration and retention.
3. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in welding and brazing. Provide welds
and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean
exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces.
4. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are
inconspicuous.
5. Internally brace signs for stability and for securing fasteners.
6. Provide rebates, lugs, and brackets necessary to assemble components and to attach to
existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where
possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish.
B. Surface -Engraved Graphics: Machine engrave characters and other graphic devices into panel
surface indicated to produce precisely formed copy, incised to uniform depth.
1. Engraved Metal: Fill engraved graphics with manufacturer's standard baked enamel.
2. Engraved Opaque Acrylic Sheet: Fill engraved graphics with manufacturer's standard
enamel.
3. Face -Engraved Clear Acrylic Sheet: Fill engraved copy with manufacturer's standard
enamel. Apply manufacturer's standard opaque background color coating to back face of
acrylic sheet.
4. Engraved Plastic Laminate- Engrave through exposed face ply of plastic -laminate sheet
to expose contrasting core ply.
2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping
PANEL SIGNAGE 101423 - 5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
C. Directional Finishes: Run grain with long dimension of each piece and perpendicular to long
dimension of finished trim or border surface unless otherwise indicated.
D. Organic, Anodic, and Chemically Produced Finishes: Apply to formed metal after fabrication
but before applying contrasting polished finishes on raised features unless otherwise indicated.
2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, [Class I, 0.018 mm] [Class II, 0.010 mm] or thicker.
B. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, [Class I, 0.018 mm] [Class II, 0.010 mm] or thicker.
C. Baked -Enamel or Powder -Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness
of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning,
conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of signage
work.
B. Verify that sign -support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without gaps or
irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
C. Verify that anchor inserts are correctly sized and located to accommodate signs.
D. Verify that electrical service is correctly sized and located to accommodate signs.
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign
surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.
2. Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility standard.
3. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that
would impair installation.
PANEL SIGNAGE 101423 - 6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
4. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with
grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous
paint.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed signs and signs that do not comply with specified
requirements. Replace signs with damaged or deteriorated finishes or components that cannot
be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.
C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's
written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in fmish. Maintain signs in a clean
condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner.
END OF SECTION 101423
PANEL SIGNAGE 101423 - 7
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 10 21 13 - PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Solid -plastic toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures, entrance screens and
urinal screens.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry" for overhead support of floor -and -ceiling -anchored
compartments.
2. Section 10 28 00 "Toilet and Bath Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab bars,
sanitary napkin disposals, and similar accessories mounted on toilet compartments.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes for toilet compartments.
B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compaiAuents.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment details.
2. Show locations of cutouts for compartment -mounted toilet accessories.
3. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures.
4. Show locations of floor drains.
5. Show floor and ceiling -mounted items, as well as overhead support or bracing locations.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of toilet compartment material indicated.
1. Include Samples of hardware and accessories involving material and color selection.
D. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes unless
otherwise indicated:
1. Each type of material, color, and finish required for toilet compartments, prepared on 6-
inch- (152 -mm-) square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work.
PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 21 13 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
2. Each type of hardware and accessory.
E. Product Schedule: For toilet compartments, prepared by or under the supervision of supplier,
detailing location and selected colors for toilet compartment material.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certificates: For each type of toilet compartment.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For toilet compaitments to include in maintenance manuals.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents and source.
1. Door Hinges: One hinge with associated fasteners.
2. Latch and Keeper: One latch and keeper(s) with associated fasteners.
3. Door Bumper: One bumper with associated fasteners.
4. Door Pull: One door pull with associated fasteners.
5. Fasteners: Ten fasteners of each size and type.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and
other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before
fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Surface -Burning Characteristics: Comply with NFPA 286; testing by a qualified testing agency.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. Independent testing
might be required.
2.2 SOLID -PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 21 13 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1. Accurate Partitions Corporation.
2. American Sanitary Partition Corporation.
3. Ampco, Inc.
4. Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions.
5. General Partitions Mfg. Corp.
6. Global Steel Products Corp.
7. Hadrian Manufacturing Inc.
8. Knickerbocker Partition Corporation.
9. Metpar Corp.
10. Partition Systems Incorporated of' South Carolina; Columbia Partitions.
11. Scranton Products.
B. Toilet -Enclosure Style: Floor to ceiling anchored.
C. Entrance -Screen Style: Floor to ceiling anchored.
D. Urinal -Screen Style: Floor to ceiling anchored.
E. Door, Panel, Screen, and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE) panel
material, not less than 1 inch thick, seamless, with eased edges and with homogenous color and
pattern throughout thickness of material.
1. Integral Stealth Hinges: Configure doors and pilasters to receive integral hinges.
2. Color and Pattern: as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
F. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Manufacturer's standard design; plastic shoes at floor
location and stainless steel sleeves at ceiling location.
G. Urinal -Screen Post: Manufacturer's standard post design of material matching the thickness and
construction of pilasters; with shoe and sleeve as stated above.
H. Brackets (Fittings):
1. Stirrup Type: Ear or U -brackets, plastic construction.
2.3 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories.
1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard paired, self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold
doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees, allowing emergency access by lifting door.
Mount with through -bolts.
2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's heavy-duty surface -mounted aluminum latch unit
designed to resist damage due to slamming, with combination rubber -faced door strike
and keeper, and with provision for emergency access. Provide units that comply with
regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible.
Mount with through -bolts.
3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard hook and rubber -tipped bumper, sized to prevent in -
swinging door from hitting compartment -mounted accessories. Mount with through -bolts.
PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 21 13 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard heavy-duty rubber -tipped bumper at out -swinging
doors and entrance -screen doors. Mount with through -bolts.
5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard heavy-duty pull at out -swinging doors that complies
with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at
compartments designated as accessible. Mount with through -bolts.
B. Overhead Bracing: If required manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded -aluminum head rail
with antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish.
C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, finished
to match the items they are securing, with theft -resistant -type heads. Provide security torx head
bolts for through -bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use plastic anchors.
D. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM 64663-T5 alloy.
E. Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher -leveled standard of flatness.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabrication, General: Fabricate toilet compartment components to sizes indicated. Coordinate
requirements and provide cutouts for through -partition toilet accessories where required for
attachment of toilet accessories.
B. Floor -and -Ceiling -Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant
anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at tops and bottoms of pilasters. Provide
shoes and sleeves as specified.
C. Urinal -Screen Posts: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant anchoring assemblies
with leveling adjustment nuts at tops and bottoms of posts. Provide shoes and sleeves as
specified.
D. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24 -inch wide, in -swinging doors for
standard toilet compartments and 36 -inch wide, out -swinging doors with a minimum 32 -inch -
wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
fastening, support, alignment, operating clearances, and other conditions affecting performance
of the Work.
1. Confirm location and adequacy of blocking and supports required for installation.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 21 13 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid,
straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring
devices. Installer shall have five years experience.
1. Maximum Clearances:
a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch (13 mm).
b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch (25 mm).
2. Full -Height (Continuous) Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with full -
height brackets.
a. Locate bracket fasteners so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints if
possible.
b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.
B. Floor -and -Ceiling -Anchored Units: Secure pilasters to supporting construction and level,
plumb, and tighten. Hang doors and adjust so doors are level and aligned with panels when
doors are in closed position.
C. Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level and
plumb, rigid, and secured to resist lateral impact.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's
written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in -swinging doors to hold doors open
approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out -swinging
doors return doors to fully closed position.
END OF SECTION 10 21 13
PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 21 13 - 5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 102113 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Solid Color Reinforced Composite (SCRC) Substrate: (Bobrick SierraSeries®)
1. Toilet Partitions:
a. Configuration: Ceiling -Hung.
2. Urinal Privacy Screens:
a. Configuration: Wall -Hung.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 055000 - Metal Fabrications, coordination with overhead supports; steel beams above
finished ceiling to secure Ceiling -Hung and floor -to -ceiling stiles.
B. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry, coordination with blocking in walls to secure panels, wall
posts and stiles.
C. Section 095000 - Ceilings, coordination with layout and installation.
D. Section 092000 - Plaster and Gypsum Board, coordination with blocking.
E. Section 093000 - Tiling, coordination with layout and installation.
F. Section 102800 - Washroom Accessories, for accessories.
G. Section 102814 - Baby Changing Stations, for baby changing stations.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data sheets for each product specified.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's shop drawings for each product specified, including
the following:
1. Plans, elevations, details of construction and attachment to adjacent construction.
2. Show anchorage locations and accessory items.
3. Verify dimensions with field measurements prior to fmal production of toilet
compartments.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113-1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Provide products manufactured by a company with a minimum of 10 years
successful experience manufacturing similar products.
B. Single Source Requirements: To the greatest extent possible provide products from a single
manufacturer.
C. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with requirements applicable in the jurisdiction of the
project, including but not limited to ADA and ICC/ANSI A117.1 requirements as applicable.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and handle materials and products in strict compliance with manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations. Protect from damage.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty (SierraSeries): Manufacturer's standard 25 year limited warranty for
panels, doors, and stiles against breakage, corrosion, and defects in factory workmanship.
Manufacturer's standard 1 year guarantee against defects in material and workmanship for
stainless steel door hardware and mounting brackets.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Basis -of -Design Products: Based on the quality and performance requirements of the project,
specifications are based solely on the products of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc..
www.bobrick.com. Location of manufacturing shall be the United States.
B. Substitutions: The Architect will consider products of comparable manufacturers as a
substitution, pending the contractor's submission of adequate documentation of the substitution
in accordance with procedures in Division 1 of the Project Manual. Documentation shall
include a list of five similar projects of equivalent size where products have been installed for a
minimum of two years, and manufacturer's certification that products are fabricated in the
United States.
2.2 SOLID COLOR REINFORCED COMPOSITE (SCRC) SUBSTRATE (SierraSeries)
A. Solid Color Reinforced Composite (SCRC) Partitions: Bobrick SierraSeries.
1. Color: As indicated on Drawings.
B. Toilet Partitions:
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113-2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1. Configuration: Ceiling -Hung partitions, 10 ft (3048 mm) maximum ceiling height.
a. Basis -of -Design: Bobrick 1098G SierraSeries Toilet Partitions, gap -free.
1) Design: Gap -free interlocking design.
2) Hardware: Standard hardware.
2. Fire Resistance:
a. Flame Spread Index (ASTM E 84): 45 for panels, doors and stiles.
b. Smoke Developed Index (ASTM E 84): 120 for panels, 95 for doors and stiles.
c. National Fire Protection Association/International Building Code Interior Wall and
Ceiling Finish: Class B.
d. Uniform Building Code: Class II.
C. Urinal Privacy Screens:
1. Basis -of -Design: Bobrick 1095 SierraSeries Wall -Hung Urinal Privacy Screens.
a. Brackets: 11 gauge (3 mm), double thickness.
2. Hardware: To match partition hardware.
3. Fire Resistance:
a. Flame Spread Index (ASTM E 84): 45 for panels and stiles.
b. Smoke Developed Index (ASTM E 84): 120 for panels, 95 for stiles.
c. National Fire Protection Association/International Building Code Interior Wall and
Ceiling Finish: Class B.
d. Uniform Building Code: Class 11.
D. Materials: Solid color reinforced composite (SCRC) material for stiles, panels, doors, and
screens with Bobrick GraffitiOfl coating, thermoset and integrally fused into homogenous
piece; high density polyethylene (HDPE), high density polypropylene not acceptable.
1. Composition: Dyes, organic fibrous material, and polycarbonate/phenolic resins.
2. Surface Treatment: Non -ghosting, graffiti resistant surface integrally bonded to core
through a series of manufacturing steps requiring thermal and mechanical pressure.
3. Edges: Same color as the surface.
4. Acceptable SCRC Products: Or manufacturer approved equal.
a. Ultimate Corian System by Shower Shapes.
b. WilsonArt Gibraltar Material.
c. WilsonArt EarthStone Material.
E. Performance Requirements:
1. Graffiti Resistance (ASTM D 6578): Passed cleanability test; 5 staining agents.
2. Scratch Resistance (ASTM D 2197): Maximum load value exceeds 10 kilograms.
3. Impact Resistance (ASTM D 2794): Maximum impact force exceeds 30 inch -pounds.
4. Smoke Developed Index (ASTM E 84): Less than 450.
5. Flame Spread Index (ASTM E 84): Less than 75.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113-3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
F. Finished Thickness:
1. Stiles and Doors: 3/4 inch (19 mm)
a. Finished thickness of doors and stiles to ensure flush front.
2. Panels and Screens: 1/2 inch (13 mm).
G. Wall Posts: Pre -drilled for door hardware, 18-8, Type 304, 16 gauge (1.6 mm) stainless steel
with satin fmish; 1 inch (25 mm) x 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) x 58 inches high (1473 mm).
H. Anchors: Expansion shields and threaded rods at floor connections as applicable. Threaded
rods secured to supports above ceiling as applicable. Supports above ceiling furnished and
installed as Work of Section 055000.
I. Hardware:
1. Compliance: Operable with one hand, without tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the
wrist, and force to operate does not exceed five pounds.
2. Emergency Access: Hinges, latch allow door to be lifted over keeper from outside
compartment on inswing doors.
3. Materials: 18-8, Type 304, heavy -gauge stainless steel with satin finish. Chrome -plated
"Zamak", aluminum, or extruded plastic hardware not acceptable.
4. Fastening: Hardware secured to door and stile by through -bolted, theft -resistant, pin -in -
head Torx stainless steel machine screws into factory -installed, threaded brass inserts.
Fasteners secured directly into core not acceptable.
a. Threaded Brass Inserts: Factory -installed; withstand direct pull force exceeding
1500 lb (680 kg) per insert.
5. Clothes Hooks: Projecting no more than 1-1/8 inch (29 mm) from face of door.
6. Hardware Type: Standard, commercial hardware.
a. Latching: Track of door latch prevents inswing doors from swinging out beyond
stile; on outswing doors, door keeper prevents door from swinging in beyond stile;
14 gauge (2 mm) sliding door latch, 11 gauge (3.2 nun) keeper. Twist -style door
latch operation not acceptable.
b. Hinges: Balanced, with field -adjustable cam to permit door to be fully closed or
partially open when compartment is unoccupied.
c. Locking: Door locked from inside by sliding door latch into keeper.
d. Mounting Brackets: Mounted inside compartment; exposed brackets on exterior of
compartment not acceptable with the exception of outswing doors.
7. Hardware Type: Institutional Hardware (.67).
a. Latching: 14 gauge (2 mm) sliding door latch, 11 gauge (3.2 mm) keeper; latch
slides on a shock -resistant nylon track. Twist -style door latch operation not
acceptable.
b. Hinges: 16 gauge (1.6 mm) stainless steel, self-closing, 3 section hinges.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113-4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
c. Mounting Brackets: 18 gauge (1.2 mm) stainless steel and extend full height of
panel.
1) U -Channels: Secure panels to stiles.
2) Angle Brackets: Secure stiles -to -walls and panels -to -walls.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates including but not limited to blocking and supports in walls and ceilings at
points of attachment using methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrates under the project conditions.
1. Inspect areas scheduled to receive compartments for correct dimensions, plumbness of
walls, and soundness of surfaces that would affect installation of mounting brackets.
2. Verify spacing of plumbing fixtures to assure compatibility with installation of
compartments.
B. If preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect in writing of deviations
from manufacturer's recommended installation tolerances and conditions.
C. Do not proceed with installation until substrates have been properly prepared with blocking and
supports in walls and ceilings at points of attachment and deviations from manufacturer's
recommended tolerances are corrected. Commencement of installation constitutes acceptance
of conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in strict compliance with manufacturer's written instructions and
recommendations, including the following:
1. Verify blocking and supports in walls and ceilings have been installed properly at points
of attachment.
2. Verify location does not interfere with door swings or use of fixtures.
3. Use fasteners and anchors suitable for substrate and project conditions
4. Install units rigid, straight, plumb, and level.
5. Conceal evidence of drilling, cutting, and fitting to room finish.
6. Test for proper operation.
3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Adjust hardware for proper operation after installation. Set hinge cam on in -swinging doors to
hold doors open when unlatched. Set hinge cam on out -swinging doors to hold unlatched doors
in closed position.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113-5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products.
C. Clean exposed surfaces of compartments, hardware, and fittings.
END OF SECTION 102113
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113-6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 102239 - FOLDING GLASS -PANEL PARTITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes manually operated, glass -panel partitions.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for supports that attach supporting tracks to
overhead structural system.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. STC: Sound Transmission Class.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site .
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For operable glass -panel partitions.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, numbered panel installation sequence, and
attachments to other work.
2. Indicate stacking and operating clearances. Indicate location and installation requirements
for hardware and track, blocking, and direction of travel.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed material, finish, covering, or facing.
1. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed material, finish, covering, or facing,
prepared on Samples of size indicated below:
I. Panel Edge Material: Not less than 3 inches (75 nun) long.
FOLDING GLASS -PANEL PARTITIONS 102239.13 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
2. Glass: Units 12 inches (300 mm) square.
3. Hardware: One of each exposed door -operating device.
E. Delegated -Design Submittal: For operable glass -panel partitions.
1. Include design calculations for seismic restraints.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
1. Partition track, track supports and bracing, switches, turning space, and storage layout.
2. Suspended ceiling components.
3. Structural members to which suspension systems are attached.
4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
5. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:
a. Lighting fixtures.
b. HVAC ductwork, outlets, and inlets.
c. Speakers.
d. Sprinklers.
e. Smoke detectors.
f. Access panels.
B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installermanufacturerandvendor.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of operable glass -panel partition.
D. Product Test Reports: For each operable glass -panel partition, for tests performed by a qualified
testing agency.
E. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For operable glass -panel partitions to include in maintenance
manuals.
1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data,"
include the following:
a. Panel fmish and finishes for exposed trim and accessories. Include precautions for
cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and
performance.
b. Seals, hardware, track, track switches, carriers, and other operating components.
FOLDING GLASS -PANEL PARTITIONS 102239.13 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by
an FSC -accredited certification body.
B. Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC -accredited
certification body.
C. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and
approved by manufacturer.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protectively package and sequence panels in order for installation. Clearly mark packages and
panels with numbering system used on Shop Drawings. Do not use permanent markings on
panels.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of operable glass -panel
partitions that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Faulty operation of operable glass -panel partitions.
b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.
2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000
"Quality Requirements," to design seismic bracing of tracks to structure above.
B. Acoustical Performance: Provide operable glass -panel partitions tested by a qualified testing
agency for the following acoustical properties according to test methods indicated:
1. Sound -Transmission Requirements: Operable glass -panel partition assembly tested for
laboratory sound -transmission loss performance according to ASTM E 90, determined by
ASTM E 413, and rated for not less than the STC indicated.
C. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide wood -framed panels complying with one of the
following as determined by testing identical products by UL or another testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
FOLDING GLASS -PANEL PARTITIONS 102239.13 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1. Surface -Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or UL 723; testing by a
qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable
testing agency.
a. Flame -Spread Index: [25] [75] <Insert value> or less.
b. Smoke -Developed Index: [450] <Insert value> or less.
2.2 OPERABLE GLASS PANELS
A. Operable Glass Panels: Aluminum-framedglass-panel partition system, including panels,
[seals, ]suspension system, operators, and accessories.
1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, NanaWall Systemsor
comparable product by one of the following:
a. Hufcor Inc.
b. KW1K-WAi,I, Company.
c. Moderco Inc.
d. N'[odernfold Inc .• a DORMA Grou co
B. Panel Operation: Manually operated, continuously hinged panels.
C. Panel Construction: As required to support panel from suspension components and with
reinforcement for hardware attachment. Fabricate panels with tight hairline joints and concealed
fasteners. Fabricate panels so finished in-place partition is rigid; level; plumb; aligned, with
tight joints and uniform appearance; and free of bow, warp, twist, deformation, and surface and
finish irregularities.
1. Factory -Glazed Fabrication: Glaze operable glass panels in the factory where practical
and possible for applications indicated. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions
and with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."
D. Glass and Glazing: Glass type <Insert description as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."
E. Glass and Glazing: As follows:
1. Safety Glass Standard for Partition Panels: Provide glass products complying with testing
requirements in 16 CFR 1201, Category II, or ANSI Z97.1, Class A.
F. Dimensions: Fabricate operable glass -panel partitions to form an assembled system of
dimensions indicated and verified by field measurements.
1. Panel Width: Equal widths.
G. STC: Not less than 36 .
H. 3 inches (76 min.
I. Panel Frame Materials:
FOLDING GLASS -PANEL PARTITIONS 102239.13 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type
of use, corrosion resistance, and finish indicated; ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M) for
extrusions; manufacturer's standard strengths and thicknesses for type of use.
a. Frame Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard steel or aluminum.
J. Panel Closure:[Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicate].
K. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard as required to operate operable glass -panel partition and
accessories; with decorative, protective finish.
1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard .
L. Panel Frame Finishes:
1. Exposed MetalAs selected by Architect from manufacturer's full rangeas follows:
2.3 SEALS
A. General: Provide seals that produce operable glass -panel partitions complying with performance
requirements and the following:
1. Manufacturer's standard seals unless otherwise indicated.
2. Seals made from materials and in profiles that minimize sound leakage.
3. Seals fitting tight at contact surfaces and sealing continuously between adjacent panels
and between operable glass -panel partition perimeter and adjacent surfaces, when
operable glass -panel partition is extended and closed.
2.4 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Tracks: Steel or aluminum designed for operation, size, and weight of operable glass -panel
partition indicated. Size track to support partition operation and storage without damage to
suspension system, operable glass -panel partitions, or adjacent construction. Limit track
deflection to no more than 0.10 inch (2.54 mm) between bracket supports. Provide a continuous
system of track sections and accessories to accommodate configuration and layout indicated for
partition operation and storage.
1. Panel Guide: Aluminum guide on both sides of the track to facilitate straightening of the
panels; finished with factory -applied, decorative, protective finish.
2. Head Closure Trim: As required for acoustical performance; with factory -applied,
decorative, protective finish.
B. Carriers: Trolley system as required for configuration type, size, and weight of partition and for
easy operation; with ball-bearing wheels.
1. Multidirectional Carriers: Capable of negotiating intersections without track switches.
C. Track Intersections, Switches, and Accessories: As required for operation, storage, track
configuration, and layout indicated for operable glass -panel partitions, and compatible with
partition assembly specified. Fabricate track intersections and switches from steel or aluminum.
FOLDING GLASS -PANEL PARTITIONS 102239.13 - 5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 1.00% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1. Curve-and-Diverter Switches: Allow radius turns to divert panels to an auxiliary track.
2. L Intersections: Allow panels to change 90 degrees in direction of travel.
3. T Intersections: Allow panels to pass through or change 90 degrees to another direction
of travel.
4. X Intersections: Allow panels to pass through or change travel direction full circle in 90 -
degree increments, and allow one partition to cross track of another.
5. Multidirectional Switches: Adjustable switch configuring track into L, T, or
X intersections and allowing panels to be moved in all pass-through, 90 -degree change,
and cross-over travel direction combinations.
6. Center carrier stop.
D. Aluminum Finish: Mill finish or manufacturer's standard, factory -applied, decorative finish
unless otherwise indicated.
E. Steel Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory -applied, corrosion -resistant, protective coating
unless otherwise indicated.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
a.
B. Vertical Edge Trim: Manufacturer's standard thin aluminum astragal trim to protect vertical
edges of glass in frameless panels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine flooring, structural support, and opening, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of operable
glass -panel partitions.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with ASTM E 557 except as otherwise required by operable glass -panel
partition manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Install operable glass -panel partitions and accessories after other finishing operations, including
painting, have been completed in area of partition installation.
C. Install panels from marked packages in numbered sequence indicated on Shop Drawings.
D. Broken, cracked, chipped, deformed, or unmatched panels are not acceptable.
E. Broken, cracked, deformed, or unmatched gasketing or gasketing with gaps at butted ends is not
acceptable.
FOLDING GLASS -PANEL PARTITIONS 102239.13 - 6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
F. Light -Leakage Test: Illuminate one side of partition installation and observe vertical joints and
top and bottom seals for voids. Adjust partitions for alignment and full closure of vertical joints
and full closure along top and bottom seals.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operable glass -panel partitions, hardware, and other moving parts to function smoothly,
and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Adjust [pass doors] [and] [storage pocket doors] to operate smoothly and easily, without
binding or warping.
C. Verify that safety devices are properly functioning.
3.4 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include
12 months' full maintenance by manufacturer's authorized service representative. Include
quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components,
lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper operable -partition operation. Parts
and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain operable glass -panel partitions.
END OF SECTION 102239.13
FOLDING GLASS -PANEL PARTITIONS 102239.13 - 7
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 10 28 00 — TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Public -use washroom accessories.
2. Warm -air dryers.
3. Childcare accessories.
4. Underlavatory guards.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:
1. Construction details and dimensions.
2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work
and substrate preparation.
3. Material and finish descriptions.
4. Features that will be included for Project.
5. Manufacturer's warranty.
B. Samples: Full size, for each accessory item to verify design, operation, and finish requirements.
1. Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work.
C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each
accessory required.
1. Identify locations using room designations indicated.
2. Identify products using designations indicated.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same Part 2 articles, obtain products
from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required
for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation,
cleaning, and servicing of accessories.
B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent
delaying the Work.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace
mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031 -inch (0.8 -mm) minimum nominal thickness
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Brass: ASTM B 19, flat products; ASTM B 16B 16M, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products
with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings.
C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036 -
inch (0.9 -mm) minimum nominal thickness.
D. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 (Z180) hot -dip zinc coating.
E. Galvanized -Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot -dip galvanized after
fabrication.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper -and -
theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.
G. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).
H. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear -glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick.
I. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile -butadiene -styrene resin formulation.
2.2 PUBLIC -USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. A & J Washroom Accessories Inc.
2. American Specialties, Inc.
3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
4. Bradley Corporation.
5. GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
6. Tubular Specialties Manufacturing Inc.
A. Surface Mounted Toilet Tissue Dispenser:
1. Basis -of -Design Product: Basis -of -Design Product: Bobrick Double -Roll Toilet Tissue
Dispenser with Controlled Delivery (B-2764) with satin finish.
B. Liquid -Soap Dispenser:
1. Basis -of -Design Product: Bobrick B-4112 ConturaSeries Surface Mounted Soap
Dispenser.
C. Grab Bars:
1. Basis -of -Design Product: Bradley Model 832
2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners.
3. Material: Stainless steel, minimum 0.05 inch thick.
a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4, satin finish.
4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inches.
D. Configuration and Length: Straight, in nominal lengths of 36 inches long at rear of water closet
and 42 -inches long at side walls, 24" vertical side bar in shower, L -Shaped grab bar in shower
enclosure with actual gripping surface lengths in accordance with Florida Accessibility Code
E. Sanitary -Napkin Disposal Unit:
1. Basis -of -Design Product: Bradley Model No. 4731-15.
2. Mounting: Recessed mounted.
3. Door or Cover: Self-closing disposal -opening cover.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
4. Receptacle: Removable 22 gauge stainless steel.
5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
F. Semi-Recessed/Recessed Waste Receptacle:
1. Basis -of -Design Product: Bobrick Model B-3644 or similar.
2. Mounting: Recessed mounted or Semi -recessed
3. Material: Stainless steel, 22-guage
a. Finish: Stainless Steel, No. 4 satin fmish
G. Mirror Unit:
1. Basis -of -Design Product: Bradley Model 780-1836
2. Frame: Stainless-steel angle, 0.05 inch thick.
a. Corners: Welded and ground smooth.
3. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft -resistant installation, using method indicated
below.
a. One-piece, galvanized steel, wall -hanger device with spring -action locking
mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts.
4. Size: 30 -inches high and 18 -inches wide and 60 -inches high and 24 -inches wide as
located on drawings.
2.3 WARM -AIR DRYERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc.
2. American Dryer, Inc.
3. American Specialties, Inc.
4. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
5. Bradley Corporation.
6. Dyson Corporation.
7. Excel Dryer Corporation.
8. GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
9. Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc.
10. World Dryer Corporation.
B. Warm -Air Dryer:
1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance provide Dyson Airblade dB or
comparable.
2. Mounting: Surface mounted.
3. Operation: Electronic -sensor activated with timed power cut-off switch.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
a. Operation Time: 30 to 40(s)> seconds.
4. Cover Material and Finish: finish in color selected by Architect
2.4 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS
A. Basis -of -Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to
compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of
the following:
1. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc.
2. TCI Products.
3. Truebro, Inc.
B. Underlavatory Guard:
1. Basis -of -Design Product: Truebro "Lav Shield."
2. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevent
direct contact with and burns from piping, and allow service access without removing
coverings.
3. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded -plastic, white.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and
access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with
corrosion -resistant backing plates.
B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying.
Provide minimum of ten keys to Owner's representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate
to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and
firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested
according to ASTM F 446.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.
B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 - 5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
END OF SECTION 10 28 00
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 - 6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 10 44 13 - FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fire -protection cabinets for the following:
a. Portable fire extinguishers.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 10 44 16 "Fire Extinguishers."
1.3 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Review methods and procedures related to fire -protection cabinets including, but not
limited to, the following:
a. Schedules and coordination requirements.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Show door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel
style. Include roughing -in dimensions and details showing recessed-, semi recessed-, or surface -
mounting method and relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction.
B. Shop Drawings: For fire -protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish required.
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples 6 by 6
inches (150 by 150 mm) square.
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 10 4413 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
F. Product Schedule: For fire -protection cabinets. Indicate whether recessed, semi recessed, or
surface mounted. Coordinate final fire -protection cabinet schedule with fire-extinguisher
schedule to ensure proper fit and function.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For fire -protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size of fire -protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers
indicated are accommodated.
B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire -protection cabinets with wall depths.
1.7 SEQUENCING
A. Apply vinyl lettering on field -painted fire -protection cabinets after painting is complete.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire -Rated Fire -Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in
ASTM E 814 for fire -resistance rating of walls where they are installed.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2.2 FIRE -PROTECTION CABINET
A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include the following:
a. Fire -End & Croker Corporation.
b. GMR International Equipment Corporation.
c. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.
d. JL Industries, Inca a division of the Activar Construction Products Group.
e. Larsens Manufacturing Company.
f. Modem Metal Products Division of Technico Inc.
g. Nystrom, Inc.
h. Potter Roemer LLC.
Strike First Corporation of America.
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 10 4413 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
B. Cabinet Construction: As per wall assembly ratings in which cabinet is installed unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Fire -Rated Cabinets: Construct fire -rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from
0.043 -inch- (1.09 -mm-) thick cold -rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8 -inch- (16-
mm-) thick fire -barrier material. Provide factory -drilled mounting holes.
C. Cabinet Material: Stainless-steel sheet.
1. Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet.
D. Recessed Cabinet:
1. Trimless with Concealed Flange: Surface of surrounding wall finishes flush with exterior
finished surface of cabinet frame and door, without overlapping trim attached to cabinet.
Provide recessed flange, of same material as box, attached to box to act as drywall bead
2. Trimless with Hidden Flange: Flange of same metal and fmish as box overlaps
surrounding wall finish and is concealed from view by an overlapping door.
3. Exposed Flat Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping
surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge
(backbend).
E. Semirecessed Cabinet: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping
surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).
1. Rolled -Edge Trim: 2 -1/2 -inch (64 -mm backbend depth.
F. Surface -Mounted Cabinet: Cabinet box fully exposed and mounted directly on wall with no
trim.
G. Cabinet Trim Material: Same material and finish as door.
H Door Material: Stainless-steel sheet.
I. Door Style: Flush opaque panel, frameless, with no exposed hinges.
J. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear).
K. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door -operating hardware of proper type for cabinet
type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.
1. Provide manufacturer's standard.
2. Provide manufacturer's standard hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees.
L. Accessories:
1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to
fire -protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers
indicated, with plated or baked -enamel fmish.
2. Lettered Door Handle: One-piece, cast-iron door handle with the word "FIRE" embossed
into face.
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 10 44 13 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
3. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style,
size, spacing, and location. Locate as directed by Architect.
a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire -protection cabinet with the words "FIRE
EXTINGUISHER."
1) Location: Applied to cabinet door.
2) Application Process: Decals.
3) Lettering Color: RED.
4) Orientation: Vertical.
M. Materials:
1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
a. Finish: No. 4 directional satin finish.
2. Clear Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3, 6 mm thick.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fire -Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and
hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.
1. Weld joints and grind smooth.
2. Provide factory -drilled mounting holes.
3. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks.
4. Install door locks at factory.
B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated
and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles.
1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow -metal design, minimum 1/2
inch thick.
2. Fabricate door frames of one-piece construction with edges flanged.
3. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.
C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground
smooth.
2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NAAMM's AMP 500, "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products," for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire -protection cabinets from damage by
applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Finish fire -protection cabinets after assembly.
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 10 44 13 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed and
semirecessed cabinets will be installed.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare recesses for recessed and semi recessed fire -protection cabinets as required by type and
size of cabinet and trim style.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire -protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not
indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Fire -Protection Cabinets: 54 inches (1372 mm) above fmished floor to top of cabinet.
B. Fire -Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire -protection cabinets. If wall thickness is
inadequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire -protection cabinets.
2. Provide inside latch and lock for break -glass panels.
3. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire -protection cabinets, square and plumb.
4. Fire -Rated Cabinets:
a. Install cabinet with not more than 1/16 -inch (1.6 -mm) tolerance between pipe OD
and knockout OD. Center pipe within knockout.
b. Seal through penetrations with firestopping sealant as specified in Section 078413
"Penetration Firestopping."
C. Identification: Apply decals at locations indicated.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire -protection cabinets
are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Adjust fire -protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral
locking devices operate properly.
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 10 4413 - 5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
C. On completion of fire -protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as
recommended by manufacturer.
D. Touch up marred fmishes, or replace fire -protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-
fmished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire -
protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.
E. Replace fire -protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful
repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 10 44 13
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 10 44 13 - 6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 10 44 16 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes portable, hand -carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire
extinguishers.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 10 44 13 "Fire Protection Cabinets."
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Review methods and procedures related to fire extinguishers including, but not limited to,
the following:
a. Schedules and coordination requirements.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rating and classification, material descriptions,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher and
mounting brackets.
B. Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire-extinguisher schedule with fire -
protection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10 44 16 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire -protection cabinets to ensure fit and
function.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.
b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.
2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable
Fire Extinguishers."
B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FM Global.
2.2 PORTABLE, HAND -CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire -protection cabinet and mounting
bracket indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Amerex Corporation.
b. Ansul Incorporated.
c. Badger Fire Protection.
d. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.
e. JL Industries Inc.• a division of the Activar Construction Products Group.
f. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc.
g. Larsens Manufacturing Company.
h. Pero -Chem; Tyco Safety Products.
i. Strike First Corporation of America.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10 44 16 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
2. Valves: Manufacturer's standard.
3. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard
4. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,
Appendix B, and bar coding for documenting fire-extinguisher location, inspections,
maintenance, and recharging
B. Multipurpose Dry -Chemical Type: UL -rated 10 lb. nominal capacity, with monoammonium
phosphate -based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled container.
C. Multipurpose Dry -Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL -rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10 -Ib (4.5 -kg)
nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate -based dry chemical in enameled -steel
container.
2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS
A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall
or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated
or red baked -enamel finish.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Amerex Corporation.
b. Ansul Incorporated.
c. Badger Fire Protection.
d. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.
e. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group.
f. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc.
g. Larsens Manufacturing Company.
h. Pyro-Chem; Tyco Safety Products.
i. Strike First Corporation of America.
B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size,
spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.
1. Identify bracket -mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in
red letter decals applied to mounting surface.
a. Orientation: Vertical.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.
1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10 44 16 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in
compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches (1372 mm) above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher.
B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations
indicated.
END OF SECTION 10 44 16
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10 44 16 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 107343 - TRANSPORTATION STOP SHELTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Modular aluminum shelters.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes for shelters.
B. Shop Drawings: For shelters. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to
other work.
1. Anchor -Bolt Plans: Submit anchor -bolt plans and templates. Include location, diameter,
and projection of anchor bolts required to attach shelters to concrete bases. Indicate post
reactions at each location.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish in manufacturer's standard sizes.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Evaluation Reports: For anchors, from ICC -ES.
B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For shelters to include in maintenance manuals.
TRANSPORTATION STOP SHELTERS 107343 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Cast -in Anchorage: Coordinate installation of anchorages for shelters. Furnish sleeves, concrete
inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete bases.
Include setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages. Deliver such items
to Project site in time for installation.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace shelters that fail in materials
or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Shelters shall withstand the following loads and stresses within limits
and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7 :
1. Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
B. Theirnal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and
nighttime -sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 de
material surfaces
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2.2 MODULAR ALUMINUM SHELTERS
A. Fabricate shelters as an integrated set of modular components ready for assembly on Project
site.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a. AustinMohawk and Comnanv, Inc.
b. Brasco International, Inc.
c. Canada Kiosk.
d. Columbia Equipment Company Inc.
e. Duo -Gard Industries Inc.
f. Sandi -Hut Inc.
TRANSPORTATION STOP SHELTERS 107343 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
g. Keystone Structures Inc.
h. MEI fvlardan Fabricators.
i. Par -Kut International.'
j. Poi,tafab Corporation.
k. 'Takeo Corp.
1. Iblar Manufaeturina Comp4iny,
B. Building Style: As indicated on Drawings.
C. Structural Framework: Fabricated from manufacturer's standard 2.5 -by -2.5 -by -0.125 -inch (64.-
by-64-by-3.18-mm)
64-by-64-by-3.18-mm) aluminum tubing, channel, angle, or tee extrusions. Connect framework
with exposed mechanical fasteners.
D. Post Bases: Externally adjustable, flanged, aluminum sleeves; minimum 3 -inch (76-1nm)
vertical adjustment. Include shims for leveling.
E. AnchoragePostinstalled anchors, fabricated from stainless steel, with allowable load or
strength design capacities calculated to be greater than or equal to the design load.
F. Roof: Flatwith full perimeter gutter.
1. Exterior Roof Panels: Fabricated from 0.032 -inch- (0.81 -mm-) thick aluminum sheet with
protective plastic sheet finish.
2. Canopy Fascia: Fabricated from 0.063 -inch- (1.60 -mm-) thick aluminum sheet, of
manufacturer's standard design.
a. Height: 8 inches (203 mm).
b. Overhang: [3 inches (76 mm
3. Downspouts: Integral
�•
G. Electrical Power Service: 125-A, 120/240-V ac, single phase, three wire. Run copper wiring in
1/2 -inch (13 -mm) EMT conduit. Exterior weatherproof connection box and lockable interior
circuit breaker panel.
H. Lighting Fixtures: Activated by photocell
1. Ceiling -mounted LED lighting.
I. Materials:
1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer for
type of use and finish indicated, and as follows:
a. Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
b. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
J. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 nim or thicker.
1. ColorAs selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities.
TRANSPORTATION STOP SHELTERS 107343 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
K. Baked -Enamel or Powder -Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness
of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning,
conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, including concrete bases; accurate placement, pattern,
and orientation of anchor bolts; critical dimensions; and other conditions affecting performance
of the Work.
B. Examine roughing -in for electrical system to verify actual locations of connections before
shelter installation.
C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of
the Work.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install shelters according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Set shelters plumb and aligned with full bearing on concrete bases.
C. Fasten shelters securely to concrete base with anchorage indicated.
D. Connect to electrical power.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. After completing installation, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.
END OF SECTION 107343
TRANSPORTATION STOP SHELTERS 107343 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 115213 - PROJECTION SCREENS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Manually operated, front -projection screens.
2. Electrically operated, front -projection screens and controls.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for metal support framing for front -projection
screens.
2. [Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry"] [Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough
Carpentry"] for wood backing for screen installation.
3. Section 064600 "Wood Trim" for [wood trim] [wood trim and wood ceiling closure
panel] for recessed screen installation.
4. Section 115213.19 'Rear Projection Screens."
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Gain: Ratio of light reflected from screen material to that reflected perpendicularly from a
magnesium carbonate surface as determined per SMPTE RP 94.
B. Half -Gain Angle: The angle, measured from the axis of the screen surface to the most central
position on a perpendicular plane through the horizontal centerline of the screen where the gain
is half of the peak gain.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts and types of front -projection screens. Include the following:
1. Drop lengths.
2. Location of seams in viewing surfaces.
3. Location of screen centerline relative to ends of screen case.
4. Anchorage details, including connection to supporting structure for suspended units.
5. Details of juncture of exposed surfaces with adjacent finishes.
PROJECTION SCREENS 115213 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
6. Location of wiring connections for electrically operated units.
7. Wiring diagrams for electrically operated units.
8. Accessories.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For finishes of surface -mounted screen cases.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For front -projection screens to include in maintenance manuals.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install front -projection screens until spaces are
enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC
system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy
levels during the remainder of the construction period.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of front -projection screens with adjacent construction,
including ceiling suspension systems, light fixtures, HVAC equipment,[ fire -suppression
system,] and partitions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Source Limitations for Projection Screens: Obtain front -projection screensfrom single
manufacturer. Obtain accessories, including necessary mounting hardware, from screen
manufacturer.
2.2 ELECTRICALLY OPERATED, FRONT -PROJECTION SCREENS
A. General: Manufacturer's standard units consisting of case, screen, motor, controls, mounting
accessories, and other components necessary for a complete installation
1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NEPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
2. Controls: Remote,[ key -operated,] three -position control switch installed in recessed
device box with flush cover plate[ matching other electrical device cover plates in
room where switch is installed].
a. Provide [two] [three] <Insert number> control switches[ for each screen].
b. Provide number of control switches indicated[ for each screen].
c. Provide power supply for low -voltage systems if required.
PROJECTION SCREENS 115213 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
d. Provide locking cover plates for switches.
e. Provide key -operated, power -supply switch.
f. Provide [infrared] [radio-frequency] remote control consisting of battery -
powered transmitter and receiver.
g. Provide video interface control for connecting to projector. Projector provides
signal to raise or lower screen.
3. Motor in Roller: Instant -reversing motor of size and capacity recommended by screen
manufacturer; with permanently lubricated ball bearings, automatic thermal -overload
protection, preset limit switches to automatically stop screen in up and down positions,
and positive -stop action to prevent coasting. Mount motor inside roller with vibration
isolators to reduce noise transmission.
4. End -Mounted Motor: Instant -reversing, gear -drive motor of size and capacity
recommended by screen manufacturer; with permanently lubricated ball bearings,
automatic thermal -overload protection, preset limit switches to automatically stop screen
in up and down positions, and positive -stop action to prevent coasting. Locate motor in
its own compartment [on right end of screen unless otherwise indicated] [on Left end
of screen unless otherwise indicated] [on end of screen indicated].
5. Screen Mounting: Top edge securely anchored to rigid metal roller and bottom edge
formed into a pocket holding a 3/8 -inch- (9.5 -mm-) diameter metal rod with ends of rod
protected by plastic caps.
a. Roller for end -mounted motor is supported by self -aligning bearings in brackets.
b. Roller for motor in roller is supported by vibration- and noise -absorbing supports.
6. Tab Tensioning: Provide units that have a durable low -stretch cord, such as braided
polyester, on each side of screen that is connected to edge of screen by tabs to pull screen
flat horizontally.[ In lieu of tab tensioning, screens may be constructed from vinyl -
coated screen cloth that contains horizontal stiffening monofilaments to resist edge
curling.]
B. Suspended, Electrically Operated Screens with Automatic Ceiling Closure, with Motor -in -
Roller, and without Tab Tensioning: Units designed and fabricated for suspended mounting;
with bottom of case composed of two panels, fully enclosing screen, motor, and wiring; one
panel hinged and designed to open and close automatically when screen is lowered and fully
raised, the other removable or openable for access to interior of case.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Da -Lute Screen Company; [Advantage Deluxe Electrol] [Boardroom Electrol].
b. Draper Ine; [Envoy] [Signature/Series E] [Ultimate Access/Series E].
2. Provide metal or metal -lined wiring compaihuent.
3. Screen Case: Made from metal.
4. Provide screen case constructed to be installed with underside flush with ceiling.
5. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: baked enamel.
PROJECTION SCREENS 115213 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY
JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
2.3 FRONT -PROJECTION SCREEN MATERIAL
A. Matte -White Viewing Surface: Peak gain of not less than 0.9, and gain of not less than 0.8 at an
angle of 50 degrees from the axis of the screen surface.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirementsavailable products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. BEI Audio -Visual Products; Matte White.
b. Bretfurd, Inc; Matte White.
c. Da -Lite Screen Company; Matte White.
d. Draper ineMatte White.
e. Stewart Filmscreen Corporation; Snomatte 100.
B.
C. Size of Viewing Surface: 84 by 84 inches (2133 by 2133
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install front -projection screens at locations indicated to comply with screen manufacturer's
written instructions.
B. Install front -projection screens with screen cases in position and in relation to adjoining
construction indicated. Securely anchor to supporting substrate in a manner that produces a
smoothly operating screen with vertical edges plumb and viewing surface flat when screen is
lowered.
1. Install low -voltage controls according to NEPA 70 and complying with manufacturer's
written instructions.
a. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway except in accessible ceiling spaces and
in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Use
UL -listed plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings.
Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces.
2. Test electrically operated units to verify that screen controls, limit switches, closures, and
other operating components are in optimum functioning condition.
3. Test manually operated units to verify that screen -operating components are in optimum
functioning condition.
END OF SECTION 115213
PROJECTION SCREENS 115213 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 116623 - GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Basketball equipment.
2. Volleyball equipment.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 033000 "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for installation of floor insert sleevesto be cast
in concrete slabs and footings.
2. Section 096466 "Wood Athletic Flooring" for game lines and markers.
3. Section 116653 "Gymnasium Dividers."
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. BWF: Badminton World Federation.
B. FIBA: Federation Internationale de Basketball Amateur (The International Basketball
Federation).
C. FIVB: Federation Internationale de Volleyball (The International Volleyball Federation).
D. NCAA: The National Collegiate Athletic Association.
E. NFHS: National Federation of State High School Associations.
F. USAV: USA Volleyball.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. If applicable, include assembly, disassembly, and storage instructions for removable
equipment.
2. Motors: Show nameplate data, ratings, characteristics, and mounting arrangements.
GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT 116623 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
B. Shop Drawings: For gymnasium equipment.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
2. Include details of field assembly for removable equipment, connections, installation,
mountings, floor inserts, attachments to other work, and operational clearances.
3. Include transport and storage accessories for removable equipment.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Court layout plans, drawn to scale, and coordinated with floor inserts,
game lines, and markers applied to finished flooring.
B. Qualification Data: For Installer.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of gymnasium equipment.
D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For gymnasium equipment to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of productsAn entity that employs installers and supervisors
who are trained and approved by manufacturer.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install gymnasium equipment until spaces are enclosed and
weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity
conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
B. Field Measurements: Verify position and elevation of floor inserts and layout for gymnasium
equipment.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of floor inserts with structural floors and finish flooring installation and
with court layout and game lines and markers on finish flooring.
B. Coordinate layout and installation of overhead -supported gymnasium equipment and
suspension -system components with other construction including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire -suppression -system components, and partition assemblies.
GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT 116623 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of gymnasium
equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Basketball backboard failures including glass breakage.
b. Faulty operation of basketball backstops.
2. Warranty Period: Fiveyears from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS, GENERAL
A. Source Limitations: Obtain gymnasium equipment] from single source from single
manufacturer.
2.2 BASKETBALL EQUIPMENT
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. PALCO Ulagtizfacturing.
2. ADP Lcmco.
3. Arizona Courtlines. Inc.
4. Bison. Inc.
5. Dou rlas Industries. Inc
6. Draper, Inc.
7. Institutional_Products,_Inc.
8. Iavpro Sports Construction
9. L. A. Ste -act -aft.
10. Perfonnamee Sports Svste ns _a Cra
11. Porter Athletic, Inc.
12. Schelde iNorl:h Anerica.
13. Spalding Equipment.
d
B. Protruding fasteners or exposed bolt heads on front face of backboards are not permitted.
C. Provide manufacturer's recommended connections complying with Section 055000 "Metal
Fabrications" of size and type required to transfer loads to building structure.
D. Overhead-SupportedBackstops:
1. Folding Type: Provide manufacturer's standard assembly for forward -folding, front-
bracedbackstop, with hardware and fittings to permit folding.
2. Framing: Steel pipe, tubing, and shapes. Design framing to minimize vibration during
play.
GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT 116623 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
a. Center -Mast Frame: Welded] with side sway bracing.
b. Finish: Manufacturer's standard polyester powder -coat finish.
3. Goal Height Adjuster: Adjustable from 8 to 10 feet (2.4 to 3 m) with gear -drive
mechanism, locking in any position within adjustment range, with visible height scale
attached to side of framing.
a. Operation: Manual with detachable crank handle.
E. Backstop Safety Device: Designed to limit free fall if support cable, chains, pulleys, fittings,
winch, or related components fail; with mechanical automatic reset; [6000-11) (2722 -kg)] load
capacity; one per folding backstop].
F. Backstop Electric Operator: Provide operating machine of size and capacity recommended by
manufacturer for equipment specified, with electric motor and factory -prewired motor controls,
starter, gear -reduction unit, and remote controls. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical
characteristics with building electrical system.
1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
2. Operator Type: Cable drum with grooved drum and cable tension device to automatically
take up cable slack and retain cable in grooves.
3. Operator Mounting: Wall -mounted board
4. Limit Switches: Adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to
automatically stop basketball equipment at fully retracted and fully lowered positions.
G. Basketball Backboards:
1. Shape and Size:
a. Rectangular, [72 by 42 inches (1800 by 1067 mm)] [72 by 48 inches (1800 by
1200 nim)] <Insert dimensions> width by height[, with rounded corners].
2.
3. Backboard Material: With predrilled holes or preset inserts for mounting goals, and as
follows:
a. Glass: Not less than i/2 -inch- (13 -mm-) thick, transparent tempered glass
complying with ASTM C 1048 Kind FT (fully tempered) and with impact testing
requirements in 16 CFR 1201 Category II or ANSI Z97.1 Class A for safety
glazingProvide glass with impact -absorbing resilient rubber or PVC gasket around
perimeter in a fully welded, painted steelframe, with steel subframe,
reinforcement, bracing, and mounting slots for mounting backboard frame to
backboard support framing.
1) Standard Mount: Provide steel comer reinforcement with mounting slots for
mounting backboard frame to backstop at standard mounting centers.
2) Direct Mount: Designed for mounting backboard frame to center mast of
backstop to maximize relief of stresses on backboard frame and glass.
GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT 116623 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
3) Rim -Restraining Device: Complying with NCAA and NFHS rules and
designed to ensure that basket remains attached if glass backboard breaks.
b. Steel: Single -piece, steel face sheet, not less than [0.1046 -inch (2.7 -mm)] nominal
thickness, with 1 -1./2 -inch- (38 -mm-) deep, roll -edged perimeter flange and with
steel -reinforced, welded frame welded to back side of backboard; with mounting
slots for mounting backboard frame to backboard support framing at standard
mounting centers.
4. Target Area and Border Markings: Permanently etched in white color, marked in
manufacturer's standard pattern and stripe width.
H. Basketball Goals: Complete with flanges, braces, attachment plate, and evenly spaced loops
welded around underside of ring.
1. Single -Rim Basket Ring Competition Goal: Materials, dimensions, and fabrication per
manufacturer's standard design.
2. Breakaway Characteristics: Positive -lock movable breakaway design, with
manufacturer's standard breakaway mechanism including preset pressure release, set to
release at 180- and 230 -Ib load, and automatic reset. Provide movable ring with rebound
characteristics identical to those of fixed, nonmovable ring.
3. Field Adjustment: Provide rim that is field -adjustable for rebound elasticity without being
removed from the backboard.
4. Net Attachment: No -tie loops for attaching net to rim without tying
5. Finish: Manufacturer's standardfinish.
Basketball Nets: 12 -loop -mesh net, between 1.5 and 18 inches (380 to 460 min) long, sized to fit
rim diameter, and as follows:
1. Competition Cord: Antiwhip, made from white nylon cord not less than 120 -gm thread
and not more than 144 -gm thread.
J. Backboard Safety Pads: Designed for backboard thickness indicated and extending continuously
along bottom and up sides of backboard and over goal mounting and backboard supports per
manufacturer's standard design
1. Attachment: Manufacturer's standard.
2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 VOLLEYBALL EQUIPMENT
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirementsavailable manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. AALCO Manufacturing
2. ADP Lerne°.
3. Arizona Courtl nes,[ac.
4. Bison Inc.
5. Douglas lndustdes, Inc.
6. Draper, Inc.
GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT 116623 - 5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY
JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
7. Jaypro Sports Construction Group.
8. L. A. Steelcraft.
S.orts Svs ems a C ared Hold'n s co
9. Pe
10. Porter AthIetie, Inc.
11. de North America.
12. Spading Equipment.
13. Sports Imports.
B. Floor Insert: Solid-brassfloor plate; and steel pipe sleeve, concealed by floor plate, with capped
bottom end, sized with ID to fit post standards, not less than [9 inches (228 mm) long] [12
inches (305 mm) longto securely anchor pipe sleeve; with anchors designed for securing floor
insert to floor substrate indicated; one per post standard]
C. Post Standards: Removable, paired volleyball post standards as indicated. Adjustable,
telescoping height. Designed for easy removal from permanently placed floor insert supports.
Fabricated from manufacturer's standard metal pipe or tubing, with nonmarking plastic or
rubber end cap or floor bumper to protect permanent flooring. Finished with manufacturer's
standard factory -applied, polyester powder -coat finish complying with finish manufacturer's
written instructions for surface preparation, including pretreatment, application, baking, and
minimum dry film thickness or plated metal finish.
1. Net Height Adjuster: Manufacturer's standard mechanism for height adjustment,
complete with fittings; designed for positioning net at heights indicated.
a. Net Heights: Between tennis net height and boys'/men's volleyball net height,
42 and 95-5/8 inches (1067 and 2430 min) > or more.
2. Height Markers: Clearly marked at regulation play heights for elementary school
girls/womenboys/men tennis
D. Net: 32 feet (9.75 m) long; one per pair of paired post standards; and as follows:
1. Width and Mesh: 36 inches (910 min) with 4 -1/2 -inch- (114 -mm-) square mesh made of
black polyester string.
a. Hem Band Edges: White, 2 -inch- (50 -mm -1 wide top binding; black, [3/4 -inch -
(19 -mm-)] [1 -inch- (25 -mm-)] wide bottom and side bindings; tie offs at top and
bottom of each side end of net; and 1/4 -inch- (6 -mm-) diameter rope, at least 42
feet (12.8 m) long, threaded through top hem of binding.
2. Width and Mesh: Competition volleyball net, [36 inches (910 mm)] [39 inches (990
mm)] with 4 -inch- (102 -mm-) square[ knotless] mesh made of black nylon string.
a. Hem Band Edges: White, not less than 2 -inch- (50 -mm-) wide top, bottom, and
side bindings; [tie offs at top, bottom, and midpoint of each side end of net]
[not less than 1 -inch- (25 -ram-) wide tension straps at top, bottom, and
midpoint of each side end of net]; end sleeves for dowels; and lines with linkage
fittings threaded through top and bottom hems of binding. Provide lengths of lines
and linkage fittings as required to properly connect to and set up net for post
standard spacing indicated on Drawings.
GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT 116623 - 6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1) Top Line: Not less than [1/4 -inch- (6 -mm-) diameter rope] [1/8 -inch- (3-
mm-) diameter, galvanized- or coated -steel cable] <Insert description>.
2) Bottom Line: Not less than [1/4 -inch- (6 -mm-) diameter rope] [1/8 -inch -
(3 -mm-) diameter, galvanized- or coated -steel cable] <Insert
description>.
3. Dowels: Not less than 1/2 -inch- (13 -mm;) diameter fiberglass or 1 -inch- (25 -mm-)
diameter wood. Provide two dowels per net threaded through each side hem sleeve for
straightening net side edges.
4. Net Antennas: 3/8 -inch- (9.5 -mm-) diameter, high -tensile -strength, extruded -fiberglass or
plastic rods, 72 inches (1800 mm) long, extending above top hem band of net, with
alternating white and red bands according to competition rules. Provide two antennas per
net.
a. Clamps: Designed to secure antenna to top and bottom of net.
5. Boundary Tape Markers: 2 -inch- (50 -mm.-) wide white strip[ with sleeve for securing
net antenna], secured to net top and bottom with hook -and -loop attachment. Provide two
tape markers per net for marking court boundaries.
E. Net -Tensioning System: Designed to adjust and hold tension of net. Fully enclosed, nonslip
manufacturer's standard -type winch with cable length and fittings for connecting to net lines,
positive -release mechanism, manufacturer's standard handle. Provide end post with post top
pulley. Provide opposing post with welded -steel loops, hooks, pins, or other devices for net
attachment and post top grooved line guide.
F. Bottom Net Lock Tightener: Provide manufacturer's standard quick -release -type tension strap; a
spring-loaded, self-locking tensioner; a turnbuckle; a pulley; or other device and linkage fittings
designed to quickly and easily tighten bottom line or net.
G. Safety Pads: Comply with NCAA and NFHS requirements. Provide pads consisting of not
less than [1 -inch- (25 -mm-)] [1 -1/4 -inch- (32 -min )] thick, multiple -impact -resistant
manufacturer's standard foam filler covered by puncture- and tear -resistant fabric
covermanufacturer's standard ; with fire -test -response characteristics indicated. Provide pads
with hook -and -loop closure or attachments for the following components:
1. Post Standards: Wraparoundstyle, designed to totally enclose each standard to a height
of not less 72 inches (1800 mm; one per post.
2. Net Lines: Four per net.
3. Fabric Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry standard colors
and color densities.
H. Post Standard Transporter: Manufacturer's standard wheeled unit designed for transporting a
single post.
I. Wall Storage Rack: Manufacturer's standard unit designed for mounting on walls and for storing
post standards in vertical position with retaining arms, fittings for padlock, and mounting
hardware; number of units as required to provide storage for specified equipment.
J. Storage Cart: Manufacturer's standard wheeled unit designed for transporting and storing
volleyball equipment and passing through 36 -inch- (910 -mm-) wide door openings. Fabricate
GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT 116623 - 7
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
welded -steel tubing units with heavy-duty casters, including no fewer than two swivel casters.
Fabricate wheels from materials that do not damage or mark floors; number of units as required
to provide transport and storage for specified equipment.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for use and finish type indicated.
1. Extruded Bars, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M.).
2. Cast Aluminum: ASTM B 179.
3. Flat Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM 13 209M).
B. Steel: Comply with the following:
1. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M or ASTM A 513, cold formed.
3. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
C. Support Cable: [1/4 -inch- (6 -mm-) diameter, 7x19] [Manufacturer's standard] galvanized -
stranded -steel wire rope[ with a breaking strength of 7000 lb (3173 kg)]. Provide fittings
complying with wire rope manufacturer's written instructions for size, number, and installation
method.
D. Support Chain and Fittings: For chains used for overhead lifting, provide Grade 80 heat-treated
alloy steel chains, complying with ASTM A 391/A 391M, with commercial -quality, hot -dip
galvanized steel connectors and hangars.
E. General -Purpose Chain: For chains not used for overhead lifting, provide carbon steel chain,
complying with ASTM A 413/A 413M, Grade 30 proof coil chain or other grade recommended
by gymnasium equipment manufacturer. Provide coating type, chain size, number, and
installation method complying with manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Castings and Hangers: Malleable iron, complying with ASTM A 47/A 47M; grade required for
structural loading.
G. Composite Wood Products: Products shall comply with the testing and product requirements of
the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers."
H. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, exterior.
I. Anchors, Fasteners, Fittings, and Hardware: Manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant or
noncorrodible units; concealed[; tamperproof, vandal- and theft -resistant design].
J. Grout: Nonshrink, nonmetallic, premixed, factory -packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous grout, complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107 with minimum strength
recommended in writing by gymnasium equipment manufacturer.
GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT 116623 - 8
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for play court layout, alignment of mounting substrates, installation tolerances,
operational clearances, accurate locations of connections to building electrical system, and
other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify critical dimensions.
2. Examine supporting structure, subfloors, and footings below finished floor.
3. Examine wall assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors and fasteners, to verify
that locations of concealed reinforcements are clearly marked. Locate reinforcements and
mark locations.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructionsand competition rules
indicated for each type of gymnasium equipment. Complete equipment field assembly where
required.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, install gymnasium equipment after other finishing operations,
including painting, are completed.
C. Permanently Placed Gymnasium Equipment and Components: Install rigid, level, plumb,
square, and true; anchored securely to supporting structure; positioned at locations and
elevations indicated; in proper relation to adjacent construction; and aligned with court layout.
1. Floor Insert Location: Coordinate location with application of game lines and markers.
2. Floor Insert Elevation: Coordinate installed heights of floor insert with installationof
finish flooring and floor -plate type.
3. Operating Gymnasium Equipment: Verify clearances for movable components of
gymnasium equipment throughout entire range of operation and for access to operating
components.
D. Floor Insert Setting: Position sleeve in oversized, recessed voids in concrete Clean voids of
debris. Fill void around sleeves with grout, mixed and placed to comply with grout
manufacturer's written instructions. Protect portion of sleeve above subfloor[ and footing] from
splatter. Verify that sleeves are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing; hold in
position during placement and finishing operations until grout is sufficiently cured. Set insert so
top surface of completed unit is flush with finished flooring surface.
E. Cut-out Trim: Limit cuts in face of padding from trim unit's corner -to -corner outside
dimensions. Install with ends of cuts concealed behind trim flange.
GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT 116623 - 9
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
F. Anchoring to In -Place Construction: Use anchors and fasteners where necessary to secure built-
in and permanently placed gymnasium equipment to structural support and to properly transfer
load to in-place construction.
G. Connections: Connect electric operators to building electrical system.
H. Removable Gymnasium Equipment and Components: Assemble in place to verify that
equipment and components are complete and in proper working order. Instruct Owner's
designated personnel in properly handling, assembling, adjusting, disassembling, transporting,
storing, and maintaining units. Disassemble removable gymnasium equipment after assembled
configuration is approved by [Architect] [Owner], and store units in location indicated on
Drawings.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust movable components of gymnasium equipment to operate safely, smoothly, easily, and
quietly, free from binding, warp, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or
malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Lubricate hardware and moving parts.
3.4 CLEANING
A. After completing gymnasium equipment installation, inspect components. Remove spots, dirt,
and debris and touch up damaged shop -applied fmishes according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Replace gymnasium equipment and finishes that cannot be cleaned and repaired, in a manner
approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to trainOwner's maintenance personnel
to adjust, operate, and maintain gymnasium equipment.
END OF SECTION 116623
GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT 116623 - 10
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 11 66 23
PROTECTIVE GYMNASIUM FLOOR COVERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Protective gymnasium floor covers.
B. Cover handling system.
C. Accessories:
1. Power winder.
2. Dual -brush system.
3. Walk -behind tape dispenser.
4. Seaming tape.
5. Protective gymnasium floor cover cleaner.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 09644 (09 64 66) — Wood Athletic Flooring.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D 751 — Standard Test Methods for Coated Fabrics.
B. ASTM D 1894 — Standard Test Method for Static and Kinetic Coefficients of Friction of Plastic Film and
Sheeting.
C. Fed. Std. 191-5100 — Strength and Elongation, Breaking of Woven Cloth; Grab Method.
D. Fed. Std. 191-5134 — Strength of Cloth, Tearing: Tongue Method.
E. NEPA 701 — Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films.
F. UL 214 — Tests for Flame Propagation of Fabrics and Films.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with Submittal Procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data.
C. Samples: Submit manufacturer's samples of protective gymnasium floor covers, minimum 6 inches by 6
inches.
D. Manufacturer's Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification that materials comply with specified
requirements and are suitable for intended application.
PROTECTIVE GYM FLOORCOVERS 11 66 23 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
Operation and Maintenance Manual: Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance manual,
including the following:
1. Assembly, operation, maintenance, adjustment, and cleaning instructions.
2. Parts list.
F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard warranty.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Manufacturer regularly engaged, for preceding 10 years, in manufacture
of protective gymnasium floor covers and cover handling systems.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with
labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.
B. Storage:
1. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Store protective gymnasium floor covers and cover handling system [in clean, dry area indoors] [as
indicated on the Drawings] [at location directed by Owner].
C. Handling: Protect materials and finish during handling to prevent damage
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Warranty Period:
1. Protective Gymnasium Floor Covers:
c. "Ultima 3000": 12 years.
4. Dual -Brush System: 5 years.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements provide; Covermaster Inc., 100
Westmore Drive, Unit 11D, Rexdale, Ontario M9V 5C3. Toll Free (800) 387-5808. Phone (416) 745-
1811. Fax (416) 742-6837. Website www.covermaster.com. E-mail info@covermaster.com or
comparable product.
2.2 PROTECTIVE GYMNASIUM FLOOR COVERS
C. Protective Gymnasium Floor Covers: "Ultima 3000".
1. Material Properties:
a. Surface Finish: Safety, slip -resistant, holographic -cube pattern.
PROTECTIVE GYM FLOORCOVERS 11 66 23 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
b. Surface Treatment: Cover -Guard treated to resist odors and germs. Rot and mildew
resistant.
c. Fabric Core: Single layer, woven polyester.
d. Weave Count: 18 by 18.
e. Coating: PVC, knife/spread-coating process.
f. Weight:
1) Outer Vinyl Wear Coating, Top and Bottom: 8.5 ounces per square yard on each side.
2) Inner Fabric Core: 4.0 ounces per square yard.
3) Total Cover: 21 ounces per square yard.
g. Can be used with either side up.
2. Mechanical Properties:
a. Slip -Resistant Surface, Coefficient of Friction, ASTM D 1894: 0.66. ADA compliant.
b. Tensile Strength, Fed. Std. 191-5100: 375 pounds.
c. Tear Strength, Fed. Std. 191-5134: 90 pounds.
d. Adhesion, ASTM D 751: 35 pounds per inch.
e. Hydrostatic Resistance, ASTM D 751: 430 pounds per inch.
3. Fire Resistance Compliance:
a. UL 214.
b. NFPA 701, large-scale test.
c. California Fire Marshall.
d. Connecticut Fire Marshall: Class 1 rating.
e. State of New York: Class A rating.
4. Construction:
a. Section Length: Match length of floor.
b. Section Width: 10 feet.
c. Seams: Thermally welded.
d. Lap Weld: Minimum 1 inch.
5. Dual -Color Combination: Twilight gold on 1 side, dark grey on other side.
2.3 COVER HANDLING SYSTEM
A. Cover Handling System: "Ultima Series Covermate II".
1. Size:
a. Width:
1) Outriggers Retracted: 34 inches.
2) Outriggers Extended: 57-1/2 inches.
b. Length: 13'-2".
c. Height:
1) Six -Roller Model: 5'-6".
2) Eight -Roller Model: 5'-6".
3) Ten -Roller Model: 6'-6".
2. Frame: 1 -1/2 -inch and 2 -inch rectangular -tubular frame.
3. Frame Finish:
a. Powder coat.
b. Color: Silver.
4. Outriggers:
a. Provides stability against tipping.
b. Retractable.
c. Two adjustable, swivel casters on each outrigger.
d. Locking pins secure outriggers in extended or retracted positions.
e. Color: Safety orange.
PROTECTIVE GYM FLOORCOVERS 11 6623 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
5. Pressure Floor Locks:
a. Two floor -locking brakes, 1 at each end of unit.
b. Foot operated.
c. Bolted to frame.
d. Locks cover handling system to floor.
6. Casters:
a. Six Colson ball-bearing casters.
b. Non -marking Santoprene SofTreads treads.
c. One of 3 casters at each end is offset to spread load over larger area and to better protect
floor.
d. Diameter: 6 inches.
e. Tread Width: 2 inches.
f. Tread Thickness: 3/4 inch.
7. Roller Collars:
a. On each end of each roller.
b. Holds roller captive.
c. No exposed pins. Prevents sideways movement of roller.
d. Eliminates finger pinch points.
e. Color: Bright yellow.
8. Roller -Bearing Brackets:
a. Polycarbonate brackets with Delrin roller bearings.
b. Mounted with 1/8 -inch -thick shock -absorbing rubber pads.
c. Safety bolt on each roller -bearing bracket holds roller captive to prevent roller pop -ups.
9. Rollers:
a. Flo -Coat galvanized steel with clear topcoat.
b. Diameter: 2-1/2 inches.
10. Fastening Clips:
a. Four push -on clips for each roller.
b. Extruded, flexible plastic.
c. Color: Orange.
11. Loading Covers on Rollers: Two 1 -piece Lexan polycarbonate hand cranks.
12. Certified Load Capacity: 5,400 pounds.
13. Assembly: Field assembled. Include instruction manual.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
B. Dual -Brush System: "Ultima Series Coverclean".
1. Mounting:
a. Quick connect/disconnect.
b. 1 -5/8 -inch, 14 -gauge drawn channel.
c. Mounts on both sides of system.
2. Brush Angle: Brush mounted at 35 -degree angle to match path of cover travel at each roller height.
3. Brush Heads: Dual -opposing heads sweep debris and dust from both sides of cover during wind-
up.
4. Bristles:
a. Two rows of 3 -inch bristles.
b. Black, Styrene -Fiber Bristle Row: Fine sweeping.
c. Red, Polystyrene -Fiber Bristle Row: Heavy debris.
C. Walk -Behind Tape Dispenser: "Tapemate".
PROTECTIVE GYM FLOORCOVERS 11 66 23 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1. Material: Enameled steel.
2. Front Wheel: Applies tape to cover as you walk it along.
3. Handle: Adjusts to operator's height.
4. Tape Support: Drop-in place.
5. Tape Size: Accommodates 3 -inch wide tape.
D. Seaming Tape: "Covertape".
1. Temporarily covers overlap seams.
2. Transparent.
3. Easy to remove.
4. Leaves no messy glue residue behind.
5. Width: 3 inches.
6. Length per Roll: 36 yards.
E. Protective Gymnasium Floor Cover Cleaner: "Cleanmate".
1. Concentrated, anti -static cleaning solution.
2. Cleans and conditions protective gymnasium floor covers.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 ASSEMBLY
A. Cover Handling System:
1.
2. Field assemble cover handling system by manufacturer -approved assembly service.
3. Ensure casters and rollers operate smoothly without binding.
B. Dual -Brush System: Mount dual -brush system on cover handling system in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Protect protective gymnasium floor covers and cover handling system from damage during construction.
B. Do not use protective gymnasium floor covers or cover handling system to protect gymnasium floors
during construction.
END OF SECTION
PROTECTIVE GYM FLOORCOVERS 11 66 23 - 5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 116653 - GYMNASIUM DIVIDERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1. Walk -draw divider systems.
2. Fold -up divider systems.
3. Radius -fold divider systems.
4. Peak -fold divider systems.
5. Roll -up divider systems.
6. Top -roll divider systems.
7. Center -Roll divider systems.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Motors: Show mounting arrangements and wiring diagram to power source and controls.
B. Shop Drawings: For gymnasium dividers.
1. Include plans showing alignment of curtains in relation to court layout.
2. Include elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
3. Include system clearances, stacking requirements, and limits for fitting into adjacent
construction.
4. Include loads, point reactions, and locations for attachment of gymnasium dividers to
structure.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of gymnasium divider curtain fabric.
D. Samples for Verification: For divider curtain fabric, not less than 12 inches (305 mm) square of
mesh andof solid fabric.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of gymnasium divider.
GYMNASIUM DIVIDERS 116653 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For gymnasium dividers to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install gymnasium dividers until spaces are enclosed and
weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity
conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
B. Field Measurements: Verify size of space, available clearances, obstructions, and position for
gymnasium dividers.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of overhead -supported gymnasium dividers and suspension -system
components with other construction including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire -
suppression -system components, and partition assemblies.
B. Electrically Operated Dividers: Coordinate electrical requirements for type and location of
power supply, conduit, wiring, and control boxes.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of gymnasium dividers
that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Faulty operation of gymnasium dividers.
b. Tearing or deterioration of fabric, seams, or other materials beyond normal use.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
GYMNASIUM DIVIDERS 116653 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS, GENERAL
A. Source Limitations: Obtain gymnasium dividers] from single source from single manufacturer.
2.2 TOP -ROLL DIVIDER SYSTEMS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. AALCO Manufacturing.
2. ADP Lemco.
3. Draper, Inc.
4. Javpro Sports Construction Group.
5. Performance Sports Systems: a Cared Holdings company.
6. S•aldin" Ec ui.ment.
7. <Insert manufacturer's name>.
B. Divider Curtain System: Electrically operated, top -roll drive pipe, and as follows:
1. Outer Edge Hems: Double tumed[ and welded].
2. Supports and Fittings: Corrosion -resistant steel clamps and hangers.
3. Drive Pipe: 3 -1/8 -inch (79 -mm) nominal diameter, fabricate from steel, aluminum, or
PVC pipe or tubing with a minimum number of joints, as necessary for required lengths.
Steel shall be galvanized or shop primed and shop finished with black paint.
4. Curtain Battens: 1 -1/2 -inch (38 -mm) nominal diameter, fabricated from steel pipe or
tubing with a minimum number of joints, as necessary for required lengths. Provide
galvanized steel, or shop prime and shop finish with black paint.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Support Chain and Fittings: For chains used for overhead lifting, provide Grade 80 heat-treated
alloy steel chains, complying with ASTM A 391/A 391M, with commercial -quality, [hot -dip
galvanized] [or] [zinc -plated] steel connectors and hangers.
B. General -Purpose Chain: For chains not used for overhead lifting, provide carbon steel chain,
complying with ASTM A 413/A 413M, Grade 30 proof coil chain or other grade recommended
by gymnasium divider manufacturer. Provide coating type, chain size, number, and installation
method complying with manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Anchors, Fasteners, Fittings, and Hardware: Manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant or
noncorrodible units; concealed[; tamperproof, vandal -resistant design].
GYMNASIUM DIVIDERS 116653 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
2.4 ELECTRIC OPERATORS
A. General: Factory -assembled electric operation system of size and capacity recommended and
provided by gymnasium divider manufacturer for gymnasium dividers specified, with electric
motors, thermal -overload protection, factory -prewired motor controls, control devices, and
accessories required for proper operation. Include wiring from control stations to motors.
Coordinate operator wiring requirements and electrical characteristics with building electrical
system.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. Limit Switches: Adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically
stop dividers at fully extended and fully retracted positions.
D. Control System:
1. Key Operation: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure, momentary -contact, three -position
switch -operated control.
a. Keys: Provide one key(s) per station.
2.5 DIVIDER CURTAINS
A. Upper Curtain, Mesh: Woven mesh of polyester yarn coated with vinyl, weighing not less than
9 oz./sq. yd. (305
1. Mesh Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color
densities
B. Lower Curtain, Solid: Woven polyester fabric coated with vinyl, 22 oz./sq. yd. (745 g/sq. in,
[1.0 -foot (3M -m height above floor.
1. Fabric Color(sas selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color
densities
C. Hems: Folded and electronically welded.
D. Seams: Electronically welded.
E. Overall Curtain Height: Floor to ceiling, within installation clearances required.
F. Bottom of Curtain: Approximately 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor.
G. Divider Curtain Flame -Resistance Ratings: Passes NFPA 701, Test 2.
GYMNASIUM DIVIDERS 116653 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for alignment of mounting substrates, installation tolerances, operational
clearances, building electrical system connection types and locations, and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify critical dimensions.
2. Examine supporting structure.
3. Examine wall assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors and fasteners, to verify
that Locations of concealed reinforcements are clearly marked. Locate reinforcements and
mark locations.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, install gymnasium dividers after other finishing operations,
including painting, are completed.
C. Gymnasium Dividers and Components: Install level, plumb, square, and true; anchored securely
to supporting structure; positioned at locations and elevations indicated; in proper relation to
adjacent construction; and aligned with court layout.
1. Verify clearances for movable components of gymnasium dividers throughout entire
range of operation and for access to operating components.
D. Anchoring to In -Place Construction: Use anchors and fasteners where necessary to secure
gymnasium dividers to structural support and to properly transfer load to in-place construction.
E. Connections: Connect automatic operators to building electrical system.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust movable components of gymnasium dividers to operate safely, smoothly, easily, and
quietly, free from binding, warp, distortion, uneven tension, nonalignment, misplacement,
disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Lubricate hardware and moving
parts.
B. Limit Switch Adjustment: Set and adjust upper and lower limit controls.
GYMNASIUM DIVIDERS 116653 - 5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
3.4 CLEANING
A. After completing gymnasium divider installation, inspect components. Remove spots, dirt, and
debris and touch up damaged shop -applied finishes according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Replace gymnasium divider components and finishes that cannot be cleaned and repaired, in a
manner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to trainOwner's maintenance personnel
to adjust, operate, and maintain gymnasium dividers.
END OF SECTION 116653
GYMNASIUM DIVIDERS 116653 - 6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 124816 - ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes recessed floor grilles and frames.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of recesses in concrete to receive floor grilles and frames.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes for entrance floor grilles and foot grilles.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Items penetrating floor grilles and frames, including door control devices.
2. Divisions between grille sections.
3. Perimeter floor moldings.
C. Samples: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes:
1. Floor Grille: Assembled section of floor grille.
2. Frame Members: Sample of each type and color.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For floor grilles and frames to include in maintenance manuals.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES 124816 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
B. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. Arden Architectural Sjpedallies, Inc.
2. 13alco Inc.
3. Cactus Mat Mfg. Co.
4. Crowder, K. N. Manufacturing, inc.
5. „c2/5i(1 too.
6. J. L. Industries, Inc.
7. Kadee Industries, Inc.
8. ;Mats Inc.
9. Pawling Comoratior Arch tec nnl Products Division.
10.
2.2 ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES, GENERAL
A. Structural Performance: Provide floor grilles and frames capable of withstanding the following
loads and stresses:
1. Uniform floor load of [300 Ibf/sq. ft. (14.36 kN sq. in)]
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA -ABA Accessibility Guidelines for
Buildings and Facilities.
2.3 FLOOR GRILLES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard floor -grille assemblies consisting of treads of type and
profile indicated, interlocked or joined together by cross members, and with support legs (if
any) and other components needed to produce a complete installation.
B. Aluminum Floor Grilles: Provide manufacturer's standard floor grilles with extruded members,
top -surfaced tread rails, and as follows:
1. Tread Rails: Extruded-aluminumtread rails
a. Aluminum Color:As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors
and color densities.
2. Top Surface: Fusion -bonded, level -cut -pile nylon carpet insert; 1/4 inch (6.4 mm)
high, 28 oz./sq. yd. (950 g/sq, m).
ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES 124816 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
a. Top Surface Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
industry colors.
C. Lockdown: Hidden.
2.4 FRAMES
A. Provide manufacturer's standard frames of size and style for grille type, for permanent recessed
installation in subfloor, complete with installation anchorages and accessories. Unless otherwise
indicated, fabricate frame of same material and finish as grilles.
2.5 SUPPORT SYSTEM
A. Level Bed Applications: Provide manufacturer's standard, vinyl cushion support system.
B. Drainage Pit Applications: Provide manufacturer's special deep -pit frame and support extrusion
system with intermediate support beams, sized and spaced as recommended by manufacturer for
indicated spans and equipped with vinyl support cushions.
2.6 DRAIN PANS
A. Provide manufacturer's standard[, 0.060 -inch- (L52 -mm-) thick], aluminum sheet drain pan
with NPS 2 (DN 50) drain outlet for each floor -grille unit. Coat bottom of pan with protective
coating recommended by manufacturer.
2.7 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper recommended by
aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than
strength and durability properties of Alloy 5005-H15.
B. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM'13 22IM), Alloy 6061-T6 or Alloy 6063-T5, T6, or
T52 as standard with manufacturer. Coat surface of frame in contact with cementitious materials
with manufacturer's standard protective coating.
2.8 FABRICATION
Shop fabricate floor grilles to greatest extent possible in sizes as indicated. Unless otherwise
indicated, provide each grille as a single unit; do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum sizes for units that are removed for maintenance and cleaning. Where joints in grilles
are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes.
B. Fabricate frame members in single lengths or, where frame dimensions exceed maximum
available lengths, provide minimum number of pieces possible, with hairline joints equally
spaced and pieces spliced together by straight connecting pins.
ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES 124816 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mmor thicker.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and floor conditions for compliance with requirements for location, size,
minimum recess depth, and other conditions affecting installation of floor grilles and frames.
B. Examine roughing -in for drainage piping systems to verify actual locations of piping
connections before floor grille and frame and drain pan installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install recessed floor grilles and frames and drain pans to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions at locations indicated and with top of floor grilles and frames in relationship to one
another and to adjoining finished flooring as recommended by manufacturer. Set floor -grille
tops at height for most effective cleaning action. Coordinate top of floor -grille surfaces with
doors that swing across grilles to provide clearance under door.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. After completing frame installations, provide temporary filler of plywood or fiberboard in floor -
grille recesses and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection until
construction traffic has ended and Project is near Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 124816
ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES 124816 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 126613 — TELESCOPIC BLEACHERS SPECIFICATION
PART 1— GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Telescoping Gym Seating includes, either manually or electrically operated systems of
multiple -tiered seating rows comprising of seat, deck components, understructure that permits closing
without requiring dismantling, into a nested configuration for storing or for moving purposes.
1. Typical applications include the following:
a. Wall Attached Telescoping Gym Seats.
b. Recessed Telescoping Gym Seats.
c. Floor -Attached (Freestanding) Telescoping Gym Seats.
d. Portable/Movable Telescoping Gym Seats.
e. Reverse Fold Telescoping Gym Seats.
f. Traveling Telescopic Seating Unit
A. Related Sections:
1. Division 9 finishes sections for adequate floor & wall construction for operation of Telescoping Gym
Seats. Flooring shall be level and rear wall plumb within 1/8" [3min] in 8'-0 [2438mm]. Maximum
bleacher force on the floor, of a 25'-6" [7772] section, shall be a static point load of less than 300 psi
[2.068 N/mm2].
2. Division 16 Electrical sections for electrical wiring and connections for electrically operated
Telescoping Gym Seats.
B. Qualifications and Capabilities:
1. BIDDER QUALIFICATIONS:
Bidders are required to be an authorized dealer or manufacturer for equipment proposed which on a
day-to-day basis regularly provide the equipment offered. Bidders are further advised that only
standard production models or standard options will be acceptable for award. Equipment offered shall
be currently manufactured on an active assembly line. The State is only interested in proven
equipment; provided, installed, and serviced by Authorized Dealers capable of providing references.
2. INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS:
Bleacher installer shall be Factory Certified by the Manufacturer. Proof of Factory Certified
Installation_Certificate shall be provided along with the Invitation to Bid. Failure to provide this
information shall result in rejection of bid. (No Exceptions Taken)
1.02 REFERENCE
A. International Building Code (IBC)
B. ICC 300 — Standard for Bleachers, Folding and Telescopic Seating and Grandstands
TELESCOPIC BLEACHERS
126613-1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
C. American Welding Society (AWS)
1. AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code — Steel
2. WS D1.3 Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel
D. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):
1. AISC - Design of Hot Rolled Steel Structural Members.
E. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
F. American Iron & Steel Institute (AISI):
1. AISI - Design Cold Formed Steel Structural Members.
G. Aluminum Association (AA):
1. AA - Aluminum Structures, Construction Manual Series.
H. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM - Standard Specification for Properties of Materials.
I. National Forest Products Association (NFoPA):
1. NFoPA - National Design Specification for Wood Construction.
J. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB):
1. SPIB - Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine.
K. National Bureau of Standards/Products Standard (NBS/PS):
1. PS1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood.
L. Americans with Disability Act (ADA)
1. ADA - Standards for Accessible Design.
TELESCOPIC BLEACHERS 12 66 13 -2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1.03 MANUFACTURER'S SYSTEM ENGINEERING DESCRIPTION
A. Structural Performance: Engineer, fabricate and install telescopic gym seating systems to the following
structural loads without exceeding allowable design working stresses of materials involved, including
anchors and connections. Apply each load to produce maximum stress in each respective component of
each gym seat unit.
1. Design Loads: Comply with ICC 300 —2012 Edition
B. Manufacturer's System Design Criteria:
1. Gymnasium seat assembly; Design to support and resist, in addition to it's own weight, the following
forces:
a. Live load of 120 lbs per linear foot [162.69 N/m] on seats and decking
b. Uniformly distributed live load of not less than 100 lbs per sq. ft. [135.58N/m] of gross horizontal
projection.
c. Parallel sway load of 24 lbs. [32.53 N/m] per linear foot of row combined with (b.) above
d. Perpendicular sway load of 10 lbs. [13.56 N -m] per linear foot of row combined with (b.) above
2. Hand Railings, Posts and Supports: Engineered to withstand the following forces applied separately:
a. Concentrated load of 200 lbs. [90.72 kg] applied at any point and in any direction.
b. Uniform load of 50 lbs. per foot [.344 N/mm2] applied in any direction.
3. Guard Railings, Post and Supports: Engineered to withstand the following forces applied separately:
a. Concentrated load of 200 lbs. [90.72 kg] applied at any point and in any direction along top rail.
b. Uniform load of 50 lbs. per foot [.344 N/mm2] applied horizontally at top rail and a simultaneous
uniform load of 100 lbs. per foot [.689 N/mm2] applied vertically downward.
4. Member Sizes and Connections: Design criteria (current edition) of the following shall be the basis
for calculation of member sizes and connections:
a. AISC: Manual of Steel Construction
b. AISI: Specification for Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members
c. AA: Specification for Aluminum Structures
d. NFOPA: National Design Guide For Wood Construction.
1.04 SUBMITTIALS
A. Section Cross -Reference: Required submittals in accordance with "Conditions of the Contract" and
Division 1 General Requirements sections of this "Project Manual."
B. Project Data: Manufacturer's product data for each system. Include the following:
1. Project list: Ten(10) seating projects of similar size, complexity and in service for at least five (5)
years.
2. Deviations: List of deviations from these project specifications, if any.
TELESCOPIC BLEACHERS 12 66 13 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate Telescoping Gym Seat assembly layout. Show seat heights, row spacing and
rise, aisle widths and locations, assembly dimensions, anchorage to supporting structure, material types
and finishes.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Indicate electrical wiring and connections.
2. Graphics Layout Drawings: Indicate pattern of contrasting or matching seat colors
D. Samples: Seat materials and color finish as selected by Architect from manufacturers standard offered
color finishes.
E. Manufacturer Qualifications: manufacturing experience of manufacturer, and copy of a telescopic load
test to all loads described in 1.03 above, observed by a qualified independent testing laboratory, and
certified by a registered professional structural engineer verifying the integrity of the manufacturer's
geometry design and base structural assumptions.
F. Installer Qualifications: Installer qualifications indicating capability, experience, and official Certification
Card issued by manufacturer of telescopic seating.
G. Engineer Qualifications: Certification by a professional engineer registered in the state of manufacturer
that the equipment to be supplied meets or exceeds the design criteria of this specification.
H. Operating/Maintenance Manuals: Provide to Owner maintenance manuals. Demonstrate operating
procedures, recommended maintenance and inspection program.
I. Warranty: Manufacturers standard warranty documents.
TELESCOPIC BLEACHERS 12 66 13 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Seating Layout: Comply with ICCC 300 -2012 Standard for Bleachers, Folding Telescopic Seating and
Grandstands, except where additional requirements are indicated or imposed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Welding Standards & Qualification: Comply with AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel and AWS
D1.3 Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer who has a minimum of 10 years of experience manufacturing
telescoping gym seats and can demonstrate continual design enhancement and 5 -year minimum product
life -cycle support of telescopic seating.
D. Installer Qualifications: Engage experienced Installer who has specialized in installation of telescoping
gym seat types similar to types required for this project and who carries an official Certification Card
issued by telescoping gym seat manufacturer.
E. Engineer Qualifications: Engage licensed professional engineer experienced in providing engineering
services of the kind indicated that have resulted in the successful installation of telescoping bleachers
similar in material, design, fabrication, and extent to those types indicated for this project.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver telescopic gym seats in manufacturers packaging clearly labeled with manufacturer name and
content.
B. Handle seating equipment in a manner to prevent damage.
C. Deliver the seating at a scheduled time for installation that will not interfere with other trades operating in
the building.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Coordinate actual dimensions of construction affecting telescoping bleachers
installation by accurate field measurements before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on final shop
drawings. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid
delay of Work.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Product Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard warranty form for telescoping
bleachers. This warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of other rights Owner may have under
Contract Documents.
TELESCOPIC BLEACHERS 12 66 13 - 5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1. Warranty Period: Five years from Date of Acceptance.
2. Beneficiary: Issue warranty in legal name of project Owner.
3.
PART 2— PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis -of -Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide : Hussey Seating Company, U.S.A. or
comparable product.
1. Address: North Berwick, Maine, 03906
2. Telephone: (207) 676-2271; Fax: (207) 676-9690
3. Product: MAXAM Telescopic Gym Seat System by Hussey Seating Company
TELESCOPIC BLEACHERS 12 66 13 - 6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
a. Model: MAXAM26 Series Telescopic Gym Seats, adjustable row spacing in two inch increments
from 22 inches [559] to 26 inches [660].
b. MAXAM26 Series Telescopic Gym Seats, Rise Spacing: 11 5/8" [295] Aisle Type:, foot level
aisles.
c. Seat Type: 12" Courtside Collection
(1) Seat color fmish: : manufacturers 15 standard for Courtside Collection
(2) Rail Type:: Self -storing end rail,
(3) Rail color finish:: Standard black or 15 standard colors to match Courtside Collection seat.
(See Personalization and Creativity under Accessories section).
d. Operation: : Electric
e. Electrical Power System: Integral power with pendant Control limit switches, key switches
4. Product Description/Criteria
a. Bank Length:52'-0"
b. Net Capacity; 300
c.
5. Handicap Seating Provisions: : Provide first tier modular recoverable Flex -rows, handicap first-tier
fixed end -section cutouts
B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Will be considered if in compliance with these specifications.
Deviations must be submitted with bid in order that a fair and proper evaluation be made. Those bidders
not submitting a list of deviations will be presumed to have bid as specified.
TELESCOPIC BLEACHERS 12 66 13 - 7
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Lumber: ANSI/Voluntary Product 20, B & B Southern Pine
B. Plywood: ANSI/Voluntary Product PSI, APA A -C Exterior Grade.
C. Structural Steel Shapes, Plates and Bars: ASTM A 36.
D. Uncoated Steel Strip (Non -Structural Components): ASTM A569, Commercial Quality, Hot -Rolled Strip.
E. Uncoated Steel Strip (Structural Components): ASTM A570 Grade 33, 40, 45, or 50, Structural Quality,
Hot -Rolled Strip.
F. Uncoated Steel Strip (Structural Components): ASTM A607 Grade 45 or 50, High -Strength, Low Alloy,
Hot -Rolled Strip.
G. Galvanized Steel Strip: ASTM A653 Grade 40, zinc coated by the hot -dip process, structural quality.
H. Structural Tubing: ASTM A500 Grade B, cold -formed.
I. Polyethylene Polymer: ASTM D 1248, Type III, Class B; molded, color -pigmented, textured, impact -
resistant, structural formulation; in color indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect
from manufacturer's standard colors.
J. Fasteners: Vibration -proof, of size and material standard with manufacturer.
2.03 UNDERSTRUCTURE FABRICATION
A. Frame System:
1. Wheels: Not less than 5" [127] diameter by 1 1/4" [32] with non -marring soft rubber face to protect
wood and synthetic floor surfaces, with molded -in sintered iron oil -impregnated bushings to fit 3/8"
[10] diameter axles secured with E -type snap rings.
2. Lower Track: Continuous Positive Interglide System interlocks each adjacent CPI unit using an
integral, continuous, anti -drift feature and through -bolted guide at front to prevent separation and
misalignment. CPI units at end sections of powered banks and manual sections shall contain a Low
Profile Posi-Lock LX to lock each row in open position and allow unlocking automatically. Provide
adjustable stops to allow field adjustment of row spacings.
3. Slant Columns: High tensile steel, tubular shape.
4. Sway Bracing: High tensile steel members through -bolted to columns.
5. Deck Stabilizer: High tensile steel member through -bolted to nose and riser at three locations per
section. Interlocks with adjacent stabilizer on upper tier using low -friction nylon roller to prevent
separation and misalignment. Incorporates multiple stops to allow field adjustment of row spacings.
TELESCOPIC BLEACHERS 12 66 13 - 8
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
6. Deck Support: Securely captures front and rear edge of decking at rear edge of nose beam and lower
edge of riser beam for entire length of section.
B. Deck System:
1. Section Lengths: Each bank shall contain sections not to exceed 25'-6" [7772] in length with a
minimum of two supporting frames per row, each section.
2. Nose beam and Rear Riser beam: Nose beam shall be continuously roll -formed closed tubular shape
of ASTM A653 grade 40, Riser beam shall be continuously roll -formed of ASTM A653 grade 40.
Nose and Riser beam shall be designed with no steel edges exposed to spectator after product
assembly.
3. Attachment: Through -Bolted fore/aft to deck stabilizers, and frame cantilevers.
4. Decking: 5/8" [16], AC grade clear -top -coated tongue and groove Southern Yellow Pine; or BC grade
polyethylene -top -coated tongue and groove Douglas Fir plywood; both of interior type with exterior
glue, 5 -ply, all plies with plugged cross -bands, produced in accordance with National Bureau of
Standards PS -1-97. Plywood shall be cut and installed with top, center and bottom ply grain -oriented
from front of deck to rear of deck (nose beam to riser beam). Adjacent pieces shall be locked together
with tongue and groove joint from front to rear of deck. Longest unsupported span:
MAXAM 26, 21 %2" [546].
5. Deck End Overhang: Not to exceed frame support by more than 5'-11" [1804].
2.04 SEAT FABRICATION
A. Polymer Seat System — Courtside Collection XCS 12 (12"):
Hussey Courtside Collection Series embodies the latest leading edge innovations in linear telescopic
seating modules. Courtside seats utilize a harmonious blend of advanced ergonomic principals,
architecturally appealing design, safety, value and performance.
Seat Modules: 18" [457] long assembled, gas assisted injection -molded, high density, 100% recyclable
HDPE (high density polyethylene) modules in monochromatic colors providing, dual textured scuff
resistant 12" [305] wide seat surface with 'A" [13] minimum interlock on seat and face. Unit structural
tested to 600 lbs occupant load.
1. CourtSide XCS12 Seat Module
a. XCS12 — 12" [305] Comfort Profile
(1) Individual ergonomically contoured seat module
(2) Compound contoured seats with fore/aft and horizontally contoured curves provide a
"scalloped" surface area for maximum spectator comfort. Forward edge "waterfall" for
enhanced spectator comfort and minimization of sensitive pressure point area, regardless of
leg positioning.
(3) Fore & Aft contoured seat surface for uniform support and minimize high pressure points
under the buttocks.
(4) Seat height ranges from deck to t/o seat range from 16-1/8" [410] to 18-1/8" [460]
(5) 21-1/8" [537] clear foot space area.
b. Bold contoured design lines for maximum architectural appeal and application with modern or
traditional facility spaces.
c. Integrally molded end caps at aisle end locations for clean fmished appearance.
TELESCOPIC BLEACHERS 12 66 13 - 9
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
d. Integrally molded recess pockets to accept seat number and row letters.
e. Integrally molded rear closure panel at back of seat to allow for "continuous clean sweep" of
debris at deck level and minimized visibility of structural ribbing.
f. Seat Attachment: Each polymer seat module shall be securely anchored by a 12 ga steel clamp
bracket that provides steel -to -steel, through bolted attachment to the front nose beam of the
bleacher. Attachment eliminates fore / aft movement of the seat module on the nose beam.
2.05 SHOP FINISHES
A. Understructure: For rust resistance, steel understructure shall be finished on all surfaces with black "Dura -
Coat" enamel. Understructure finish shall contain a silicone additive to improve scratch resistance of
finish.
B. Wear Surfaces: Surface subject to normal wear by spectators shall have a finish that does not wear to
show different color underneath:
1. Steel nosing and rear risers shall be pre -galvanized with a minimum spangle of G-60 zinc plating.
2. Decking shall have use -surfaces to receive both a sealer coat and wear -resistant high gloss clear
urethane finish. Optional decking to have 0.030" laminated polyethylene wear surface.
3. Injection Molded Courtside seats shall be per manufacturer standard 15 colors.
C. Railings: Steel railings shall be finished with powder -coated semi - gloss black or optional 15 standard
colors to match polymer seat color.
D. High Humidity finish: Above shop fmishes shall include following modifications:
1. Understructure: All frames and other structural components shall be hot -dip galvanized
per ASTM A103
2. All top -side rails shall be e -coated prior to powder paint coating
3. All hardware to be zinc -plated
4. All posi-locks and other steel wear surfaces to be electroless-nickel plated
5. Decking to be polyethylene -laminated plywood
2.06 FASTENINGS
A. Welds: Performed by welders certified by AWS standards for the process employed.
B. Structural Connections: Secured by structural bolts with prevailing torque lock nuts, free -spinning nuts in
combination with lock washers, or Riv-nuts in combination with lock washers.
2.07 ELECTRICAL OPERATION
A. Integral Power
1. Default operation shall be with a removable pendant control unit which plugs into seating bank for
tethered operator management of stop, start, forward, and reverse control of the power operation.
Other modes of operation are optional.
2. PF1/2/3/4: Furnish and install Hussey PF(1/2/3/4), an integral automatic electro mechanical powered
frame propulsion system, to open and close telescopic seating.
TELESCOPIC BLEACHERS 12 66 13 - 10
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
a. Electrical - Seating Manufacturer shall provide all wiring within seating bank, including pendant
control. Motors, housing, and wiring shall be installed and grounded in complete accord with the
National Electrical Code. The electrical contractor shall perform all connections at and upstream
of the equipment specified herein, and ensure that supplied voltage drops no more than 4% below
nominal where power connects thereto.To prevent 3rd party control of the system, power is made
available to the Remote Control Receiver for a limited time by a Radio Frequency Identification
(RFID) system that requires activation by the operator. Once the power system is activated, an
audio beep and visual light is active to notify the user that the system is energized and ready for
operation. The wireless remote shall be used by trained authorized operators to open and close the
system with continuous pressure applied to the desired button.
b. Each unit for PF(1/2/3/4) is driven by a 1/2 horsepower, 1725 RPM motor.
c. Plug & Play Power
(1) The Plug & Play option enables safe cord and plug connection of the power system to the
power supply, eliminates the need for a separate disconnect, and eliminates lockout tagout
procedures at the bleacher. Electrical contractor shall provide and install the disconnect -rated
receptacle and associated parts specified by the manufacturer. Manufacturer shall specify
facility preparations for, and furnish and install a cord -and -plug connected power system.
This option is available only with 208V 3 Phase.
d. Limit Switches
(1) Limit switches will automatically stop integral power operation when seating has reached the
fully extended or closed position. Manufacturer shall furnish and install both open and closed
limit switches for the integral power system. Power operation shall utilize a combination of
contactors and limit switches to insure the wiring is not energized except during operation.
Straight wired electric system is not allowed.
e. Key Switch Control
(1) Manufacturer shall furnish parts and instructions for installing a key -operated controller on the
fixed structure of the facility.
f. Portable Power Assist
(1) Portable Power Assist is a walk -behind, self-contained portable electro -mechanical power unit
enabling operator management of stop, start, forward, and reverse control of a bleacher.
Multiple bleachers may be operated independently by attaching to / detaching from one
bleacher and moving to another. None of the above described options are available with
Portable Power Assist.
(2) Manufacturer to furnish and install two attachments for Portable Power Assist on every
applicable section of bleacher and one Portable Power Assist unit per facility. Portable Power
Assist shall have a 100' long heavy duty cord and be cord and plug connected to a 120V 20
amp outlet convenient to the bleachers to be operated.
(3) Tractor unit shall be fitted with rugged operating handle with convenient switches controlling
forward / reverse separate from spring loaded on / off switch. Power drive unit shall consist of
a gearmotor with dual output shafts and 6" [152] diameter wheels covered with non -marring
1/2" [13] thick molded polyurethane. Average operating speed shall be 35 feet / min [12.8
meters / min] with pulling capacity of PF3 (see above).
TELESCOPIC BLEACHERS 12 66 13 - 11
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
TELESCOPIC BLEACHERS 12 66 13 - 12
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
2.08 ACCESSORIES1 STANDARD TELESCOPIC GYMSEAT ACCESSORIES
A. Flex -Row: Provide first row modular recoverable seating units to be utilized by persons in wheelchairs
and able-bodied persons. Each Flex -Row unit shall have an unlock handle for easy deployment if
wheelchair or team seating access is needed. Unlock handle shall lock the bleacher seats into position
when fully opened.
1. Provide a black full -surround steel skirting with no more than 3/a" floor clearance for safety and
improved aesthetics.
2. Provide a black injection molded end cap for the nose beam for safety and improved aesthetics..
3. Provide a mechanical positive lock when the Flex -Row system is in the open and used position.
4. Flex -Row modular units are designed to achieve multi -use front row seating to accommodate team
seating, ADA requirements and facility specific requirements. Flex -Row units are available in modular
units from 2 to 7 seats wide as well as full section widths.
B. Front Aisle Steps: Provide at each vertical aisle location front aisle step. Front steps shall engage with
front row to prevent accidental separation or movement. Steps shall be fitted with four non-skid rubber
feet each 1/2" [13] in diameter. Blow molded end caps shall have full radius on all four edges. Quantity
and location as indicated.
C. Non -Slip Tread: Provide at front edge of each aisle location an adhesive -backed abrasive non -slip tread
surface.
D. Foot Level Aisles: Provide deck level full width vertical aisles located as indicated.
E. Intermediate Aisle Steps: Intermediate aisle steps shall be of boxed fully enclosed type construction. Blow
molded end caps shall have full radius on all four edges. Step shall have adhesive -backed abrasive non-
slip tread surface. Quantity and location as indicated.
F. Intermediate Aisle Handrails: Provide single pedestal mount handrails 34" [864] high with terminating
mid rail. Handrails shall be attached to the socket and shall lift and rotate 90° for easy storage in socket.
Aisle handrails that are detached from the socket for storage are unacceptable.
G. Intermediate Folding Aisle Handrails: Provide single pedestal mount handrails 34" [864] high with
terminating mid rail. Handrail to be permanently mounted to a rotating socket for rail storage on the
intermediate aisle step.
H. Front Panel: Provide front closure panels for truncated sections, permanent end cutouts or elevated front
aisles. Panels shall extend vertically from underside of front row to within 1 1/2" [38] or floor. Paneling
to be 5/8" [16] Southern Pine Plywood or grey Polydeck attached to a steel framework.
I. End' Panel: Provide closure end panels for closed stack position at each exposed bank end. End panels
shall be constructed of 5/8" [ 16] Southern pine plywood or grey Polydeck.
TELESCOPIC BLEACHERS 12 66 13 - 13
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
J. Rear Panel: Provide required seating units with full width rear closure panels. Panels shall extend
vertically full height or up to 8'-0" [2438] high to within 1 1/2" [38] of floor. Paneling to be 5/8" [16]
Southern Pine Plywood or grey Polydeck attached to a steel framework. Rear panels cannot extend above
8'-0" [2438] on portable sections.
K. Front Rail: Provide not less than 30" [762] high above deck, steel rails with tubular supports and
intermediate members designed with 4" [ 102] sphere passage requirements. Rails to be located at each
required seating location.
L. Self -Storing End Rails: Provide steel self -storing 42" [1066] high above seat, end rail with tubular
supports and intermediate members designed with 4" [102] sphere passage requirements.
TELESCOPIC BLEACHERS 12 66 13 - 14
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PART 3— EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Verify area to receive telescoping gym seats are free of impediments
interfering with installation and condition of installation substrates are acceptable to receive telescoping
gym seats in accordance with telescoping gym seats manufacturer's recommendations. Do not commence
installation until conditions are satisfactory.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Comply with telescoping gym seats manufacturer's recommendations
for product installation requirements.
B. General: Manufacturer's Certified Installers to install telescoping gym seats in accordance with
manufacturer's installation instructions and final shop drawings. Provide accessories, anchors, fasteners,
inserts and other items for installation of telescoping gym seats and for permanent attachment to adjoining
construction.
3.03 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
A. Adjustment: After installation completion, test and adjust each telescoping gym seats assembly to operate
in compliance with manufacturer's operations manual.
B. Cleaning: Clean installed telescoping gym seats on both exposed and semi -exposed surfaces. Touch-up
finishes restoring damage or soiled surfaces.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. General: Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
installer to ensure telescoping gym seats are without damage or deterioration at time of substantial
completion.
END OF SECTION
TELESCOPIC BLEACHERS 12 66 13 - 15
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 12 93 00 - SITE FURNISHINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Seating.
2. Bicycle racks.
3. Trash receptacles.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 033000 "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for installing pipe sleeves cast, installing
anchor bolts cast and formed voids in concrete footings.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Sustainable Submittals:
1. Product Data: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating
percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include
statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory -applied finishes.
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish, not less than 6 -inch- (152 -mm-) long
linear components and 4 -inch- (102 -mm-) square sheet components.
F. Product Schedule: For site furnishings. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Material Certificates: For site furnishings.
SITE FURNISHINGS 12 93 00 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, storage and handling requirements and
recommendations, installation methods and available colors, styles, patterns and textures.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's shop drawings, including plans and elevations,
indicating overall dimensions.
D. Samples: Submit manufacturer's samples of materials, finishes, and colors.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For site furnishings to include in maintenance manuals.
B. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard warranty.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Trash Receptacle Inner Containers: Five full-size units for each size indicated, but no
fewer than two units.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 SEATING
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
Basis of Design:
Size:
Material: Cast stone
Fasteners:
Landscape Forms, Inc. Model: "Flor" Bench.
Small - 67"w x 75"d x 16-1/2"h
(concrete).
Surface Mount.
Basis of Design: Landscape Forms, Inc. Model: "Lungo Mare" Bench.
Size: 158"w X 79"d X 35" h
Material: Reinforced Cast stone (concrete).
Fasteners: Surface Mount.
be
Basis of Design: Landscape Forms, Inc. Model: "Abil" Bench.
Size: 117" length x 30" depth x 18" height
Material: Reinforced Cast stone (concrete).
Anchors: concrete pavement mounting with 3/8"x2-1/4" HILTI KB-11-304-SSCF stainless
steel expansion bolts W/ 3/8" HTN tamper proof nuts.
SITE FURNISHINGS 12 93 00 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
Basis of Design: Landscape Forms, Inc. Model: "Sicurta" Chair.
Size: 21"w X 26"d X 32"h
Material: Reinforced Cast stone (concrete).
2.2 BICYCLE RACK
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
Basis of Design: Landscape Forms, Inc. Model "Bicilinea" Bicycle Rack".
Size: 119 inches Length; 31-3/4 inches overall height.
Material:
- Horizontal tube: 3-5/16 inch dia x 0.08 inch wall thickness 304 stainless
steel.
- Curved tube: 2 inch dia x 0.08 inch wall thickness 304 stainless steel.
- Vertical post: 3-1/8 inch x 5/8 inch 304 stainless steel flat bar.
- Collar for curved tube connection: Nylon
- Hardware: stainless steel
Finish: Stainless Steel: Polished finish.
Fasteners: Embedded: 59-3/4 inches depth
2.3 TRASH RECEPTACLES
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
Basis of Design: Landscape Forms, Inc. Model "Lakeside" Litter Receptacle.
Size: 36 inches height, 21 inches diameter. Side Opening: 20" diameter x 1-
1/4" tall at top of dome.
Material:
Top: spun 14 gauge spun steel.
Liner: Constructed of linear low density polyethylene with 0.100"
nominal wall thickness.
- Body: Constructed of 10 gauge HRPO steel welded to a 2" tall toe ring.
Capacity: Side -Opening Style, 30 Gallons.
Pattern: Grass Pattern
Fasteners: Surface Mount. Corrosion resistant bolts w/tamper proof nuts.
Color: Powder coated silver.
SITE FURNISHINGS 12 93 00 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
Basis of Design: Landscape Forms, Inc. Model "Select" Litter Receptacle.
Size: Triple Unit: Width: 50-3/8 inches, 42 inches height.
Material:
- Base: Welded carbon steel. Base is bolted to unit body with stainless
steel 1/4-20 hex head screws.
Unit body: Formed of 14 gauge carbon steel sheet.
Door panel: Formed of 14 gauge carbon steel sheet with lock
- Liner: Rotomolded low density polyethylene.
Door opening trim and sign medallion: Cast 319 or A413 aluminum.
Secured to door panel with black nylon cup washers and carbon steel #8-
32 x 1/4" socket button head cap screws with magni-coat. Vinyl graphics
factory -applied to medallion.
Adjustable glides: Black nylon base, 2-3/16" diameter, with 3/8-16
thread on stainless steel stem.
- Hinge: Stainless steel hinges (2) per door, attached to door and unit body
with stainless steel screws.
- Cross braces, bin dividers: Carbon steel sheet. Bin dividers on double
and triple units only.
Fasteners: Surface Mount. Corrosion resistant bolts w/tamper proof nuts.
Color: Carbon Steel.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use
and finish indicated; free of surface blemishes and complying with the following:
1. Rolled or Cold -Finished Bars, Rods, and Wire: ASTM B 211 (ASTM B 211M).
2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
3. Structural Pipe and Tube: ASTM B 429/B 429M.
4. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
5. Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M.
B. Steel and Iron: Free of surface blemishes and complying with the following:
1. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2. Steel Pipe: Standard -weight steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, or electric -
resistance -welded pipe complying with ASTM A 135/A 135M.
3. Tubing: Cold -formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500/A 500M.
4. Mechanical Tubing: Cold -rolled, electric -resistance -welded carbon or alloy steel tubing
complying with ASTM A 513, or steel tubing fabricated from steel complying with
ASTM A 1011/A 1011M and complying with dimensional tolerances in
ASTM A 500/A 500M; zinc coated internally and externally.
5. Sheet. Commercial steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
6. Perforated Metal: From steel sheet not less than 0.090 -inch (2.3 -mm) nominal thickness;
manufacturer's standard perforation pattern.
7. Expanded Metal: Carbon -steel sheets, deburred after expansion, and complying with
ASTM F 1267.
SITE FURNISHINGS 12 93 00 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
8. Malleable -Iron Castings: ASTM A 47/A 47M, grade as recommended by fabricator for
type of use intended.
9. Gray -Iron Castings: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 200.
C. Stainless Steel: Free of surface blemishes and complying with the following:
1. Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666.
2. Pipe: Schedule 40 steel pipe complying with ASTM A 312/A 312M.
3. Tubing: ASTM A 554.
D. Fiberglass: Multiple laminations of glass -fiber -reinforced polyester resin with UV -light stable,
colorfast, nonfading, weather- and stain -resistant, colored polyester gel coat, and with
manufacturer's standard fmish.
E. Plastic: Color impregnated, color and UV -light stabilized, and mold rests
1. Polyethylene: Fabricated from virgin plastic HDPE resin.
2. Recycled Content of Polyethylene: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
F. Anchors, Fasteners, Fittings, and Hardware: Stainless steel, commercial quality, tamperproof,
vandal and theft resistant.
G. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory -packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M; recommended in writing by
manufacturer, for exterior applications.
H. Erosion -Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory -packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic -
controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with potable water at Project site to create
pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound; resistant to erosion from water exposure
without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating; recommended in writing by
manufacturer, for exterior applications.
I. Galvanizing: Where indicated for steel and iron components, provide the following protective
zinc coating applied to components after fabrication:
1. Zinc -Coated Tubing: External, zinc with organic overcoat, consisting of a minimum of
0.9 oz./sq. ft. (0.27 kg/sq. m) of zinc after welding, a chromate conversion coating, and a
clear, polymer film. Internal, same as external or consisting of 81 percent zinc pigmented
coating, not less than 0.3 mil (0.0076 mm) thick.
2. Hot -Dip Galvanizing. According to ASTM A 123/A 123M, ASTM A 153/A 153M, or
ASTM A 924/A 924M.
J. Cast stone (concrete): Manufacturer's proprietary blend of portland cement, sand, aggregate,
and color admixture.
1. Use only one brand, type and source of cement for entire Project.
2. Provide integral colored concrete with lightfast (UV and fade resistant) color pigments.
3. Water: Clean and potable.
SITE FURNISHINGS 12 93 00 - 5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Baked -Enamel, Powder -Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked, polyester, powder -coat
finish complying with finish manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation,
including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.
2.7 STEEL AND GALVANIZED -STEEL FINISHES
A. Baked -Enamel, Powder -Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked, polyester, powder -coat
finish complying with fmish manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation,
including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.
B. PVC Finish: Manufacturer's standard, UV -light stabilized, mold -resistant, slip -resistant, matte -
textured, dipped or sprayed -on, PVC-plastisol finish, with flame retardant added; complying
with coating manufacturer's written instructions for pretreatment, application, and minimum dry
film thickness.
2.8 IRON FINISHES
A. Baked -Enamel, Powder -Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked, polyester, powder -coat
fmish complying with finish manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation,
including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.
2.9 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into fmish.
B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches.
1. Run directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.
2. Directional Satin Finish: No 4.
3. Dull Satin Finish: No. 6.
2.10 CAST STONE (CONCRETE) FINISHES
A. Formwork: Fabricate forms sufficiently rigid to meet casting tolerances. Coat formwork with
form release agent.
B. Casting: Fabricate units to required profiles and sizes. Execute work accurately to specified
tolerances and free of broken edges.
SITE FURNISHINGS 12 93 00 - 6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
C. Curing: Protect units from exposure to weather until concrete strength is adequate for form
removal. Cure under identical conditions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
correct and level finished grade, mounting surfaces, installation tolerances, and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements
are indicated. Complete field assembly of site furnishings where required.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, install site furnishings after landscaping and paving have been
completed.
C. Install site furnishings level, plumb, true, and securely anchored at locations indicated on
Drawings.
D. Post Setting: Set cast -in support posts in concrete footing with smooth top, shaped to shed
water. Protect portion of posts above footing from concrete splatter. Verify that posts are set
plumb or at correct angle and are aligned and at correct height and spacing. Hold posts in
position during placement and finishing operations until concrete is sufficiently cured.
E. Posts Set into Voids in Concrete: Form or core -drill holes for installing posts in concrete to
depth recommended in writing by manufacturer of site furnishings and 3/4 inch (19 mm) larger
than OD of post. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post
and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring
material manufacturer's written instructions, with top smoothed and shaped to shed water.
F. Pipe Sleeves: Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts.
After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with
nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material
manufacturer's written instructions, with top smoothed and shaped to shed water.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Finish Damage: Contact manufacturer for assistance to repair minor damages to fmish as
approved by Architect.
SITE FURNISHINGS 12 93 00 - 7
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean benches promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that could damage finish.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed site furniture to ensure that, except for normal weathering, they will be without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 12 93 00
SITE FURNISHINGS 12 93 00 - 8
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 210500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2. Mechanical sleeve seals.
3. Sleeves.
4. Escutcheons.
5. Grout.
6. Painting and finishing.
7. Supports and anchorages.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred
spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:
1. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:
1. EPDM: Ethylene -propylene -diene terpolymer rubber.
2. NBR: Acrylonitrile -butadiene rubber.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 210500 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data.
B. Welding certificates.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural
Welding Code --Steel."
B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and that certification is current.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory -applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
1.7 COORDINATION
Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction, to allow for fire -suppression installations.
B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured -in-place
concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for fire -suppression items requiring
access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in
Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 210500 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory -threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.3 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B. Pipe -Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos -free, 1/8 -inch maximum thickness unless
thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full -Face Type: For flat -face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast -bronze flanges.
b. Narrow -Face Type: For raised -face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full -face or
ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
2.4 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between pipe and sleeve.
Manufacturers:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. Calpico, Inc.
c. Metraflex Co.
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc
2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type
and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel or Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.
4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion -resistant coating or Stainless
steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for
each sealing element.
2.5 SLEEVES
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 210500 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
B. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile -iron pressure pipe, with plain ends
and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
2.6 PIPING ESCUTCHEONS
Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely
fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers
opening.
B. One -Piece, Cast -Brass Type: With set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome -plated.
C. Split -Casting, Cast -Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome -plated.
2.7 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic -cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post -hardening, volume -adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000 -psi, 28 -day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections specifying piping
systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated
unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 210500 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G. Install piping at indicated slopes.
I -I. Install piping free of sags and bends.
I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:
1. New Piping:
a. Bare Piping at Wall Ceiling and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
cast -brass type with polished chrome -plated finish.
M. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
N. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum -board partitions,
and concrete floor and roof slabs.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or
other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings
below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4 -inch annular clear space between
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a. Steel Pipe Sleeves.
b. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing.
Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to
extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section
"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.
1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.
4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe
or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.
O. Aboveground, Exterior -Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1 -inch annular clear space between
pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 210500 - 5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.
3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight
seal.
P. Fire -Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at
pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section
"Penetration Firestopping" for materials.
Q. Verify final equipment locations for roughing -in.
R. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing -in
requirements.
3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-
free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
F. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and
welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
3.3 PAINTING
A. Painting of fire -suppression systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09
Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."
B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory -painted finishes with materials and
procedures to match original factory finish.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 210500 - 6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
3.4 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor fire -suppression materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
3.5 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for fire -suppression equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other
equipment base plates, and anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout.
END OF SECTION 210500
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 210500 - 7
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 211313 - WET -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties.
2. Fire -protection valves.
3. Fire -department connections.
4. Sprinklers.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
Standard -Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet -pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at
working pressure of 175 psig maximum.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
A. Wet -Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water and
that is connected to water supply through alarm valve. Water discharges immediately from
sprinklers when they are opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys
frangible device. Hose connections are included if indicated.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Standard -Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig minimum working pressure.
B. Sprinkler system shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 P.S.I.
2. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications refer to drawings.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For wet -pipe sprinkler systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and attachments to other work.
WET -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
C. Hydraulic Calculations.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Installer's responsibilities include fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems and
providing working plans per NFPA 13. Base calculations on results of fire -hydrant flow
test.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
D. NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing
shall comply with the following:
1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."
2. NFPA 24, "Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances."
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings,
including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Standard Weight, Black -Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 135.
B. Piping Schedule shall be: All piping with threaded fittings shall be schedule 40 and all piping
with grooved fittings shall be schedule 10.
C. Galvanized- and Black -Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M,
standard -weight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.
D. Galvanized and Uncoated, Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865, threaded.
E. Galvanized and Uncoated, Gray -Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard
pattern.
F. Grooved -Joint, Steel -Pipe Appurtenances:
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
WET -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
b. Victaulic Company.
c. Anvil Star Piping Inc.
2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig unless otherwise noted.
3. Galvanized and Uncoated, Grooved -End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M,
malleable -iron casting or ASTM A 536, ductile -iron casting; with dimensions matching
steel pipe.
4. Grooved -End -Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213, rigid pattern,
unless otherwise indicated, for steel -pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections,
EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts.
2.2 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
A. Pipe -Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21,
nonmetallic and asbestos free.
1. Class 125, Cast -Iron Flanges and Class 150, Bronze Flat -Face Flanges: Full -face
gaskets.
2. Class 250, Cast -Iron Flanges and Class 300, Steel Raised -Face Flanges: Ring -type
gaskets.
Metal, Pipe -Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.
C. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper -phosphorus alloys for general -
duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.
D. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for
wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
2.3 LISTED FIRE -PROTECTION VALVES
A. General Requirements:
1. Valves shall be UL listed or FM approved.
2. Minimum Pressure Rating for Standard -Pressure Piping: 175 psig.
3. Minimum Pressure Rating for High -Pressure Piping: 300 psig.
B. Ball Valves:
1. Standard: UL 1091 except with ball instead of disc.
2. Valves NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
3. Valves NPS 2 and NPS 2-1/2: Bronze body with threaded ends or ductile -iron body with
grooved ends.
4. Valves NPS 3: Ductile -iron body with grooved ends.
C. Check Valves:
1. Standard: UL 312.
2. Pressure Rating: 300 psig.
3. Type: Swing check.
4. Body Material: Cast iron.
5. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
WET -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
D, Iron Butterfly Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Anvil International, Inc.
b. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
c. Victaulic Company.
2. Standard: UL 1091.
3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig.
4. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.
5. Style: Lug or wafer.
6. End Connections: Grooved.
2.4 FIRE -DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Fire -Department Connection:
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Fire -End & Croker Corporation.
b. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP
c. Potter Roemer
d. Elkhart Brass
2. Standard: UL 405.
3. Type: As indicated on drawings.
4. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.
5. Body Material: Corrosion -resistant metal.
6. Inlets: Threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire -department sizes and
threads. Include extension pipe nipples, lugged swivel connections, and check devices
or clappers.
7. Caps: Lugged type, with gasket and chain.
2.5 SPRINKLERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
2. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
3. Victaulic Company.
4. Viking Corporation.
B. General Requirements:
1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide,"
published by FM Global, listing.
2. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig minimum.
3. Refer to drawings for sprinkler types and applicable locations.
WET -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
2.6 GROUT
A. Standard: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, posthardening and volume adjusting, dry, hydraulic -cement
grout.
B. Characteristics: Nonshrink, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
C. Design Mix: 5000 -psi, 28 -day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
Perform fire -hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system
design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article.
B. Report test results promptly and in writing.
3.2 SERVICE -ENTRANCE PIPING
A. Connect sprinkler piping to water -service piping for service entrance to building.
B. Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated
at connection to water -service piping.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general
location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.
1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from
authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from
approved working plans.
Piping Standard: Comply with requirements for installation of sprinkler piping in NFPA 13.
C. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in
pipe sizes.
D. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.
E. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved -end piping on valves, apparatus, and
equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.
F. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve,
and sized and located according to NFPA 13.
G. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.
WET -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 - 5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
H. Install sprinkler control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to standpipes when
sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.
I. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire -department connection, to
drain piping between fire -department connection and check valve. Install drain piping to and
spill over floor drain or to outside building.
J. Install alarm devices in piping systems.
K. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with
requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13. Powder driven inserts are not allowed.
L. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of
each standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 and with soft
metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to
permit removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezing.
M. Pressurize and check preaction sprinkler system piping and air -pressure maintenance devices.
N. Fill sprinkler system piping with water.
3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings that
have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for
aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.
C. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved -end piping on valves, apparatus, and
equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.
D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before
assembly.
F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for
water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.
G. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged.
H. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes
and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.
Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded joints for
galvanized -steel pipe.
WET -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 - 6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
I. Steel -Piping, Roll -Grooved Joints: Roll rounded -edge groove in end of pipe according to
AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe
and grooved -end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel -pipe grooved joints.
J. Dissimilar -Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both
piping systems.
3.5 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A. Install listed fire -protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and trim, controls, and
specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Install listed fire -protection shutoff valves supervised open, located to control sources of water
supply except from fire -department connections. Install permanent identification signs
indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.
C. Install check valve in each water -supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of
check valves in potable -water -supply sources.
D. Specialty Valves:
1. General Requirements: Install in vertical position for proper direction of flow, in main
supply to system.
2. Alarm Valves: Include bypass check valve and retarding chamber drain -line connection.
3.6 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION
A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of acoustical ceiling panels. Sprinklers may be
centered in tile either by hard pipe or with flexible connectors. Connectors shall be UL 2443
listed, Flex Heads Industries or equal.
B. Sprinkler Head Location: Sprinkler heads shall be installed no closer than 4 inches to any
Ceiling grid or wall.
C. Install dry -type sprinklers with water supply from heated space. Do not install pendent or
sidewall, wet -type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing.
3.7 ESCUTCHEON INSTALLATION
A. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
B. Escutcheons for Piping:
1. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: deep pattern.
2. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: cast brass with polished
chrome -plated finish.
3. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces cast brass with polished chrome -
plated finish.
WET -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 - 7
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
3.8 SLEEVE INSTALLATION
A. General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through penetrations in
floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.
B. Sleeves are not required for core -drilled holes.
C. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
D. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
E. Install sleeves in new partitions, slabs, and walls as they are built.
F. For interior wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation
using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements
for joint sealants in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
G. For exterior wall penetrations above grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe using
joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for
joint sealants in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
H. For exterior wall penetrations below grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe using
sleeve seals.
I. Seal space outside of sleeves in concrete slabs and walls with grout.
J. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4 -inch annular clear space between sleeve
and pipe or pipe insulation unless otherwise indicated.
K. Install sleeve materials according to the following applications:
Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs of Mechanical Equipment
Areas or Other Wet Areas: Stack sleeve fittings.
a. Extend sleeves 2 inches above finished floor level.
b. For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing, extend cast-iron sleeve
fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to
extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Comply with requirements for
flashing in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
2. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Gypsum -Board Partitions:
a. Galvanized -steel -sheet sleeves for pipes NPS 6 and larger.
b. Exception: Sleeves are not required for water -supply tubes and waste pipes for
individual plumbing fixtures if escutcheons will cover openings.
3. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Roof Slabs: Molded PVC.
4. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Exterior Concrete Walls:
a. Galvanized -steel -pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6.
b. Cast-iron wall pipe sleeves for pipes NPS 6 and larger.
WET -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 - 8
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
c. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1 -inch annular clear space
between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation when sleeve seals are used.
d. All exterior sleeves shall be sealed water tight.
5. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Interior Concrete Walls:
a. PVC -pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6.
b. Galvanized -steel -sheet sleeves for pipes NPS 6 and larger.
L. Fire -Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at
pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for
firestop materials and installations in Division 07 Section 'Penetration Firestopping."
3.9 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in
NFPA 13.
B. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for
identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance"
Chapter.
4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
5. Coordinate with fire -alarm tests. Operate as required.
6. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire -department equipment.
C. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 211313
WET -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 - 9
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 220500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2. Transition fittings.
3. Dielectric fittings.
4. Sleeves.
5. Escutcheons.
6. Grout.
7. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
8. Painting and finishing.
9. Concrete bases.
10. Supports and anchorages.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred
spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.
E. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:
1. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
2. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
3. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1. Transition fittings.
2. Dielectric fittings.
3. Escutcheons.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural
Welding Code --Steel."
B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and that certification is current.
C. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical
characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and
connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If
minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory -applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction, to allow for plumbing installations.
B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured -in-place
concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for plumbing items requiring access that
are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08
Section "Access Doors and Frames."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory -threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
2.2 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B. Pipe -Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos -free, 1/8 -inch maximum thickness unless
thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full -Face Type: For flat -face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast -bronze flanges.
b. Narrow -Face Type: For raised -face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full -face or
ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
E. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:
1. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
2. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
2.3 TRANSITION FITTINGS
AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with
ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
1. Underground Piping NPS 2 and Larger AWWA C219, metal sleeve -type coupling.
B. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping: ASTM C 1173
with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be joined, and corrosion -resistant metal
band on each end.
2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder -
joint, plain, or weld -neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C. Dielectric Unions: Factory -fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure
at 180 deg F.
D. Dielectric -Flange Kits: Companion -flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-
face- or ring -type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic
washers, and steel backing washers.
Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig
minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized -steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic
lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
2.5 SLEEVES
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
2.6 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely
fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers
opening.
B. One -Piece, Deep -Pattern Type: Deep -drawn, box -shaped brass with polished chrome -plated
finish.
C. One -Piece, Cast -Brass Type: With set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome -plated and rough brass.
2.7 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic -cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post -hardening, volume -adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000 -psi, 28 -day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping
systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated
unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
F. Install piping to permit valve servicing. Valves located above ceilings shall be positioned no
further than arms length away from accessible ceiling opening.
G. Install piping at indicated slopes.
H. Install piping free of sags and bends.
I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:
New Piping:
a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep -pattern type.
b. Chrome -Plated Piping: One-piece, cast -brass type with polished chrome -plated
finish.
c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast -
brass type with polished chrome -plated finish.
d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast -brass
type with polished chrome -plated finish.
M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and
roof slabs.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum -board partitions,
and concrete floor and roof slabs.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or
other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings
below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4 -inch annular clear space between
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.
b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum -board
partitions.
4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe
or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.
O. Fire -Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at
pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section
"Penetration Firestopping" for materials.
P. Verify final equipment locations for roughing -in.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER
Q. Refer to equipment specifications in
requirements.
JULY 25, 2014
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
other Sections of these Specifications for roughing -in
3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-
free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
G. Plastic Piping Solvent -Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
according to the following:
Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe -handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A.
Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection
to each piece of equipment. -
2. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are
not indicated.
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
C. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other
installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.5 PAINTING
A. Painting of plumbing systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections
"Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."
B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory -painted finishes with materials and
procedures to match original factory finish.
3.6 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's
written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.
1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in
both directions than supported unit.
2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 18 -inch centers around the full perimeter of the base.
3. Install epoxy -coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete
base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor -bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
7. As specified in Division 03 Section.
3.7 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment
base plates, and anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 7
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
H. Cure placed grout.
END OF SECTION 220500
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 8
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 220519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Liquid -in -glass thermometers.
2. Thermowells.
3. Dial -type pressure gages.
4. Gage attachments.
5. Test plugs.
6. Test -plug kits.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 22 "Domestic Water Piping" for water meters inside the building.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gage, from manufacturer.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LIQUID -IN -GLASS THERMOMETERS
A. Metal -Case, Compact -Style, Liquid -in -Glass Thermometers:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
a. Trerice, H. O. Co.
b. REOTEMP Instrument Corporation.
c. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
2. Standard: ASME B40.200.
3. Case: Cast aluminum; 6 -inch nominal size.
4. Case Form: Back angle or Straight unless otherwise indicated.
5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid.
6. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings
graduated in deg F and deg C.
7. Window: Glass.
8. Stem: Aluminum or brass and of length to suit installation.
a. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.
9. Connector: 3/4 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.
10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of
1.5 percent of scale range.
2.2 THERMOWELLS
A. Thermowells:
1. Standard: ASME B40.200.
2. Description: Pressure -tight, socket -type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.
3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR.
4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: ORES.
5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated.
6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1 ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.
7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.
8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem.
9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem.
10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing.
11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of
thermometer connection.
Heat -Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.
2.3 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Direct -Mounted, Metal -Case, Dial -Type Pressure Gages:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Trerice, H. O. Co.
b. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
C. Winters Instruments - U.S.
2. Standard: ASME B40.100.
3. Case: Liquid -filled type(s); cast aluminum or drawn steel4-1/2-inch nominal diameter.
4. Pressure -Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated.
METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and
bottom -outlet type unless back -outlet type is indicated.
6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.
7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi.
8. Pointer: Dark -colored metal.
9. Window: Glass.
10. Ring: Brass or Stainless steel.
11. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.
2.4 GAGE ATTACHMENTS
A. Snubbers: ASME 640.100, brass; NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and
piston -type surge -dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping.
B. Valves: Brass or stainless-steel needle], with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME 81.20.1 pipe threads.
2.5 TEST PLUGS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the
following:
1. Trerice, H. O. Co.
2. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
3. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
B. Description: Test -station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.
C. Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. Include
extended stem on units to be installed in insulated piping.
D. Thread Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.
E. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F.
F. Core Inserts: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic self-sealing rubber.
2.6 TEST -PLUG KITS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Trerice, H. O. Co.
2. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
3. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
B. Furnish one test -plug kit(s) containing one thermometer(s), one pressure gage and adapter, and
carrying case. Thermometer sensing elements, pressure gage, and adapter probes shall be of
diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping.
High -Range Thermometer: Small, bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2 -inch- diameter dial and
tapered -end sensing element. Dial range shall be at least 0 to 220 deg F.
METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
D. Pressure Gage: Small, Bourdon -tube insertion type with 2- to 3 -inch- (diameter dial and probe.
Dial range shall be at least 0 to 200 psig.
E. Carrying Case: Metal or plastic, with formed instrument padding.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install thermowells with socket extending to center of pipe and in vertical position in piping tees.
B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if
required to match sizes.
C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.
D. Fill thermowells with heat -transfer medium.
E. Install direct -mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the
most readable position.
F. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids.
G. Install test plugs in piping tees.
H. Install thermometers in the following locations (May not be shown on drawings):
1. Inlet and outlet of each water heater.
2. Outlet of all master mixing valves.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and
maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
3.4 THERMOMETER SCALE -RANGE SCHEDULE
A. Scale Range for Domestic Hot -Water Piping: 0 to 250 deg F.
3.5 PRESSURE -GAGE SCALE -RANGE SCHEDULE
A. Scale Range for Water Service Piping: 0 to 160 psi.
METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
B. Scale Range for Domestic Water Piping: 0 to 200 psi.
END OF SECTION 220519
METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 - 5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 220523
GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Bronze angle valves.
2. Brass ball valves.
3. Bronze ball valves.
4. Bronze lift check valves.
5. Bronze swing check valves.
6. Bronze gate valves.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 22 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and
schedules.
2. Section 22 "Domestic Water Piping" for valves applicable only to this piping.
3. Section 22 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties" for valves applicable only to this piping.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CWP: Cold working pressure.
B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.
C. NBR: Acrylonitrile -butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.
D. NRS: Non rising stem.
E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.
F. RS: Rising stem.
G. SWP: Steam working pressure.
GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 •
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single
manufacturer.
B. ASME Compliance:
1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B 16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.
C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable -water service.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Use the following precautions during storage:
1. Maintain valve end protection.
2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If
outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.
B. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use hand
wheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES
A. Refer to valve schedule articles for applications of valves.
B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system
pressures and temperatures.
C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
D. Valve Actuator Types:
1. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter -turn types.
2. Handlever: For quarter -turn valves NPS 6 and smaller except plug valves.
3. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 10
plug valves, for each size square plug -valve head.
E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2 -inch stem extensions and the following features:
1. Gate Valves: With rising stem.
GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 •
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
2. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non -thermal -conductive material, and
protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or
disturbing insulation.
F. Valve -End Connections:
1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves.
2. Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606.
3. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.
4. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP -45.
2.2 BRONZE BALL VALVES
A. Two -Piece, Full -Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.
b. Milwaukee Valve Company.
c. NIBCO INC.
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP -110.
b. SWP Rating: 150 psig.
c. CWP Rating: 600 psig.
d. Body Design: Two piece.
e. Body Material: Bronze.
f. Ends: Threaded.
g. Seats: PTFE or TFE.
h. Stem: Bronze.
i. Ball: Chrome -plated brass.
j. Port: Full.
2.3 BRONZE LIFT CHECK VALVES
A. Class 125, Lift Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Kitz Corporation.
b. Milwaukee Valve Company.
c. NIBCO INC.
2. Description:
GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
a. Standard: MSS SP -80, Type 2.
b. CWP Rating: 200 psig.
c. Body Design: Vertical flow.
d. Body Material: ASTM B 61 or ASTM B 62, bronze.
e. Ends: Threaded.
f. Disc: NBR, PTFE, or TFE.
2.4 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES
A. Class 250, Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the
following:
a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
b. Milwaukee Valve Company.
c. NIBCO INC.
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP -71, Type I.
b. CWP Rating: 500 psig.
c. Body Design: Clear or full waterway.
d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.
e. Ends: Flanged.
f. Trim: Bronze.
g. Gasket: Asbestos free.
B. Class 150, NRS Bronze Gate Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the
following.
a. Kitz Corporation.
b. Milwaukee Valve Company.
c. NIBCO INC.
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP -80, Type 1.
b. CWP Rating: 300 psig.
c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and union -ring bonnet.
d. Ends: Threaded.
e. Stem: Bronze.
f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze.
g. Packing: Asbestos free.
h. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.
GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 •
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove
special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and
handling.
B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made
accessible by such operations.
C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper
size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is
suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.
E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
E. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:
1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.
2. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but
before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.
3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:
1. Shutoff Service: Ball or gate valves.
2. Pump -Discharge Check Valves:
a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze or nonmetallic disc.
GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves
with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.
C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:
1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder joint valve -
end option is indicated in valve schedules below.
2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve -end
option is indicated in valve schedules below.
3. For Grooved -End Copper Tubing and Steel Piping: Valve ends may be grooved.
3.5 DOMESTIC, HOT- AND COLD -WATER VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Pipe NPS 4 and Smaller:
1. Bronze and Brass Valves: May be provided with solder -joint ends instead of threaded
ends.
2. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, brass or bronze with brass or bronze trim.
3. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 150, bronze disc.
4. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 150, NRS.
3.6 STORM -DRAINAGE VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:
1. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125nonmetallic disc.
B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:
1. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, nonmetallic -to -metal seats.
END OF SECTION
GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 •
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.
2. Trapeze pipe hangers.
3. Metal framing systems.
4. Thermal -hanger shield inserts.
5. Fastener systems.
6. Pipe positioning systems.
7. Equipment supports.
B. Related Sections:
Section 05 "Metal Fabrications" for structural -steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers
for pipe and equipment supports.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall
withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated
according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting
combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of
supported equipment and connected systems and components.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the
following; include Product Data for components:
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
Trapeze pipe hangers.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Carbon -Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Description: MSS SP -58, Types 1 through 58, factory -fabricated components.
2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pre -galvanized or hot dipped.
3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to
support bearing surface of piping.
5. Hanger Rods: Continuous -thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.
2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A. Description: MSS SP -69, Type 59, shop- or field -fabricated pipe -support assembly made from
structural carbon -steel shapes with MSS SP -58 carbon -steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U -
bolts.
2.3 THERMAL -HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. ERICO International Corporation.
2. PHS Industries, Inc.
3. Pipe Shields, Inc.; a subsidiary of Piping Technology & Products, Inc.
B. Insulation -Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium
silicate with 100-psig ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig or ASTM C 591,
Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength.
C. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
D. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
E. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient
air temperature.
2.4 FASTENER SYSTEMS
A. Powder -actuated fasteners are not acceptable.
B. Mechanical -Expansion Anchors: Insert -wedge -type, stainless-steel anchors, for use in
hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
2.5 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS
A. Description: IAPMO PS 42, positioning system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for
positioning piping in pipe spaces; for plumbing fixtures in commercial applications.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon -steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and
galvanized.
B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory -mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic -cement, nonshrink and
nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
2. Design Mix: 5000 -psi, 28 -day compressive strength.
PART3-EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Metal Pipe -Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP -69 and MSS SP -89. Install hangers,
supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building
structure.
B. Metal Trapeze Pipe -Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP -69 and MSS SP -89. Arrange for
grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field -fabricated trapeze
pipe hangers.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or
install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe
hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon -steel shapes selected for loads being
supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
C. Thermal -Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
D. Pipe Positioning -System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste
piping connections to each plumbing fixture.
E. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,
washers, and other accessories.
F. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded -structural -steel shapes.
G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal movement of piping systems, to permit
freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints,
expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
H. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and
larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed;
fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
J. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses
from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
K. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed
maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
L. Insulated Piping:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal -hanger shield
insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services
piping.
2. Install MSS SP -58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
a. Option: Thermal -hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight -
distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
3. Install MSS SP -58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields
shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
a. Option: Thermal -hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight -
distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 : 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
b. NPS 4 : 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
c. NPS 5 and NPS 6 : 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
d. NPS 8 to NPS 14 : 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium -silicate -insulation inserts of
length at least as long as protective shield.
6. Thermal -Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
M. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.
N. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.2 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be
shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding;
appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the
following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so
contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
B. Trim excess length of continuous -thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.
3.4 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop
painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field -painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas
of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting."
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing -repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE
A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and
equipment.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
B. Comply with MSS SP -69 for pipe -hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will
not have field -applied finish.
D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in
direct contact with copper tubing.
E. Use carbon -steel pipe hangers and supports metal trapeze pipe hangers and metal framing
systems and attachments for general service applications.
F. Use copper -plated pipe hangers and copper attachments for copper piping and tubing.
G. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
H. Use thermal -hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.
I. Horizontal -Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of non -insulated or
insulated, stationary pipes.
2. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes if little or no
insulation is required.
3. Adjustable, Swivel -Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of non -insulated,
stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
4. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 and up, with steel -
pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon -steel plate.
J. Vertical -Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 and
up.
K. Hanger -Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
2. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
L. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend
pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Top -Beam C -Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar -joist
construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3. Side -Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,
channels, or angles.
4. Center -Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom Flange of beams.
5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads
are considerable and rod sizes are large.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
6. Top -Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to
flange edge.
7. Welded -Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above
by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 Ib.
b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 Ib.
c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 Ib.
M. Comply with MSS SP -69 for trapeze pipe -hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
N. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
O. Use mechanical -expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete
construction.
P. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and
waste piping for plumbing fixtures.
END OF SECTION 220529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 7
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Equipment labels.
2. Pipe labels.
3. Valve tags.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of
surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,
1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
2. Letter Color: White.
3. Background Color: Black.
4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than
2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.
6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24
inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering
for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the
size of principal lettering.
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self -tapping screws.
8. Adhesive: Contact -type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number,
Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the
Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.
C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8 -1/2 -by -11 -inch
bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where
equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number
and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and
maintenance data.
2.2 PIPE LABELS
A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color -coded, with lettering
indicating service, and showing flow direction.
B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semi-rigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference
of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
C. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings and an arrow indicating flow direction.
Flow -Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both
directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.
2.3 VALVE TAGS
A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4 -inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2 -
inch numbers.
1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032 -inch or Stainless steel, 0.025 -inch minimum thickness, and
having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.
2. Fasteners: Brass wire -link or beaded chain or S -hook.
B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8 -1/2 -by -11 -inch bond paper. Tabulate valve
number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or
space), normal -operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification.
Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
1. Valve -tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification
devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and
encapsulants.
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces;
machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and
exterior exposed locations as follows:
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 25 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 10 feet in
areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. Identification of potable and non -potable wate
a. In all buildings where two or more water distribution system, one potable water and
the other non -potable water, ate installed, each system shall be identified either by
color marking or metal tags as required by ASME A13.1. Reclaimed water systems
shall be identified using color coded Pantone Purple 522C and marked with the
statement "NONPOTABLE WATER - NOT FOR HUMAN CONSUMPTION.
B. Pipe Label Color Refer to ASME(ANSI) Standard A13.1-2007.
3.4 VALVE -TAG INSTALLATION
Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within
factory -fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn -watering
hose connections; and similar roughing -in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List
tagged valves in a valve schedule.
Valve -Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and
with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:
1. Valve -Tag Size and Shape:
a. Cold Water: 2 inches, round.
b. Hot Water: 2 inches, round.
END OF SECTION 220553
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 220700
PLUMBING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Insulation Materials:
a. Flexible elastomeric.
b. Mineral fiber.
2. Insulating cements.
3. Adhesives.
4. Mastics.
5. Lagging adhesives.
6. Sealants.
7. Factory -applied jackets.
8. Tapes.
9. Corner angles.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and
jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).
B. Submittal:
For adhesives and sealants, including printed statement of VOC content compliant with
South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule #1168.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship
program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of
Apprenticeship and Training.
B. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire -test -
response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84,
by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label
PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers,
with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame -spread index of 25 or less, and smoke -developed
index of 50 or less.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate
ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application and
equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop
Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-
appliedjackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.
C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after
installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have
satisfactory test results.
B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of
construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be
applied.
B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed -cell, sponge- or expanded -rubber materials. Comply with
ASTM C 534, Type 1 for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel.
b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.
c. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180.
PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
D. Mineral -Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Johns Manville; Micro -Lok,
b. Knauf Insulation; 1000(Pipe Insulation.
c. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.
2. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory -applied ASJ-SSL. Factory -
applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory -Applied Jackets" Article.
2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS
A. Mineral -Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; Triple I.
b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; Super-Stik.
2.3 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL -A -24179A, Type II, Class I.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal.
b. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive.
c. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive.
C. Mineral -Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL -A -3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -82.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20.
c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80.
D. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL -A -3316C, Class 2,
Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -82.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20.
c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80.
PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
2.4 MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with
MIL -C -19565C, Type II.
B. Vapor -Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient
services.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -35.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-90.
c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB -50.
2. Water -Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43 -mil dry film
thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES
A. Description: Comply with MIL -A -3316C Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation
materials, jackets, and substrates.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -52.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-42.
c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 130.
2. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-
resistant lagging cloths over equipment and pipe insulation.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 180 deg F.
4. Color: White.
2.6 SEALANTS
A. Joint Sealants:
1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
2. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F.
4. Color: White or gray.
B. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -76.
2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
5. Color: White.
2.7 FACTORY -APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory -applied jackets on various applications. When
factory -applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1. ASJ: White, kraft -paper, fiberglass -reinforced scrim with aluminum -foil backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
2.8 TAPES
ASJ Tape: White vapor -retarder tape matching factory -applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,
complying with ASTM C 1136.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835.
b. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105.
c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ.
2. Width: 3 inches.
3. Thickness: 11.5 mils.
4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
5. Elongation: 2 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 40 Ibf/inch in width.
7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
2.9 CORNER ANGLES
A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to ASTM D 1784,
Class 16354-C. White or color -coded to match adjacent surface.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other
conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of
defects.
Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation.
adversely affect insulation application.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated.
corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:
Remove materials that will
Before insulating, apply a
Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300
deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating
materials and application methods for operating temperature range.
C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with
stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.3
A.
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of voids throughout the length of equipment and piping including fittings, valves, and
specialties.
B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required
for each item of equipment and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor -barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper
and seal ends at attachment to structure -with vapor -barrier mastic.
3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation
material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thicknesses.
L. Install insulation with factory -applied jackets as follows:
1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.
2. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer
to maintain vapor seal.
3. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor -barrier mastic on seams and joints and
at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking
due to thermal movement.
O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere and seal patches similar to
butt joints.
P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1. Vibration -control devices.
2. Testing agency labels and stamps.
3. Nameplates and data plates.
4. Manholes.
5. Handholes.
6. Cleanouts.
3.4 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously
through wall penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface
and seal with joint sealant.
3. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):
Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
C. Insulation Installation at Fire -Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation
continuously through penetrations of fire -rated walls and partitions.
1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for
firestopping and fire -resistive joint sealers.
PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 7
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more
specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:
1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with
continuous thermal and vapor -retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same
material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly
against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular
surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is
uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt
each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with
adhesive.
4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets,
valve stuffing -box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with
insulating cement.
5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating
cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and
replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable
insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor
barrier.
6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.
Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe
insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a
mastic. Install vapor -barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for
above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric -reinforcing mesh. Trowel the
mastic to a smooth and well -shaped contour.
8. For services not specified to receive a field -applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric
install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions.
Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing
using PVC tape.
9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match
size and color of pipe labels.
C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps,
test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels,
and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the
connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
3.6 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate
openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 8
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness
as pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive
to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.
2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive
to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when
available.
2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet
insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow
valve operation without disturbing insulation.
3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to
surface being insulated.
3.7 MINERAL -FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten
bands without deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions
with vapor -barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory -applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with
outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
4. For insulation with factory -applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple
longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation
material manufacturer and seal with vapor -barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral -fiber blanket insulation.
4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at
least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 9
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections
of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation
materials with wire or bands.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to
valve body.
3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation.
4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
3.8 FINISHES
A. Equipment and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass -Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint
jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09 painting Sections.
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material
and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.
a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex -emulsion size.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of
insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
inspection of the completed Work.
D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.
3.9 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for
each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system,
selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
3.10 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water:
1. Insulation shall be one of the following:
a. Mineral -Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.
B. Stormwater and Overflow:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:
PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 10
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
a. Mineral -Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: minimum %" thick.
C. Roof Drain and Overflow Drain Bodies:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a. Mineral -Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: minimum''/2" thick.
D. Condensate and Equipment Drain Water:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: 3/4 inch thick.
END OF SECTION 220700
PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 11
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Under -building -slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, and fittings inside
buildings.
2. Encasement for piping.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For transition fittings and dielectric fittings.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. System purging and disinfecting activities report.
B. Field quality -control reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting
materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.
B. Potable -water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61. Plastic piping
components shall be marked with "NSF-pw."
2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper.
B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K and ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, annealed temper.
C. Wrought -Copper, Solder -Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought -copper pressure fittings.
D. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder -joint ends.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
E. Copper Unions:
1. MSS SP -123.
2. Cast -copper -alloy, hexagonal -stock body.
3. Ball-and-socket, metal -to -metal seating surfaces.
4. Solder -joint or threaded ends.
F. Copper Pressure -Seal -Joint Fittings:
1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Elkhart Products Corporation.
b. NIBCO Inc.
c. Viega.
2. Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought -copper fitting with EPDM-rubber, 0 -ring seal in
each end.
3. Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Cast -bronze or wrought -copper fitting with EPDM-
rubber, 0 -ring seal in each end.
2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
A. Pipe -Flange Gasket Materials:
1. AWWA C110/A21.10, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME 616.21, nonmetallic and
asbestos free unless otherwise indicated.
2. Full -face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal, Pipe -Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME 618.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.
C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys.
D. Flux: ASTM B 813, water flushable.
2.4 ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING
A. Standard: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A21.5.
B. Form: Sheet or tube.
C. Color Black or natural.
2.5 TRANSITION FITTINGS
A. General Requirements:
1. Same size as pipes to be joined.
2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined.
3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
B. Fitting -Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system
fitting.
C. Sleeve -Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219.
1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Cascade Waterworks Manufacturing.
b. Dresser, Inc.; Piping Specialties Products.
c. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The).
D. Plastic -to -Metal Transition Fittings:
1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company.
b. Harvel Plastics, Inc.
c. Spears Manufacturing Company.
2. Description:
a. CPVC or PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent
dimensions.
b. One end with threaded brass insert and one solvent -cement -socket or threaded
end.
E. Plastic -to -Metal Transition Unions:
1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Colonial Engineering, Inc.
b. NIBCO Inc.
c. Spears Manufacturing Company.
Description:
a. CPVC or PVC four-part union.
b. Brass or stainless-steel threaded end.
c. Solvent -cement -joint or threaded plastic end.
d. Rubber 0 -ring.
e. Union nut.
2.6 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating
nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
B. Dielectric Unions:
1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, products by one of
the following:
a. Capitol Manufacturing Company; member of the Phoenix Forge Group.
b. Central Plastics Company.
c. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2. Standard: ASSE 1079.
3. Pressure Rating: 150 psig.
4. End Connections: Solder -joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
C. Dielectric Flanges:
1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Capitol Manufacturing Company; member of the Phoenix Forge Group.
b. Matco-Norca.
c. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2. Standard: ASSE 1079.
3. Factory -fabricated, bolted, companion -flange assembly.
4. Pressure Rating150 psig.
5. End Connections: Solder -joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder -joint
copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
D. Dielectric -Flange Insulating Kits:
1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. Calpico, Inc.
c. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
2. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.
3. Pressure Rating: 150 psig
4. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.
5. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.
6. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.
E. Dielectric Nipples:
1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Elster Perfection Corporation.
b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
c. Victaulic Company.
2. Standard: IAPMO PS 66.
3. Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545.
4. Pressure Rating and Temperature: 300 psig at 225 deg F
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
5. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.
6. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and
backfilling.
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated
unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.
B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
C. Install underground copper tube in PE encasement according to ASTM A 674 or
AWWA C105/A21.5.
D. Install shutoff valve, hose -end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve
inside the building at each domestic water -service entrance. Comply with requirements for
pressure gages in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" and with
requirements for drain valves and strainers in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping
Specialties."
E. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.
F. Install water -pressure -reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with
requirements for pressure -reducing valves in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping
Specialties."
G. Install domestic water piping without pitch and plumb
H. Rough -in domestic water piping for water -meter installation according to utility company's
requirements.
Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants
unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
J. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
K. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and
coordinate with other services occupying that space.
L. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
S.
T.
Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher
than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and
specialty.
Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping. Comply with requirements for thermostats in
Section 221123 "Domestic Water Pumps."
Install thermometers on outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with requirements for
thermometers in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."
Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements
for sleeves specified in Section 220500 "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
Install sleeve seals for piping
requirements for sleeve seals
Plumbing."
U. Install escutcheons for piping
requirements for escutcheons
Plumbing."
3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
penetrations
specified in
penetrations
specified in
of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with
Section 220500 "Common Work Results for
of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with
Section 220500 "Common Work Results for
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before
assembly.
C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged.
D. Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube.
Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
E. Pressure -Sealed Joints for Copper Tubing: Join copper tube and pressure -seal fittings with
tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.
F. Joints for Dissimilar -Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of
both piping systems.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
3.4 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.
B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:
1. Fittings for NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting -type coupling.
2. Fittings for NPS 2 and Larger: Sleeve -type coupling.
C. Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water Piping NPS 2 and Smaller: Plastic -to -metal
transition fittings or unions.
3.5 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.
B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings or nipples.
C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges, flange kits or nipples.
3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger, support products, and installation in Section 220529
"Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.
2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:
a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.
Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
C. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double -rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch
D. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8 -inch rod.
2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8 -inch rod.
3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8 -inch rod.
4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2 -inch rod.
5. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2 -inch rod.
E. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet
F. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP -69 and manufacturer's
written instructions.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 7
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
3.7 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and
maintenance.
C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water -service piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
D. Connect domestic water piping to water -service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect
to the following:
1. Water Heaters: Cold -water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot -water -supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller
than that required by plumbing code.
3. Equipment: Cold- and hot -water -supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than
equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use
flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
3.8 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and
installation in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Piping Inspections:
a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and
approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before
inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities
having jurisdiction:
1) Roughing -in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing
or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures.
2) Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests
specified in 'Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance
with requirements.
c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or
inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
2. Piping Tests:
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 8
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
a. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air
bound and that piping is full of water.
b. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a
separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
c. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and
unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was
covered or concealed before it was tested.
d. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating
pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate
test source and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure
constitute defects that must be repaired.
e. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof
until satisfactory results are obtained.
f. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.
B. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.10 ADJUSTING
A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:
1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.
2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.
4. Adjust balancing valves in hot -water -circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.
a. Manually adjust ball -type balancing valves in hot -water -circulation return piping to
provide hot-water flow in each branch.
b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.
5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during
installation.
6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for
application where used and are clean and ready for use.
8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.
3.11 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:
1. Purge new piping before using.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if
methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or
AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at
outlets.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 9
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm
of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.
2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm
of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.
c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from
system after the standing time.
d. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of water -
sample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
3.12 PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used
in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
B. Under -building -slab, domestic water, building -service piping, NPS 3 and smaller shall be the
following:
1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K wrought -copper, solder -joint fittings.
C. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following:
1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L wrought -copper, solder -joint fittings; and soldered
joints.
2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; copper pressure -seal -joint fittings; and pressure -
sealed joints.
D. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be one of the following:
1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L wrought -copper, solder -joint fittings; and soldered
joints.
2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L copper pressure -seal -joint fittings; and pressure -
sealed joints.
3.13 VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use ball or gate
valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use ball valves
with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
3. Hot -Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Calibrated balancing valves.
4. Drain Duty: Hose -end drain valves.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 10
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment.
END OF SECTION 221116
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 11
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Backflow preventers.
2. Water pressure -reducing valves.
3. Balancing valves.
4. Temperature -actuated, water mixing valves.
5. Strainers.
6. Outlet boxes.
7. Hose bibbs.
8. Wall hydrants.
9. Drain valves.
10. Water -hammer arresters.
11. Trap -seal primer valves.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers, pressure
gages, and flow meters in domestic water piping.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Potable -water piping and components shall comply with NSF 61 and NSF 14.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig unless otherwise
indicated.
2.3 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Reduced -Pressure -Principle Backflow Preventers:
1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Ames Fire & Waterworks; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
c. FEBCO; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2. Standard: ASSE 1013.
3. Operation: Continuous -pressure applications.
4. Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle third of flow range.
5. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
6. Configuration: Refer to drawings:
a. Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet.
2.4 WATER PRESSURE -REDUCING VALVES
A. Water Regulators:
1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Cash Acme; a division of Reliance Worldwide Corporation.
b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
c. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.
2. Standard: ASSE 1003.
3. Pressure Rating: Initial working pressure of 150 psig.
2.5 BALANCING VALVES
A. Copper -Alloy Calibrated Balancing Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following :
a. ITT Corporation; Bell & Gossett Div.
b. TACO Incorporated.
c. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.
2. Type: Ball valve with two readout ports and memory -setting indicator.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
3. Body: Brass or bronze.
4. Size: Same as connected piping, but not larger than NPS 2.
B. Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case.
2.6 TEMPERATURE -ACTUATED, WATER MIXING VALVES
A. Primary, Thermostatic, Water Mixing Valves:
1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Armstrong International, Inc.
b. Leonard Valve Company.
c. Powers; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2. Standard: ASSE 1017.
3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.
4. Type: Exposed -mounted, thermostatically controlled, water mixing valve.
5. Material: Bronze body with corrosion -resistant interior components.
6. Connections: Threaded union inlets and outlet.
7. Accessories: Manual temperature control, check stops on hot- and cold -water supplies,
and adjustable, temperature -control handle.
B. Individual -Fixture, Water Tempering:
1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Leonard Valve Company.
b. Powers; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
c. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.
2. Standard: ASSE 1016, thermostatically controlled, water tempering valve.
3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.
4. Body: Bronze body with corrosion -resistant interior components.
5. Temperature Control: Adjustable.
6. Inlets and Outlet: Threaded.
7. Finish: Rough or chrome -plated bronze.
2.7 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
A. Y -Pattern Strainers:
1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.
2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining that complies with
AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved, epoxy coated and for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations unless otherwise indicated.
5. Perforation Size:
a. Strainers NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: 0.045 inch
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
6. Drain: Factory -installed, hose -end drain valve.
2.8 OUTLET BOXES
A. Icemaker Outlet Boxes:
1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Acorn Engineering Company.
b. IPS Corporation.
c. Oatey.
2. Mounting: Recessed.
3. Faucet: Valved fitting complying with ASME A112.18.1. Include NPS 1/2 or smaller
copper tube outlet.
4. Supply Shutoff Fitting: NPS 1/2 gate, globe, or ball valve and NPS 1/2 copper, water
tubing.
2.9 HOSE BIBBS
A. Hose Bibbs:
1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets.
2. Body Material: Bronze.
3. Seat: Bronze, replaceable.
4. Supply Connections: NPS 3/4 threaded or solder -joint inlet.
5. Outlet Connection: Garden -hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.
6. Pressure Rating: 125 psig.
7. Vacuum Breaker: Integral nonremovable, drainable, hose -connection vacuum breaker
complying with ASSE 1011.
8. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated.
9. Finish for Service Areas: Rough bronze or Chrome or nickel plated.
10. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated.
11. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle.
12. Operation for Service Areas: Operating key.
13. Operation for Finished Rooms: Operating key.
14. Include operating key with each operating -key hose bibb.
15. Include wall flange with each chrome- or nickel -plated hose bibb.
2.10 WALL HYDRANTS
A. Moderate -Climate Wall Hydrants:
1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. MIFAB, Inc.
b. Watts Drainage Products.
c. Woodford Manufacturing Company; a division of WCM Industries, Inc
2. Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for concealed -outlet, self -draining wall hydrants.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig
4. Operation: Loose key.
5. Inlet: NPS 3/4.
6. Box and Cover Finish: Chrome plated .
7. Operating Keys(s): One with each wall hydrant.
2.11 DRAIN VALVES
A. Ball -Valve -Type, Hose -End Drain Valves:
1. Standard: MSS SP -110 for standard -port, two-piece ball valves.
2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP.
3. Size: NPS 3/4.
4. Body: Copper alloy.
5. Ball: Chrome -plated brass.
6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable.
7. Handle: Vinyl -covered steel.
8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.
9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden -hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7
and cap with brass chain.
2.12 WATER -HAMMER ARRESTERS
A. Water -Hammer Arresters:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Josam Company.
b. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
2. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI -WH 201.
3. Type: Copper tube with piston.
4. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F, or PDI -WH 201, Sizes A through F.
2.13 TRAP -SEAL PRIMER DEVICE
A. Supply -Type, Trap -Seal Primer Device:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. MIFAB, Inc.
b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
2. Standard: ASSE 1018.
3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum.
4. Body: Bronze.
5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, union, or solder joint.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
6. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solder joint.
7. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not
chrome finished.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to
other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with
authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.
2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric -vent drain connection with air -gap
fitting, fixed air -gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe
diameters in drain piping and pipe -to -floor drain. Locate air -gap device attached to or
under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are unacceptable for this application.
3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.
Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves. Install pressure gages on inlet and
outlet.
C. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted.
D. Install temperature -actuated, water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets
and with shutoff valve on outlet.
E. Install Y -pattern strainers for water on supply side of each water pressure -reducing valve
solenoid valve and pump.
F. Install outlet boxes recessed in wall. Install 2 -by -4 -inch fire -retardant -treated -wood blocking,
wall reinforcement between studs. Comply with requirements for fire -retardant -treated -wood
blocking in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry."
G. Install water -hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI -WH 201.
H. Install supply -type, trap -seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a
minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor -drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for
proper flow.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for ground equipment in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for
Electrical Systems."
B. Fire -retardant -treated -wood blocking is specified in Section 260519 "Low -Voltage Electrical
Power Conductors and Cables" for electrical connections.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic -laminate equipment nameplate or
sign on or near each of the following:
1. Reduced -pressure -principle backflow preventers.
2. Double-check, backflow -prevention assemblies.
3. Double-check, detector -assembly backflow preventers.
4. Water pressure -reducing valves.
5. Calibrated balancing valves.
6. Primary, thermostatic, water mixing valves.
B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety
and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to
identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Section 220553 "Identification for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Test each pressure vacuum breaker reduced -pressure -principle backflow preventer and
double-check, detector -assembly backflow preventer according to authorities having
jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.
B. Domestic water piping specialties will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Set field -adjustable pressure set points of water pressure -reducing valves.
B. Set field -adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.
C. Set field -adjustable temperature set points of temperature -actuated, water mixing valves.
END OF SECTION 221119
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 7
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 221123 - DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. In-line, sealless centrifugal pumps.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or
for remote -control, signaling power -limited circuits.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include materials of construction, rated
capacities, certified performance curves with operating points plotted on curves, operating
characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water pumps to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor -operated water pumps.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.
B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.
C. Comply with pump manufacturer's written handling instructions.
DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 221123 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 IN-LINE, SEALLESS CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; ITT Corporation.
2. Grundfos Pumps Corp.
3. TACO Incorporated.
B. Description: Factory -assembled and -tested, in-line, close -coupled, canned -motor, sealless,
overhung -impeller centrifugal pumps.
C. Pump Construction:
1. Pump and Motor Assembly: Hermetically sealed, replaceable -cartridge type with motor
and impeller on common shaft and designed for installation with pump and motor shaft
horizontal.
2. Casing: Bronze, with threaded or companion -flange connections.
3. Impeller: Plastic.
4. Motor: Single speed, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Capacities and Characteristics:
1. Refer to plumbing drawings.
2.2 MOTORS
A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 220513 "Common Motor Requirements
for Plumbing Equipment."
1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load
will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
2.3 CONTROLS
A. Thermostats: Electric; adjustable for control of hot-water circulation pump.
1. Type: Water -immersion temperature sensor, for installation in piping.
2. Range: 65 to 200 deg F.
3. Operation of Pump: On or off.
4. Transformer: Provide if required.
5. Power Requirement: 120 V, ac.
6. Settings: Start pump at 105 deg F and stop pump at 120 deg F.
B. Timers: Electric, for control of hot-water circulation pump.
1. Type: Programmable, seven-day clock with manual override on-off switch.
2. Operation of Pump: On or off.
3. Transformer: Provide if required.
DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 221123 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
4. Power Requirement: 24-V ac
5. Programmable Sequence of Operation: Up to two on-off cycles each day for seven days.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing -in of domestic -water -piping system to verify actual locations of connections
before pump installation.
3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION
A. Comply with HI 1.4.
B. Install in-line, sealless centrifugal pumps with shaft horizontal unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install horizontally mounted, in-line, close -coupled centrifugal pumps with shaft(s) horizontal.
D. Install vertically mounted, in-line, close -coupled centrifugal pumps with shaft vertical.
E. Install continuous -thread hanger rods and spring hangers of size required to support pump
weight.
1. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Section 220529
"Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
F. Install thermostats in hot-water return piping.
G. Install timers on wall in engineer's office.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to pumps to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect domestic water piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping equal to or
greater than size of pump nozzles.
Install flexible connectors adjacent to pumps in suction and discharge piping of the
following pumps:
a. Horizontally mounted, in-line, close -coupled centrifugal pumps.
b. Vertically mounted, in-line, close -coupled centrifugal pumps.
c. Comply with requirements for flexible connectors specified in Section 221116
"Domestic Water Piping."
2. Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of each pump, and check, shutoff, and
throttling valves on discharge side of each pump. Install valves same size as connected
piping. Comply with requirements for valves specified in Section 220523 "General -Duty
DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 221123 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
Valves for Plumbing Piping" and comply with requirements for strainers specified in
Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."
D. Connect thermostats and timers to pumps that they control.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification of pumps.
3.5 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Perform startup service.
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Check piping connections for tightness.
3. Clean strainers on suction piping.
4. Set thermostats and timers, for automatic starting and stopping operation of pumps.
5. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:
a. Verify bearing lubrication.
b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is
free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate
until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.
6. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for
operation.
7. Start motor.
8. Open discharge valve slowly.
9. Adjust temperature settings on thermostats.
10. Adjust timer settings.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust domestic water pumps to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by
manufacturer.
B. Adjust initial temperature set points.
C. Set field -adjustable switches and circuit -breaker trip ranges as indicated.
END OF SECTION 221123
DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 221123 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working
pressure unless otherwise indicated:
1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10 -foot head of water.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality -control reports.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency
B. Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for
plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent
piping and "NSF -sewer" for plastic sewer piping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting
materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper.
B. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought copper,
solder -joint fittings.
C. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L and Type M, water tube, drawn temper.
D. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead free with ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux.
2.3 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Solid -Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.
B. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns
and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.
C. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656.
1. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according
to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers."
Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564
1. PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Solvent cement shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTH MOVING
A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Section 312000
"Earth Moving."
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated
unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.
B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
E. Install piping at indicated slopes.
F. Install piping free of sags and bends.
G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
H. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate
branches, bends, and long -sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short -sweep 1/4 bends may be
used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long -turn,
double Y -branch and 1/8 -bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side
with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not
change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and
reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction
of flow is prohibited.
J. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades
and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream.
Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants,
cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint
as completed.
K. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless
otherwise indicated:
1. Building Sanitary Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 2 and
smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and larger.
2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
L. Install aboveground copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
M. Install aboveground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2665.
N. Install underground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321.
O. Install engineered soil and waste drainage and vent piping systems as follows:
1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.
P. Plumbing Specialties:
1. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building
sanitary sewers in sanitary drainage gravity -flow piping. Comply with requirements for
cleanouts specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."
Q. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
R. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements
for sleeves specified in Section 220500 "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
S. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with
requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220500 "Common Work Results for
Plumbing."
T. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with
requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220500 "Common Work Results for
Plumbing."
3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join copper tube and fittings with soldered joints according to ASTM B 828. Use ASTM B 813,
water-flushable, lead-free flux and ASTM B 32, lead -free -alloy solder.
B. Plastic, Nonpressure -Piping, Solvent -Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe
and fittings according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe -handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
2. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 Appendixes.
3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in
Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
C. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double -rod hangers, with 3/8 -inch (10 -mm) minimum
rods.
D. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod
diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8 -inch rod.
2. NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2 -inch rod.
3. NPS 4: with 5/8 -inch rod.
4. NPS 6 and NPS 8: 48 inches with 3/4 -inch rod.
E. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches.
Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP -69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than
required by plumbing code.
2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated,
but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than required by plumbing code.
4. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with cover
flush with floor.
5. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve if indicated and
union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2
(DN 65) and larger.
3.6 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping. Comply with requirements for identification
specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must
be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Roughing -in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing -in
after roughing -in and before setting fixtures.
2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe
tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,
make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction
or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:
1. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and
vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or
concealed before it was tested.
2. Roughing -in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping except outside
leaders on completion of roughing -in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water
to point of overflow, but not less than 10 -foot head of water. From 15 minutes before
inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for
leaks.
3. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled
with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent -stack
openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping
system equal to pressure of 1 -inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of
water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without
introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture
connections for gas and water leaks.
4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until
satisfactory results are obtained.
5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and
to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
D. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-
based latex paint.
3.9 PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Aboveground, soil and waste piping shall be the following:
1. Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints.
2. Solid -wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent -cemented joints.
B. Aboveground, vent piping shall be the following:
1. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy-duty hubless-piping couplings; and
coupled joints.
2. Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints.
a. Option for Vent Piping, NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3: Hard copper tube, Type M; copper
pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
3. Solid -wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent -cemented joints.
C. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping shall be the following:
1. Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC sockets fittings, and solvent -cemented joints.
END OF SECTION 221316
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Cleanouts.
2. Floor drains.
3. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 221423 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties" for storm drainage piping inside the
building, drainage piping specialties, and drains.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ABS: Acrylonitrile -butadiene -styrene plastic.
B. FRP: Fiberglass -reinforced plastic.
C. HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic.
D. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
E. PP: Polypropylene plastic.
F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For drainage piping specialties to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing
agency.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic sanitary
piping specialty components.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Section 033000 "Cast -in -Place
Concrete."
B. Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CLEANOUTS
A. Metal Cleanouts:
1. ASME A112.36.2M, Cast -Iron Cleanouts:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1) MIFAB, Inc.
2) Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
3) Watts Drainage Products.
4) Zurn Plumbing Products Group.
2.2 FLOOR DRAINS
A. Cast -Iron Floor Drains :
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. MIFAB, Inc.
b. Watts Drainage Products.
c. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Deep -Seal Traps:
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
Description: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping
and cleanout trap -seal primer valve connection.
B. Floor -Drain, Trap -Seal Primer Fittings :
1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap -seal
primer valve connection.
2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 (DN 15) side inlet.
C. Air -Gap Fittings :
1. Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap between
installed inlet and outlet piping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Section 220500 "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint
construction, and basic installation requirements.
B. Install backwater valves in building drain piping. For interior installation, provide cleanout deck
plate flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover, and of adequate size to remove
valve cover for servicing.
C. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,
unless otherwise indicated:
1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless
larger cleanout is indicated.
2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for
larger piping.
4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
D. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with
finished floor.
E. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types
indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.
F. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with
finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.
Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set
with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:
a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4 -
inch total depression.
b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope.
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
c. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1 -
inch total depression.
3. Install floor -drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless
otherwise indicated.
G. Install deep -seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated.
I -I. Install floor -drain, trap -seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap -seal primer
connection.
1. Exception:. Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap -seal primer connection.
2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet.
I. Install air -gap fittings on draining -type backflow preventers and on indirect -waste piping
discharge into sanitary drainage system.
J.
K.
L.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
1. Above -Floor Installation: Set unit with bottom resting on floor, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Flush with Floor Installation: Set unit and extension, if required, with cover flush with
finished floor.
3. Recessed Floor Installation: Set unit in receiver housing having bottom or cradle
supports, with receiver housing cover flush with finished floor.
4. Install cleanout immediately downstream from interceptors not having integral cleanout
on outlet.
Install wood -blocking reinforcement for wall -mounting -type specialties.
Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is
indicated.
Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork. Use deep -pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding
pipe fittings.
CONNECTIONS
Comply with requirements in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping" for piping
installation requirements. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and
specialties.
Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and
Systems."
Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low -Voltage Electrical
Cables."
Bonding for Electrical
Power Conductors and
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and
to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
END OF SECTION 221319
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 221413 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following storm drainage piping inside the building:
1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 22 Section "Sump Pumps."
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
B. TPE: Thermoplastic elastomer.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working -
pressure, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Storm Drainage Piping: 10 foot head of water.
2. Force Main Piping: 150 psig.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic
piping components. Include marking with "NSF -drain" for plastic drain piping and "NSF -sewer"
for plastic sewer piping.
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining
materials.
2.3 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Solid -Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.
B. Solvent Cement and Adhesive Primer:
1. Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Aboveground storm drainage piping shall be one of the following:
Solid -wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent -cemented joints.
B. Underground storm drainagepiping shall be one of the following:
1. Solid -wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent -cemented joints.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Storm sewer and drainage piping outside the building are specified in Civil Specifications
"Storm Utility Drainage Piping."
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work
Results for Plumbing."
C. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to building storm
sewers. Cleanouts are specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties."
D. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe
penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to
make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22
Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
E. Make changes in direction for storm drainage piping using appropriate branches, bends, and
long -sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of
standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of
drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
F. Lay buried building storm drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to
grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping
upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of
lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past
each joint as completed.
G. Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Storm Drain: Slope piping per Local Building Code or as shown on drawings.
H. Install PVC storm drainage piping according to ASTM D 2665.
1. Install underground PVC storm drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.
J. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work
Results Plumbing."
B. PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665.
3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. General valve installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "General -Duty
Valves for Plumbing Piping.
B. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to backflow.
1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally closed type, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Install backwater valves in accessible locations.
3. Backwater valve are specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties."
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Install the following:
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, damps.
2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:
a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
c. Longer Than 100 Feet, if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.
Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
B. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping
and Equipment."
C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double -rod hangers, with 3/8 -inch minimum rods.
E. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod
diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8 -inch rod.
2. NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2 -inch rod.
3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8 -inch rod.
4. NPS 6: 48 inches with 3/4 -inch rod.
5. NPS 8 to NPS 12: 48 inches with 7/8 -inch rod.
F. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches.
G. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP -69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.7 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transition fitting to
join dissimilar piping materials.
C. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and
to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
END OF SECTION 221413
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 - 5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 221423 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Roof drains.
2. Cleanouts.
3. Backwater valves.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing
agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STORM DRAINS
A. Cast -Iron Storm Drains.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. MIFAB, Inc.
b. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
c. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div
2. Standard: ASME A112.6.4, for general-purpose roof drains.
2.2 CLEANOUTS
A. Metal Cleanouts:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Josam Company; Josam Div.
b. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
c. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221423 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
2.3 BACKWATER VALVES
A. Horizontal Backwater Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. MIFAB, Inc.
b. Spears.
c. Clean Check.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's written
installation instructions. Roofing materials are specified in Division 07 Sections.
1. Install flashing collar or flange of roof drain to prevent leakage between drain and
adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
2. Install expansion joints, if indicated, in roof drain outlets.
3. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.
B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,
unless otherwise indicated:
1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless
larger cleanout is indicated.
2. Cleanouts shall be installed per local Plumbing Code.
3. Locate at base of each vertical storm stack.
C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with
finished floor.
D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types
indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.
E. Install horizontal backwater valves in floor with cover flush with floor.
F. Install wall cleanouts in vertical conductors. Install access door in wall if indicated.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and
to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221423 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
END OF SECTION 221423
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221423 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 223300 - ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
This Section includes the following electric water heaters:
1. Household, storage electric water heaters.
2. Compression tanks.
3. Water heater accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type and size of water heater indicated. Include rated capacities,
operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
B. LEED Submittal:
Product Data for Prerequisite EA 2: Documentation indicating that units comply with
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, Section 7 - "Service Water Heating."
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For electric water heaters to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Source Limitations: Obtain same type of electric water heaters through one source from a
single manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of electric
water heaters and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section
"Product Requirements."
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
D. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-
2004.
ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 223300 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
E. ASME Compliance: Where indicated, fabricate and label commercial water heater storage
tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
F. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through
9," for all components that will be in contact with potable water.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with Architectural and Structural Drawings.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of electric water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports.
b. Faulty operation of controls.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.
2. Warranty Period(s): From date of Substantial Completion:
a. Household Electric Water Heaters:
1) Storage Tank: Five years.
2) Controls and Other Components: Three years.
b. Compression Tanks: One year.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
A. Standard, Storage Electric Water Heaters: Comply with UL 174.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Lochinvar Corporation.
b. Smith, A. O. Water Products Company.
c. State Industries, Inc.
ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 223300 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
Storage -Tank Construction: Steel.
a. Tappings: ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.
b. Pressure Rating: 150 PSI
c. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable -water tank
linings, including extending lining material into tappings.
3. Factory -Installed Storage -Tank Appurtenances:
a. Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium.
b. Dip Tube: Provide unless cold -water inlet is near bottom of tank.
c. Drain Valve: ASSE 1005.
d. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004.
e. Heat Trap Fittings: Inlet type in cold -water inlet and outlet type in hot-water outlet.
f. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat for each element.
g. Safety Control: High -temperature -limit cutoff device or system.
h. Relief Valve: ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.3 for
combination temperature and pressure relief valves. Include relieving capacity at
least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than water heater
working -pressure rating. Select relief valve with sensing element that extends into
storage tank.
4. Capacity and Characteristics: (Refer to Drawings).
2.3 COMPRESSION TANKS
A. Description: Steel pressure -rated tank constructed with welded joints and factory -installed
butyl -rubber diaphragm. Include air precharge to minimum system -operating pressure at tank.
1. Manufacturers:
a. AMTROL Inc.
b. Taco, Inc.
c. Watts Regulator Co.
2. Construction:
a. Tappings: Factory -fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling.
Include ASME B1.20.1, pipe thread.
b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable -water tank
linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.
c. Air -Charging Valve: Factory installed.
2.4 WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES
A. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and
complying with ASME PTC 25.3. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and
include pressure setting less than water heater working -pressure rating. Select relief valves
with sensing element that extends into storage tank.
B. Drain -Pan Units: Where water heaters or hot water storage tanks are installed in habitable
space, the tank or water heater shall be installed in a galvanized steel drain pan of a minimum
ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 223300 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
thickness of 24 gauge. Electric water heater drain pans may be high impact plastic of at least
0.0625 inch thickness.
C. Piping -Type Heat Traps: Field -fabricated piping arrangement according to
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004.
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test and inspect water heater storage tanks, specified to be ASME-code construction,
according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
B. Hydrostatically test water heater storage tanks before shipment to minimum of one and one-half
times pressure rating.
C. Prepare test reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION
A. Install water heaters on concrete bases.
1. Exception: Omit concrete bases for commercial water heaters if installation on stand,
bracket, suspended platform, or direct on floor is indicated.
2. Concrete base construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common
Work Results for Plumbing."
B. Install water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and
referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so
controls and devices needing service are accessible.
C. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use
relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend water -heater relief -valve
outlet, with drain piping same as domestic water piping in continuous downward pitch, and
discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain in the same room as water heater.
D. Install water -heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or
over floor drains. Install hose -end drain valves at low points in water piping for water heaters
that do not have tank drains. Refer to Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties"
for hose -end drain valves.
E. Install thermometer on outlet piping of water heaters. Refer to Division 22 Section "Meters and
Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers.
F. Install piping -type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of water heater storage tanks without
integral or fitting -type heat traps.
G. Fill water heaters with water.
H. Charge compression tanks with air.
ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 223300 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to water heaters to allow service and maintenance. Arrange piping for
easy removal of water heaters.
C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to
inspect, test, and adjust Feld -assembled components and equipment installation, including
connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair- leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, confirm proper operation.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
C. Remove and replace water heaters that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as
specified above.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain commercial electric water heaters. Refer to Division 01 Section
"Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION 223300
ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 223300 - 5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following conventional plumbing fixtures and related components:
1. Faucets.
2. Flushometers.
3. Fixture supports.
4. Protective Shielding Guards.
5. Disposers.
6. Water closets.
7. Urinals.
8. Lavatories.
9. Kitchen sinks.
10. Mop sinks.
11. Drinking fountains.
12. Hose Bibbs and Hydrants
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of plumbing fixture indicated. Include selected fixture and trim,
fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials
and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow -control rates.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
C. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category
through one source from a single manufacturer.
1. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single
manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that
category.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable
Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101-
336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.
D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy
Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.
E. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components --Health Effects," for
fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.
F. ARI Standard: Comply with ARI's "Directory of Certified Drinking Water Coolers" for style
classifications.
G. ARI Standard: Comply with ARI 1010, "Self -Contained, Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking -
Water Coolers," for water coolers and with ARI's "Directory of Certified Drinking Water Coolers"
for type and style classifications.
H. ASHRAE Standard: Comply with ASHRAE 34, "Designation and Safety Classification of
Refrigerants," for water coolers. Provide HFC 134a (tetrafluoroethane) refrigerant, unless
otherwise indicated.
Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are
compatible.
J. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing
fixtures:
1. Stainless -Steel Residential Sinks: ASME A112.19.3.
2. Vitreous -China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M.
3. Water -Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.5.
4. Water -Closet, Flushometer Tank Trim: ASSE 1037.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of whirlpools that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures of unit shell.
b. Faulty operation of controls, blowers, pumps, heaters, and timers.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.
2. 1 year Warranty Period for Commercial Applications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LAVATORY AND SINK FAUCETS
A. Lavatory and Sink Faucets:
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Chicago Faucets.
b. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.
c. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation
2.2 FLUSHOMETERS
A. Flushometers:
1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Sloan Valve Company.
b. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation.
2.3 TOILET SEATS
A. Toilet Seats:
1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Bemis Manufacturing Company.
b. Centoco Manufacturing Corp.
c. Olsonite Corp.
2.4 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS
A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. McGuire Manufacturing Co., Inc.
b. Plumberex Specialty Products Inc.
c. TRUEBRO, Inc.
2.5 FIXTURE SUPPORTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Josam Company.
2. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
3. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
2.6 DISPOSERS
A. Disposers:
1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. In-Sink-Erator; a div. of Emerson Electric Co.
b. KitchenAid.
WATER CLOSETS
B. Water Closets:
1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Kohler Co.
b. TOTO USA, Inc.
c. American Standard Companies, Inc.
2.7 URINALS
A. Urinals:
1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Kohler Co.
b. TOTO USA, Inc.
c. American Standard Companies, Inc.
2.8 LAVATORIES
A. Lavatories:
1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Kohler Co.
b. TOTO USA, Inc.
c. American Standard Companies, Inc.
2.9 KITCHEN SINKS
A. Kitchen Sinks:
1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Jacuzzi, Inc.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
2.10
A.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
9.
Kohler Co.
American Standard Companies, Inc.
Eljer.
DuPont, Corian Products.
Elkay Manufacturing Co.
Just Manufacturing Company.
MOP SINKS
Mop Sinks:
Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
Crane Plumbing, L.L.C./Fiat Products.
Precast Terrazzo Enterprises, Inc.
Stern -Williams Co., Inc.
2.11 DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS
Drinking Fountains:
1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
Elkay Manufacturing Co.
Halsey Taylor.
Oasis Corporation.
2.12 HOSE BIBB'S AND HYDRANTS
A. Hose Bibbs and Hydrants
Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Zurn
b. Prier
c. WoodFord
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing -in of water supply and sanitary drainage
actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture
B. Examine cabinets, counters, floors, and walls for suitable
installed.
and vent piping systems to verify
installation.
conditions where fixtures will be
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000-5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers'
written instructions.
B. Install off -floor supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall -mounting fixtures.
1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back -outlet fixtures.
2. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping.
3. Use chair -type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures.
C. Install back -outlet, wall -mounting fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.
D. Install floor -mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building
substrate.
E. Install wall -mounting fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.
F. Install mounting frames affixed to building construction and attach recessed water coolers to
mounting frames, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Install counter -mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.
I -I. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing -in drawings.
Install water -supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water
distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.
Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.
J. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to
sanitary drainage system.
K. Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to drainage
system.
L. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on wide
side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities
to reach.
M. Install toilet seats on water closets.
N. Install faucet -spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are
not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.
O. Install water -supply flow -control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop
valves.
P. Install shower flow -control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower arms.
Q. Install traps on fixture outlets.
1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.
R. Install disposer in outlet of each sink indicated to have disposer. Install switch where indicated
or in wall adjacent to sink if location is not indicated.
S. Install dishwasher air -gap fitting at each sink indicated to have air -gap fitting. Connect inlet
hose to dishwasher and outlet hose to disposer.
T. Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within
cabinets and millwork. Use deep -pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.
Escutcheons are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
U. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary -type, one -part,
mildew -resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified in
Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent
piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where
installed.
B. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified
components.
C. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace
malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate
properly.
E. Install fresh batteries in sensor -operated mechanisms.
F. Water Cooler Testing: After electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with
requirements. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
1. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
2. Report test results in writing.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 7
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls.
fittings, and controls.
B.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Operate and adjust disposers and controls.
controls.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures,
Replace damaged and malfunctioning units and
Adjust water pressure at faucets and flushometer valves to produce proper flow and stream.
Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.
Install fresh batteries in sensor -operated mechanisms.
Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height.
Adjust water cooler temperature settings.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods
and materials. Do the following:
1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers
and spouts.
2. Remove sediment and debris from drains.
B. After completing installation of exposed, factory -finished fixtures, faucets, and fittings, inspect
exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.
C. After completing fixture installation, inspect unit. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt,
and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
D. Clean fixtures, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.
B. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by
Owner.
END OF SECTION 224000
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 8
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose,
horizontal, small and medium, squirrel -cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to
600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment
manufacturer for field installation.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the
following:
1. Motor controllers.
2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above
sea level.
B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected
loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating
sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS
A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
C. Service Factor: 1.15.
D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.
1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.
2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.
E. Rotor: Random -wound, squirrel cage.
F. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
G. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.
H. Insulation: Class F.
Code Letter Designation:
1. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
J. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor
frame sizes smaller than 324T.
2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features
coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.
1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture -resistant insulation varnish, designed and
tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by
pulse -width modulated inverters.
2. Energy- and Premium -Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.
3. Inverter -Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.
4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected
motors.
2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements
of specific motor application:
1. Permanent -split capacitor.
B. Multispeed Motors: Variable -torque, permanent -split -capacitor type.
C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and
thrust loading.
Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded -pole type.
E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor
when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor
insulation. Thermal -protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns
to normal range.
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 230513
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 230514 - VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION
A. This specification is to cover a complete Variable Frequency motor Drive (VFD) consisting of a
pulse width modulated (PWM) inverter designed for use with a standard NEMA Design B
induction motor.
B. The drive manufacturer shall supply the drive and all necessary options, specified. The
manufacturer shall have been engaged in the production of this type of equipment for a
minimum of ten years. All VFDs installed on this project shall be from the same manufacturer.
1.3 SUMMARY
A. Related Sections
1. Section 237300 — Custom Indoor Central -Station Air -Handling Units
2. Section 233423 - HVAC Power Ventilators
3. Section 232123 - Hydronic Pumps
4. Section 230900 — Instrumentation and Control For HVAC
B. Section includes separately enclosed, pre -assembled, combination VFCs, rated 600 V and less,
for speed control of three-phase, squirrel -cage induction motors.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
1. IEEE C62.41 — Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low -Voltage AC Power
Circuits.
B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association
1. NEMA 250 — Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
2. NEMA FU 1 — Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses.
3. NEMA ICS 7 — Industrial Control and Systems: Adjustable Speed Drives.
4. NEMA ICS 7.1 — Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation,
and Operation of Adjustable Speed Drive Systems.
C. International Electrical Testing Association
1. NETA ATS — Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution
Equipment and Systems.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate front and side views of enclosures with overall dimensions and weights
shown; conduit entrance locations and requirements; and nameplate legends.
B. Product Data: For each type and rating of VFC indicated. Include the following features:
1. Performance
VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 230514 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
2. Electrical Ratings
3. Operating Characteristics
4. Dimensioned outline drawing
5. Schematic diagram
6. Component list
7. Power and control connection diagram(s).
8. Bacnet Interface Controller
9. Compliance to IEEE 519 — harmonic analysis for particular jobsite including total
harmonic voltage distortion and total harmonic current distortion (TDD).
a. The VFD manufacturer shall provide calculations; specific to this installation,
showing total harmonic voltage distortion is less than 5%. Input filters shall be
sized and provided as required by the VFD manufacturer to ensure compliance
with IEEE standard 519. All VFD's shall include a minimum of 5% impedance
reactors.
C. LEED Submittals
1. Product Data for Credit EA 5: For continuous metering equipment for energy
consumption.
D. Test Reports: Indicate field test and inspection procedures and test results.
E. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate start-up inspection findings.
F. Harmonic Analysis Study and Report: Comply with IEEE 399 and NETA Acceptance Testing
Specification; indentify the effects of nonlinear loads and their associated harmonic
contributions on the voltages and currents throughout the electrical system. Analyze possible
operating scenarios, including recommendations for VFC input filtering to limit TDD and THD
(V) at each VFC to specified levels.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 - Execution and closeout requirements.
B. Provide final equipment submittal information with all noted corrections incorporated.
C. Field quality -control reports
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions complying with NEMA ICS 7.1. Include
procedures for starting and operating controllers, and describe operating limits possibly
resulting in hazardous or unsafe conditions. Include routine preventive maintenance schedule.
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting thermal -magnetic circuit
breaker and MCP trip setting.
2. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field -adjustable overload relays.
3. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming
microprocessor control modules.
4. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field -adjustable timers, controls, and status
and alarm points.
E. Load Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have
been installed and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor -running overload
protection suit actual motor to be protected.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to calculation and additional testing requirements located within Division 26 and Part 3 of
this Section.
VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 230514 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. QUALITY ASSURANCE
Referenced Standards:
a. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
1) Standard 519-1992, IEEE Guide for Harmonic Content and Control.
b. Underwriters laboratories
1) UL508C
c. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)
1) ICS 7.0, AC Adjustable Speed Drives
d. IEC 16800 Parts 1 and 2
e. National Electric Code (NEC)
1) NEC 430.120, Adjustable -Speed Drive Systems
2. Qualifications:
a. VFDs and options shall be UL listed as a complete assembly. VFD's that require
the customer to supply external fuses for the VFD to be UL listed are not
acceptable. VFDs with red label UL stickers, requiring additional branch circuit
protection are not acceptable. The base VFD shall be UL listed for 100 KAIC
without the need for input fuses.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 — Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
B. Store in clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping and provide additional plastic cover to
protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.
C. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided.
Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosure, and finish.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation, capable of driving full load
without derating, under the following conditions:
1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than 14 deg. F. and not exceeding 104 deg. F.
2. Ambient Storage Temperature: Not less than minus 4 deg. F. and not exceeding 140
deg. F.
3. Humidity: Less than 95 percent (noncondensing).
4. Altitude: Not Exceeding 1000 feet.
B. Conform to NEMA ICS 7 service conditions during and after installation of variable frequency
controllers.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace VFCs that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period.
B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for variable frequency controller.
1.11 TRAINING
A. Contractor shall provide 16 hours of training to university staff divided into 4 sessions.
VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 230514 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
B. Training shall be video taped by a licensed videographer. One DVD copy shall be provided to
the owner agent.
1.12 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Section 01 — Execution and Closeout Requirements: Maintenance service.
B. Furnish service and maintenance of variable frequency controller for one year from Date of
Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLER
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. ABB.
2. Danfoss Inc.; Danfoss Drives Division (Labeled Drives Manufactured by Danfoss Inc.
also Permitted)
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
5. Yaskawa Electric America, Inc; Drives Division
2.2 VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLER
A. The VFD package as specified herein shall be enclosed in a UL Listed Type enclosure,
exceeding NEMA enclosure design criteria (enclosures with only NEMA ratings are not
acceptable), completely assembled and tested by the manufacturer in an ISO9001 facility. The
VFD tolerated voltage window shall allow the VFD to operate from a line of +30% nominal, and -
35% nominal voltage as a minimum.
1. Environmental operating conditions: VFDs shall be capable of continuous operation at 0
to 500 C (32 to 1220 F) ambient temperature as per VFD manufacturers
documented/submittal data or VFD must be oversized to meet these temperature
requirements. Not acceptable are VFD's that can only operate at 40° C intermittently
(average during a 24 hour period) and therefore must be oversized. Altitude 0 to 3300
feet above sea level, less than 95% humidity, non -condensing. All circuit boards shall
have conformal coating.
B. All VFDs shall have the following standard features:
All VFDs shall have the same customer interface, including digital display, and keypad,
regardless of horsepower rating. The keypad shall be removable, capable of remote
mounting and allow for uploading and downloading of parameter settings as an aid for
start-up of multiple VFDs.
2. The keypad shall include Hand -Off -Auto selections and manual speed control. The drive
shall incorporate "bumpless transfer" of speed reference when switching between "Hand"
and "Auto" modes. There shall be fault reset and "Help" buttons on the keypad. The
Help button shall include "on-line" assistance for programming and troubleshooting.
3. There shall be a built-in time clock in the VFD keypad. The clock shall have a battery
backup with 10 years minimum life span. The clock shall be used to date and time stamp
faults and record operating parameters at the time of fault. If the battery fails, the VFD
shall automatically revert to hours of operation since initial power up. Capacitor back-up
is not acceptable. The clock shall also be programmable to control start/stop functions,
VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 230514 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
constant speeds, PID parameter sets and output Form -C relays. The VFD shall have a
digital input that allows an override to the time clock (when in the off mode) for a
programmable time frame. There shall be four (4) separate, independent timer functions
that have both weekday and weekend settings.
4. The VFD's shall utilize pre-programmed application macro's specifically designed to
facilitate start-up. The Application Macros shall provide one command to reprogram all
parameters and customer interfaces for a particular application to reduce programming
time. The VFD shall have two user macros to allow the end-user to create and save
custom settings.
5. The VFD shall have cooling fans that are designed for easy replacement. The fans shall
be designed for replacement without requiring removing the VFD from the wall or removal
of circuit boards. The VFD cooling fans shall operate only when required. To extend the
fan and bearing operating life, the VFD shall cycle the cooling fans on and off as
required.
6. The VFD shall be capable of starting into a coasting load (forward or reverse) up to full
speed and accelerate or decelerate to set point without tripping or component damage
(flying start).
7. The VFD shall have the ability to automatically restart after an over -current, over -voltage,
under -voltage, or loss of input signal protective trip. The number of restart attempts, trial
time, and time between attempts shall be programmable.
8. The overload rating of the drive shall be 110% of its normal duty current rating for 1
minute every 10 minutes, 130% overload for 2 seconds. The minimum FLA rating shall
meet or exceed the values in the NEC/UL table 430.250 for 4 -pole motors.
9. The VFD shall have internal 5% impedance reactors to reduce the harmonics to the
power line and to add protection from AC line transients. The 5% impedance may be
from dual (positive and negative DC bus) reactors, or 5% AC line reactors. VFD's with
only one DC reactor shall add an AC line reactor.
10. The input current rating of the VFD shall be no more than 3% greater than the output
current rating. VFD's with higher input current ratings require the upstream wiring,
protection devices, and source transformers to be oversized per NEC 430.120. Input and
output current ratings must be shown on the VFD nameplate.
11. The VFD shall include a coordinated AC transient surge protection system consisting of
4-120 joule rated MOV's (phase to phase and phase to ground), a capacitor clamp, and
5% impedance reactors.
12. The VFD shall provide a programmable loss -of -load (broken belt / broken coupling)
Form -C relay output. The drive shall be programmable to signal the loss -of -load
condition via a keypad warning, Form -C relay output, and / or over the serial
communications bus. The loss -of -load condition sensing algorithm shall include a
programmable time delay that will allow for motor acceleration from zero speed without
signaling a false loss -of -load condition.
13. The VFD shall have user programmable underload and overload curve functions to allow
user defined indications of broken belt or mechanical failure / jam condition causing
motor overload
14. The VFD shall include multiple "two zone" PID algorithms that allow the VFD to maintain
PID control from two separate feedback signals (4-20mA, 0-10V, and / or serial
communications). The two zone control PID algorithm will control motor speed based on
a minimum, maximum, or average of the two feedback signals. All of the VFD PID
controllers shall include the ability for "two zone" control.
15. If the input reference (4-20mA or 2-10V) is lost, the VFD shall give the user the option of
either (1) stopping and displaying a fault, (2) running at a programmable preset speed,
(3) hold the VFD speed based on the last good reference received, or (4) cause a
warning to be issued, as selected by the user. The drive shall be programmable to signal
this condition via a keypad warning, Form -C relay output and / or over the serial
communication bus.
16. The VFD shall have programmable "Sleep" and "Wake up" functions to allow the drive to
be started and stopped from the level of a process feedback signal.
VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 230514 - 5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
C. All VFDs to have the following adjustments:
Three (3) programmable critical frequency lockout ranges to prevent the VFD from
operating the load continuously at an unstable speed. The lockout range must be fully
adjustable, from 0 to full speed.
2. Two (2) PID Set point controllers shall be standard in the drive, allowing pressure or flow
signals to be connected to the VFD, using the microprocessor in the VFD for the closed-
loop control. The VFD shall have 250 ma of 24 VDC auxiliary power and be capable of
loop powering a transmitter supplied by others. The PID set point shall be adjustable
from the VFD keypad, analog inputs, or over the communications bus. There shall be
two independent parameter sets for the PID controller and the capability to switch
between the parameter sets via a digital input, serial communications or from the keypad.
The independent parameter sets are typically used for night setback, switching between
summer and winter set points, etc.
3. There shall be an independent, second PID loop that can utilize the second analog input
and modulate one of the analog outputs to maintain the set point of an independent
process (ie. valves, dampers, etc.). All set points, process variables, etc. to be
accessible from the serial communication network.
4. Two (2) programmable analog inputs shall accept current or voltage signals.
5. Two (2) programmable analog outputs (0-20ma or 4-20 ma). The outputs may be
programmed to output proportional to Frequency, Motor Speed, Output Voltage, Output
Current, Motor Torque, Motor Power (kW), DC Bus voltage, Active Reference, Active
Feedback, and other data.
6. Six (6) programmable digital inputs for maximum flexibility in interfacing with external
devices. All digital inputs shall be programmable to initiate upon an application or
removal of 24VDC or 24VAC.
7. Three (3) programmable, digital Form -C relay outputs. The relay outputs shall include
programmable on and off delay times and adjustable hysteresis. The relays shall be
rated for maximum switching current 8 amps at 24 VDC and 0.4 A at 250 VAC; Maximum
voltage 300 VDC and 250 VAC; continuous current rating of 2 amps RMS. Outputs shall
be true Form -C type contacts; open collector outputs are not acceptable.
8. Run permissive circuit - There shall be a run permissive circuit for damper or valve
control. Regardless of the source of a run command (keypad, input contact closure,
time -clock control, or serial communications), the VFD shall provide a dry contact closure
that will signal the damper to open (VFD motor does not operate). When the damper is
fully open, a normally open dry contact (end -switch) shall close. The closed end -switch is
wired to a VFD digital input and allows VFD motor operation. Two separate safety
interlock inputs shall be provided. When either safety is opened, the motor shall be
commanded to coast to stop and the damper shall be commanded to close. The keypad
shall display "start enable 1 (or 2) missing". The safety input status shall also be
transmitted over the serial communications bus.
9. The VFD control shall include a programmable time delay for VFD start and a keypad
indication that this time delay is active. A Form C relay output provides a contact closure
to signal the VAV boxes open. This will allow VAV boxes to be driven open before the
motor operates. The time delay shall be field programmable from 0 — 120 seconds. Start
delay shall be active regardless of the start command source (keypad command, input
contact closure, time -clock control, or serial communications), and when switching from
drive to bypass.
10. Seven (7) programmable preset speeds.
11. Two independently adjustable accel and decel ramps with 1 — 1800 seconds adjustable
time ramps.
12. The VFD shall include a motor flux optimization circuit that will automatically reduce
applied motor voltage to the motor to optimize energy consumption and reduce audible
motor noise. The VFD shall have selectable software for optimization of motor noise,
energy consumption, and motor speed control.
VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 230514 - 6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
13. The VFD shall include a carrier frequency control circuit that reduces the carrier
frequency based on actual VFD temperature that allows higher carrier frequency settings
without derating the VFD,
14. The VFD shall include password protection against parameter changes.
D. The Keypad shall include a backlit LCD display. The display shall be in complete English words
for programming and fault diagnostics (alpha -numeric codes are not acceptable). All VFD faults
shall be displayed in English words. The keypad shall include a minimum of 14 assistants
including:
1. Start-up assistant
2. Parameter assistants
a. PID assistant
b. Reference assistant
c. I/O assistant
d. Serial communications assistant
e. Option module assistant
f. Panel display assistant
g. Low noise set-up assistant
3. Maintenance assistant
4. Troubleshooting assistant
5. Drive optimizer assistants
E. All applicable operating values shall be capable of being displayed in engineering (user) units.
A minimum of three operating values from the list below shall be capable of being displayed at
all times. The display shall be in complete English words (alpha -numeric codes are not
acceptable):
1. Output Frequency
2. Motor Speed (RPM, %, or Engineering units)
3. Motor Current
4. Motor Torque
5. Motor Power (kW)
6. DC Bus Voltage
7. Output Voltage
F. Serial Communications
1. The VFD shall have an EIA -485 port as standard. The standard protocols shall be
ASHRAE 135 - BACnet. Each individual drive shall have the protocol in the base VFD.
The use of third party gateways and multiplexers is not acceptable. All protocols shall be
"certified" BTL Listed for BACnet. Use of non -certified protocols is not allowed.
2. The BACnet connection shall be an EIA -485, MS/TP interface operating at 76.8 Kbps.
The connection shall be tested by the BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) and be BTL Listed,
The BACnet interface shall conform to the BACnet standard device type of an
Applications Specific Controller (B -ASC). The interface shall support all BIBBs defined
by the BACnet standard profile for a B -ASC including, but not limited to:
a. Data Sharing — Read Property — B.
b. Data Sharing - Write Property — B.
c. Device Management — Dynamic Device Binding (Who -Is; I -Am).
d. Device Management — Dynamic Object Binding (Who -Has; I -Have).
e. Device Management — Communication Control — B.
3. If additional hardware is required to obtain the BACnet interface, the VFD manufacturer
shall supply one BACnet gateway per drive. Multiple VFDs sharing one gateway shall
not be acceptable.
VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 230514 - 7
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
4. Serial communication capabilities shall include, but not be limited to; run -stop control,
speed set adjustment, proportional/integral/derivative PID control adjustments, current
limit, accel/decel time adjustments, and lock and unlock the keypad. The drive shall have
the capability of allowing the DDC to monitor feedback such as process variable
feedback, output speed / frequency, current (in amps), % torque, power (kW), kilowatt
hours (resettable), operating hours (resettable), and drive temperature. The DDC shall
also be capable of monitoring the VFD relay output status, digital input status, and all
analog input and analog output values. All diagnostic warning and fault information shall
be transmitted over the serial communications bus. Remote VFD fault reset shall be
possible.
5. Serial communication in bypass shall include, but not be limited to; bypass run -stop
control, the ability to force the unit to bypass, and the ability to lock and unlock the
keypad. The bypass shall have the capability of allowing the DDC to monitor feedback
such as, current (in amps), kilowatt hours (resettable), operating hours (resettable), and
bypass logic board temperature. The DDC shall also be capable of monitoring the
bypass relay output status, and all digital input status. All bypass diagnostic warning and
fault information shall be transmitted over the serial communications bus. Remote
bypass fault reset shall be possible.
6. The VFD / bypass shall allow the DDC to control the drive and bypass digital and analog
outputs via the serial interface. This control shall be independent of any VFD function.
The analog outputs may be used for modulating chilled water valves or cooling tower
bypass valves. The drive and bypass' digital (Form -C relay) outputs may be used to
actuate a damper, open a valve or control any other device that requires a maintained
contact for operation. In addition, all of the drive and bypass' digital inputs shall be
capable of being monitored by the DDC system. This allows for remote monitoring of
which (of up to 4) safeties are open.
7. The VFD shall include an independent PID loop for customer use. The independent PID
loop would be used for chilled water value control. Both the VFD PID control loop and
the independent PID control loop shall continue functioning even if the serial
communications connection is lost. As default, the VFD shall keep the last good set point
command and last good DO & AO commands in memory in the event the serial
communications connection is lost and continue controlling the process.
G. EMI / RFI filters. All VFD's shall include EMI/RFI filters. The onboard filters shall allow the VFD
assembly to be CE Marked and the VFD shall meet product standard EN 61800-3 for the First
Environment restricted level with up to 100 feet of motor cable. No Exceptions. Certified test
reports shall be provided with the submittals confirming compliance to EN 61800-3, First
Environment.
H. All VFD's through 25HP at 480 V shall be protected from input and output power mis-wiring.
The VFD shall sense this condition and display an alarm on the keypad. The VFD shall not
sustain damage from this power mis-wiring condition.
ADDITIONAL FEATURES — Optional features to be furnished and mounted by the drive
manufacturer. All optional features shall be UL Listed by the drive manufacturer as a complete
assembly and carry a UL508 label.
1. Fieldbus adapters - BACnet IP, shall be provided by adding of an optional card.
J. BYPASS CONTROLLER
1. A complete factory wired and tested bypass system consisting of a door interlocked,
padlockable circuit breaker, output contactor, bypass contactor, and fast acting VFD input
fuses are required. UL Listed motor overload protection shall be provided in both drive
and bypass modes.
VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 230514 - 8
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
2. The bypass enclosure door and VFD enclosure must be mechanically interlocked such
that the disconnecting device must be in the "Off" position before either enclosure may be
accessed.
3. The VFD and bypass package shall have a UL listed short circuit current rating (SCCR)
of 100,000 amps and this rating shall be indicated on the UL data label.
4. Drive Isolation Fuses - To ensure maximum possible bypass operation, fast acting fuses,
exclusive to the VFD, shall be provided to allow the VFD to disconnect from the line prior
to clearing upstream branch circuit protection. This maintains bypass operation capability
in the event of a VFD failure. Bypass designs which have no such fuses, or that
incorporate fuses common to both the VFD and the bypass, will not be accepted.
5. The system (VFD and Bypass) tolerated voltage window shall allow the system to
operate from a line of +30%, -35% nominal voltage range. The system shall incorporate
circuitry that will allow the drive or bypass contactor to remain "sealed in" over this
voltage tolerance at a minimum.
6. The bypass shall maintain positive contactor control through the voltage tolerance
window of nominal voltage +30%, -35%. This feature is designed to avoid contactor coil
failure during brown out / low line conditions and allow for input single phase operation
when in the VFD mode. Designs that will not allow input single phase operation in the
VFD mode are not acceptable.
7. Motor protection from single phase power conditions - the bypass system must be able to
detect a single phase input power condition while running in bypass, disengage the motor
in a controlled fashion, and give a single phase input power indication. Bypass systems
not incorporating single phase protection in bypass mode are not acceptable.
8. The bypass system shall NOT depend on the VFD for bypass operation. The bypass
system shall be designed for stand alone operation and shall be completely functional in
both Hand and Automatic modes even if the VFD has been removed from the system for
repair / replacement. Serial communications shall remain functional even with the VFD
removed.
9. Serial communications — the bypass shall be capable of being monitored and controlled
via serial communications. Communication shall be through BACnet IP.
10. Serial communication capabilities shall include, but not be limited to; bypass run -stop
control; the ability to force the unit to bypass; and the ability to lock and unlock the
keypad. The bypass shall have the capability of allowing the DDC to monitor feedback
such as, current (in amps), kilowatt hours (resettable), operating hours (resettable), and
bypass logic board temperature. The DDC shall also be capable of monitoring the
bypass relay output status, and all digital input status. All bypass diagnostic warning and
fault information shall be transmitted over the serial communications bus. Remote
bypass fault reset shall be possible. The following additional status indications and
settings shall be transmitted over the serial communications bus and / or via a Form -C
relay output — keypad "Hand" or "Auto" selected, bypass selected, and broken belt
indication. The DDC system shall also be able to monitor if the motor is running in the
VFD mode or bypass mode over serial communications. A minimum of 50 field serial
communications points shall be capable of being monitored in the bypass mode.
11. The bypass serial communications shall allow control of the bypass' digital outputs via
the serial interface. This control shall be independent of any bypass function or operating
state. The bypass' digital (relay) outputs may be used to actuate a damper, open a valve
or control any other device that requires a maintained contact for operation. In addition,
all of the bypass' digital inputs shall be capable of being monitored by the DDC system.
12. There shall be an adjustable motor current sensing circuit for the bypass and VFD modes
to provide proof of flow (broken belt) indication. The condition shall be indicated on the
keypad display, transmitted over the building automation protocol and / or via a Form -C
relay output contact closure. The broken belt indication shall be programmable to be a
system (drive and bypass) indication. The broken belt condition sensing algorithm shall
be programmable to cause only a warning or a fault and / or system shutdown.
13. The digital inputs for the system shall accept 24VAC or 24VDC. The bypass shall
incorporate an internally sourced power supply and not require an external control power
VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 230514 - 9
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
source. The bypass power board shall supply 250 ma of 24 VDC for use by others to
power external devices.
14. There shall be a run permissive circuit for damper or valve control. Regardless of the
source of a run command (keypad command, time -clock control, digital input, or serial
communications) the bypass shall provide a dry contact closure that will signal the
damper to open (motor does not operate). When the damper is fully open, a normally
open dry contact (end -switch) shall close. The closed end -switch is wired to a bypass
system input and allows motor operation. Up to four separate safety interlock inputs shall
be provided. When any safety is opened, the motor shall be commanded to coast to
stop, and the damper shall be commanded to close. This feature will also operate in
Fireman's override / smoke control mode.
15. The bypass control shall monitor the status of the VFD and bypass contactors and
indicate when there is a welded contactor contact or open contactor coil. This failed
contactor condition shall be indicated on the bypass LCD display, programmed to fire a
Form -C relay output, and / or over the serial communications protocol.
16. The bypass control shall include a programmable time delay for bypass start and keypad
indication that this time delay is in process. A Form C relay output provides a contact
closure to signal the VAV boxes open. This will allow VAV boxes to be driven open
before the motor operates at full speed in the bypass mode. The time delay shall be field
programmable from 0 —120 seconds.
17. There shall be a keypad adjustment to select manual or automatic transfer bypass. The
user shall be able to select via keypad programming which drive faults will result in an
automatic transfer to the bypass mode and which faults require a manual transfer to
bypass. The user may select whether the system shall automatically transfer from drive
to bypass mode on the following drive fault conditions:
a. Over current
b. Over voltage
c. Under voltage
d. Loss of analog input
18. The following operators shall be provided:
a. Bypass Hand -Off -Auto
b. Drive mode selector
c. Bypass mode selector
d. Bypass fault reset
19. The bypass shall include a two line, 20 character LCD display. The display shall allow
the user to access and view:
a. Energy savings — in US dollars
b. Bypass motor amps
c. Bypass input voltage— average and individual phase voltage
d. Bypass power (kW)
e. Bypass faults and fault logs
f. Bypass warnings
g. Bypass operating time (resettable)
h. Bypass energy (kilowatt hours — resettable)
I/O status
j. Parameter settings / programming
k. Printed circuit board temperature
20. The following indicating lights (LED type) or keypad display indications shall be provided.
A test mode or push to test feature shall be provided.
a. Power -on (Ready)
b. Run enable
c. Drive mode selected
d. Bypass mode selected
e. Drive running
f. Bypass running
g. Drive fault
h. Bypass fault
VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 230514 - 10
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
Bypass H -O -A mode
j. Automatic transfer to bypass selected
k. Safety open
I. Damper opening
m. Damper end -switch made
21. The Bypass controller shall have six programmable digital inputs, and five programmable
Form -C relay outputs. This I/O allows for a total System (VFD and Bypass) I/O count of
24 points as standard. The bypass I/O shall be available to the BAS / DDC system even
with the VFD removed.
1. The on -board Form -C relay outputs in the bypass shall programmable for any of
the following indications.
a. System started
b. System running
c. Bypass override enabled
d. Drive fault
e. Bypass fault
f. Bypass H -O -A position
g. Motor proof -of -flow (broken belt)
h. Overload
i. Bypass selected
j. Bypass run
k. System started (damper opening)
I. Bypass alarm
m. Over temperature
22. The bypass shall provide a separate terminal strip for connection of freeze, fire, smoke
contacts, and external start command. All external safety interlocks shall remain fully
functional whether the system is in VFD or Bypass mode. The remote start/stop contact
shall operate in VFD and bypass modes. The terminal strip shall allow for independent
connection of up to four (4) unique safety inputs.
23. Class 10, 20, or 30 (programmable) electronic motor overload protection shall be
included.
K. Enclosures:
1. Provide the VFD and bypass panels with the appropriate NEMA rated enclosure for the
following applications:
a. Indoors: NEMA 1.
b. Indoors (mechanical rooms): NEMA 12.
c. Outdoors (Protected by overhang): NEMA 3R enclosure.
d. Outdoors (exposed to windblown dust or water): NEMA 4
2. Provide appropriate ventilation of VFD cabinetry to maintain ambient temperature rating
of the drive based upon application. On outdoor installations appropriate ventilation shall
be powered ventilation fan(s) and external 12"x12"x1"paper filter arranged so as to not
allow paper filter to be exposed to rain.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Shop, inspect and perform standard productions tests for each controller.
B. Make completed controllers available for inspection at manufacturer's factory prior to packaging
for shipment. Notify the Owner at least seven days before inspection is allowed.
C. Allow witnessing of factory inspections and tests at manufacturer's test facility. Notify the Owner
at least seven days before inspections and tests are scheduled.
VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 230514 - 11
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01300 — Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify that building environment can be maintained within the service and ambient temperature
and humidity ratings required by the VFD manufacturer
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be the responsibility of the mechanical contractor. The contractor shall install
the drive in accordance with the recommendations of the VFD manufacturer as outlined in the
VFD installation manual.
B. Power wiring shall be completed by the electrical contractor, to NEC code 430.122 wiring
requirements based on the VFD input current. Caution: VFDs supplied without internal reactors
have substantially higher input current ratings, which may require larger input power wiring and
branch circuit protection. The contractor shall complete all wiring in accordance with the
recommendations of the VFD manufacturer as outlined in the installation manual.
C. Install in accordance with NEMA ICS 7.1.
D. Verify that mounting surface for VFDs are ready to receive work. Mount VFDs on the wall or at
supports in locations identified on the drawings.
E. Tighten accessible connections and mechanical fasteners after placing controller.
F. Install fuses in fusible switches.
G. Select and install overload heater elements in motor controllers to match installed motor
characteristics.
H. Install engraved plastic nameplates in accordance with Section 23 05 53.
I. Neatly type label inside controller door identifying motor served, nameplate horsepower, full
load amperes, code letter, service factor, and voltage/phase rating. Place label in clear plastic
holder.
J. Ground and bond controller in accordance with Section 26 05 26.
K. Controls installer shall provide all wiring and conduit associated with the control signals into and
out of the VFD to the DDC EMS and as required for any motor control interlocks.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.16 and NEMA ICS 7.1.
C. Perform power quality analysis per warranty requirements.
VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 230514 - 12
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
3.4 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. VFD Start-up: Provide certified factory start-up for each drive by a factory authorized service
center representative. A certified start-up form shall be filled out for each drive with a copy
provided to the Owner, and a copy kept on file at the manufacturer. The following VFD start-up
services are to be provided as a minimum:
1. Service center technician shall be responsible for verifying correct installation, power and
control wiring connections, starting -up the drive, and checking out for proper operation.
2. Service center technician shall also provide all final adjustments to meet the specified
performance requirements.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. Provide 16 hours of instruction to be conducted at the project site with manufacturer's
representative. The training shall be conducted at 4 hour maximums. Contractor to also provide
two sets of VFD operation manuals for use at the training session and then provide to the
Owner after completion of the session.
3.6 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE START-UP SERVICE
A. Provide start-up commissioning of variable frequency drive and optional circuits by factory
certified service technician experienced in start-up and repair services. Commissioning
personnel shall be the same personnel that will provide factory service and warranty repairs at
site. Sales personnel and other agents who are not factory certified technicians for drive field
repair not acceptable.
B. Include checking for verification of proper operation and installation and interface wiring to
building automation system. Include as a minimum:
1. Verify contractor wire terminations to VFD optional circuitry.
2. Verify proper operation and reliability of VFD, motor being driven and building automation
system.
3. Provide up to one hour of Owner/operator training on operation and service diagnostics
during commissioning.
4. Measure to verify proper operation on:
a. Motor voltage and frequency. Verify proper motor operation.
b. Control input for proper building automation system interface and control
calibration.
c. Calibration check for:
d. Minimum speed.
e. Maximum speed.
f. Acceleration and deceleration rates.
g. Adjust as necessary.
C. Configure VSD for automatic restart after a power failure or after an external fault is cleared.
END OF SECTION 230514
VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 230514 - 13
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 230517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Sleeve -seal fittings.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SLEEVE -SEAL FITTINGS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements:
B. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve -type, waterstop assembly made for imbedding in
concrete slab or wall. Unit has plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match
piping OD.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.
Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and
walls are constructed.
1. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes in slabs formed by molded -PE or -PP
sleeves.
2. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or
other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING 230517 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
C. Fire -Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at
pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for
firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.2 SLEEVE -SEAL -FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve -seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.
B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and
walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.
C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.
3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE -SEAL SCHEDULE
A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping -penetration applications:
1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6.
2. Concrete Slabs -on -Grade:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6.
END OF SECTION 230517
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING 230517 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 230519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - ENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Thermowells.
2. Dial -type pressure gages.
3. Gage attachments.
4. Test plugs.
5. Test -plug kits.
6. Insertion Electromagnetic flowmeters.
7. Insertion Electromagnetic, thermal -energy meters.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gage, from manufacturer.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 FILLED -SYSTEM THERMOMETERS
A. Metal -Case, Industrial -Style, Liquid -in -Glass Thermometers:
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Miljoco Corporation.
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
b. Trerice, H. O. Co.
c. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
d. Winters Instruments - U.S.
2. Standard: ASME B40.200.
3. Case: Cast aluminum; 7 -inch nominal size unless otherwise indicated.
4. Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated.
5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid.
6. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings
graduated in deg F.
7. Window: Glass or plastic.
8. Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation.
a. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.
9. Connector: 1-1/4 inches, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.
10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of
1.5 percent of scale range.
2.2 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Direct -Mounted, Metal -Case, Dial -Type Pressure Gages:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Miljoco Corporation.
b. Trerice, H. O. Co.
c. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
d. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
2. Standard: ASME B40.100.
3. Case: Liquid -filled type; cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4 -112 -inch nominal diameter.
4. Pressure -Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated.
5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and bottom -
outlet type unless back -outlet type is indicated.
6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.
7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi.
8. Pointer Black metal.
9. Window: Glass or plastic.
10. Ring: Metal.
11. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.
2.3 GAGE ATTACHMENTS
A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and -type surge -
dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping.
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
2.4 TEST PLUGS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Flow Design, Inc.
2. Miljoco Corporation.
3. Trerice, H. O. Co.
4. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
5. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
B. Description: Test -station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.
C. Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. Include
extended stem on units to be installed in insulated piping.
D. Thread Size: NPS 1/4, ASME 131.20.1 pipe thread.
E. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F .
F. Core Inserts: EPDM self-sealing rubber.
2.5 TEST -PLUG KITS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Flow Design, Inc.
2. Miljoco Corporation.
3. Trerice, H. O. Co.
4. Watts RegulatorCo.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
5. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
B. Furnish one test -plug kit(s) containing one thermometer(s), one pressure gage and adapter, and
carrying case. Thermometer sensing elements, pressure gage, and adapter probes shall be of
diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping.
C. Carrying Case: Metal or plastic, with formed instrument padding.
2.6 FLOWMETERS
A. Insertion Electromagnetic Flow Meters:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. ONICON Incorporated
2. Description: Bi-directional Flowmeter with sensor and indicator.
3. Factory programmed and ready for use upon delivery.
4. Scalable pulse output to totalize forward and reverse flow.
5. Separate pulse output for flow rate.
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
6. Flow Range: Sensor and indicator shall cover operating range of equipment or system
served.
7. Sensor: Inline type; for installing between pipe flanges and measuring flow directly in
gallons per minute.
a. Design: Flow metering for measuring electrically conductive liquids.
b. Wetted metal component: 316 Stainless-steel body, with integral transmitter.
c. Sensing Method: Electromagnetic Sensing
d. Flow Range: 0.1 ft/sec to 20 ft/sec (200:1 turndown)
e. Maximum Pressure Rating: 400 psig.
f. Pressure Drop: Less than 0.1 psi at 12 ft/s velocity in 3" and larger pipes
g. Input Power: 20-28 VDC, 250mA @ 24 VDC
h. Liquid Temperature Range: 15 °F to 250 °F.
Ambient Temperature Range: -20 °F to 150 °F.
j. Minimum Temperature Rating: 500 deg F.
k. Integral Transformer: For low -voltage power operation.
8. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1.0 percent for readings from 2 ft/sec to 20 ft/sec and 0.02
percent for below 2 ft/sec.
9. Operating Instructions: Include complete instructions with each flowmeter.
2.7 THERMAL -ENERGY METERS
A. Insertion Electromagnetic , Thermal -Energy Meters:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. ONICON Incorporated.
2. Description: System with insertion electromagnetic flow sensor, temperature sensors,
transmitter, indicator, and connecting wiring.
3. Flow Sensor: Bi-directional Flowmeter with corrosion -resistant -metal body and
transmitter; for installing in piping.
a. Design: Total thermal -energy measurement.
b. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig.
c. Minimum Temperature Range: 40 to 250 deg F.
4. Temperature Sensors: Insertion -type transducer.
5. Indicator: Solid-state, integrating -type meter; for wall mounting.
a. Data Output: Six -digit electromechanical counter with readout in kilowatts per hour
or British thermal units.
b. Battery Pack: Five-year lithium battery.
6. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent.
7. Display: Visually indicates total fluid volume in gallons and thermal -energy flow in
kilowatts per hour or British thermal units.
8. Strainer: Full size of main line piping.
9. Operating Instructions: Include complete instructions with each thermal -energy meter
system.
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install thermowells with socket extending to center of pipe and in vertical position in piping tees.
B. Install duct -thermometer mounting brackets in walls of ducts. Attach to duct with screws.
C. Install direct -mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the
most readable position.
D. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids (except steam).
E. Install valve and syphon fitting in piping for each pressure gage for steam.
F. Install test plugs in piping tees.
G. Install flow indicators in piping systems in accessible positions for easy viewing.
H. Assemble and install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow -measuring elements
and flowmeters according to manufacturer's written instructions.
I. Install flowmeter elements in accessible positions in piping systems.
J. Install permanent indicators on walls or brackets in accessible and readable positions.
K. Install connection fittings in accessible locations for attachment to portable indicators.
L. Mount thermal -energy meters on wall if accessible; if not, provide brackets to support meters.
M. Install thermometers in the following locations:
1. At the supply and return risers to the building.
N. Install pressure gages in the following locations:
1. Suction and discharge of each pump.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and
maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.
B. Connect flowmeter -system elements to meters.
C. Connect flowmeter transmitters to meters.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. After installation, calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519 - 5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
3.4 PRESSURE -GAGE SCHEDULE
A. Pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump shall be the following:
1. Liquid -filled, direct -mounted, metal case.
2. Test plug with EPDM self-sealing rubber inserts.
3.5 PRESSURE -GAGE SCALE -RANGE SCHEDULE
A. Scale Range for Chilled -Water Piping: 0 to 30 psi.
3.6 FLOWMETER SCHEDULE
A. Flowmeters for Chilled -Water Piping: Insertion Electromagnetic type.
3.7 THERMAL -ENERGY METER SCHEDULE
A. Thermal -Energy Meters for Chilled -Water Piping: Insertion Electromagnetic type.
END OF SECTION 230519
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519 - 6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 230523 - GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Basic Requirements: Provisions of Section 230010, BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
are a part of this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. General: Provide valves, cocks and specialties which are required for piping systems specified
in other sections of these specifications.
Section Includes:
1. Bronze ball valves.
2. Iron, grooved -end ball valves.
3. Iron, single -flange butterfly valves.
4. Iron, grooved -end butterfly valves.
5. Bronze swing check valves.
6. Iron swing check valves.
7. Iron, grooved -end swing -check valves.
8. Flow Balancing Valves
C. Related Sections:
1. Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and
schedules.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CWP: Cold working pressure.
B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.
C. NBR: Acrylonitrile -butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.
D. NRS: Nonrising stem.
E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.
F. RS: Rising stem.
G. SWP: Steam working pressure.
GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1.4 APPLICABLE STANDARDS
A. General: All equipment, material, accessories, methods of construction and reinforcement,
finish quality, workmanship and installation shall be in compliance with Section 230010.
B. Pressure and Temperature Rating: Valves shall have a pressure and temperature rating equal
to or exceeding the piping in which they are installed, except that valves shall be designed for a
minimum steam working pressure (SWP) of 125 psi; water -oil -gas (WOG) pressure of 200 psi.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.
B. General: Include the following data:
1. Manufacturers Literature:
a. Dimensional outline drawing of each valve listed in this section including sizes
available and pressure limitations.
b. Outline drawing of each calibrated balancing and flow measuring valve including
flow and pressure limitations.
c. Outline drawing of each safety and pressure relief valve including discharge
capacity and pressure limitations.
2. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's printed installation instructions for all valves
including copies shipped with the valves.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single
manufacturer.
B. ASME Compliance:
1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.
2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves.
3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.
2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling.
4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.
6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.
B. Use the following precautions during storage:
1. Maintain valve end protection.
GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If
outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.
C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use
handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.
1.8 BASIC VALVE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Valves and cocks may not be indicated in every instance on the drawings, but whether
or not shown, all valves, cocks and check valves necessary for the proper operation of the
system shall be furnished and installed. Valves shall have rising stems except in locations
where space is limited; in these locations non -rising stem valves of equivalent material and
pressure class will be accepted. Valves shall have the manufacturer's name or trademark,
recommended service pressure, and size indicated by raised letters cast on the valve body.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES
A. Refer to HVAC valve schedule articles for applications of valves.
B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system
pressures and temperatures.
C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
D. Valve Actuator Types:
1. Gear Actuator: For quarter -turn valves NPS 8 and larger.
2. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter -turn types.
3. Handlever: For quarter -turn valves NPS 6 and smaller.
4. Chainwheel: Device for attachment to valve handwheel, stem, or other actuator; of size
and with chain for mounting height, as indicated in the "Valve Installation" Article.
E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2 -inch stem extensions and the following features:
1. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non -thermal -conductive material, and
protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or
disturbing insulation.
2. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.
F. Valve -End Connections:
1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves.
2. Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606.
2.2 BRONZE BALL VALVES
A. Two -Piece, Full -Port, Brass Ball Valves with Brass Trim:
GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. American Valve, Inc.
b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
d. Hammond Valve.
e. Lance Valves; a division of Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.
f. Legend Valve.
g. Milwaukee Valve Company.
h. NIBCO INC.
i. Red -White Valve Corporation.
j. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP -110.
b. SWP Rating: 150 psig.
c. CWP Rating: 600 psig.
d. Body Design: Two piece.
e. Body Material: Bronze.
f. Ends: Threaded.
g. Seats: PTFE or TFE.
h. Stern: Bronze.
i. Stern Seals: Double 0 -ring
j. Ball: Chrome -plated brass.
k. Port: Standard.
2.3 IRON, GROOVED -END BALL VALVES
A. Two -Piece, Full -Port, Brass Ball Valves with Brass Trim:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Victaulic
b. Anvil lnternational
c. Gustin-Bacon
2. Description:
a. SWP Rating: 800 psi.
b. Body Design: Two piece, Standard Port.
c. Body Material: Ductile Iron conforming to ASTM A-536, painted black enamel.
d. Ends: Ductile Iron conforming to ASTM A-536, painted black enamel.
e. Seats: TFE.
f. Stem: Micro -finished Steel.
g. Ball: Micro -finished Nickel -Plated Carbon Steel.
h. Port: Standard.
2.4 IRON BALL VALVES
A. Class 125, Iron Ball Valves:
GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. American Valve, Inc.
b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.
c. Kitz Corporation.
d. Sure Flow Equipment Inc.
e. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP -72.
b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa).
c. Body Design: Split body.
d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron.
e. Ends: Flanged.
f. Seats: PTFE or TFE.
g. Stem: Stainless steel.
h. Ball: Stainless steel.
i. Port: Full.
2.5 IRON, SINGLE -FLANGE BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. 150 CWP, Iron, Single -Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Aluminum -Bronze Disc:
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. ABZ Valve and Controls; a division of ABZ Manufacturing, Inc.
b. Bray Controls; a division of Bray International.
c. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.
d. Cooper Cameron Valves; a division of Cooper Cameron Corp.
e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
f. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
g. DeZurik Water Controls.
h. Hammond Valve.
Kitz Corporation.
j. Milwaukee Valve Company.
k. NIBCO INC.
I. Norriseal; a Dover Corporation company.
m. Red -White Valve Corporation.
n. Spence Strainers International; a division of CIRCOR International.
o. Tyco Valves & Controls; a unit of Tyco Flow Control.
p. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP -67, Type I.
b. CWP Rating: 150 psig.
c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated
pressure without use of downstream flange.
d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron.
e. Seat: EPDM.
f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel.
GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 - 5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
g
Disc: Aluminum bronze.
2.6 IRON, GROOVED -END BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. 175 CWP, Iron, Grooved -End Butterfly Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.
b. Shurjoint Piping Products.
c. Tyco Fire Products LP; Grinnell Mechanical Products.
d. Victaulic Company.
e. Gustin-Bacon.
f. Anvil International
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP -67, Type I.
b. CWP Rating: 175 psig.
c. Body Material: Coated, ductile iron.
d. Stem: Two-piece stainless steel.
e. Disc: Coated, ductile iron.
f. Seal: EPDM.
2.7 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES
A. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. American Valve, Inc.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
e. Hammond Valve.
f. Kitz Corporation.
g. Milwaukee Valve Company.
h. NIBCO INC.
i. Powell Valves.
j. Red -White Valve Corporation.
k. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
I. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP -80, Type 3.
b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa).
c. Body Design: Horizontal flow.
d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze.
e. Ends: Threaded.
f. Disc: Bronze.
GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 - 6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
B. Class 150, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. American Valve, Inc.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
e. Kitz Corporation.
f. Milwaukee Valve Company.
g. NIBCO INC.
h. Red -White Valve Corporation.
Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP -80, Type 3.
b. CWP Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa).
c. Body Design: Horizontal flow.
d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze.
e. Ends: Threaded.
f. Disc: Bronze.
2.8 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES
A. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
d. Hammond Valve.
e. Kitz Corporation.
f. Legend Valve.
g. Milwaukee Valve Company.
h. NIBCO INC.
Powell Valves.
j. Red -White Valve Corporation.
k. Sure Flow Equipment Inc.
I. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
m. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.
Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP -71, Type I.
b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12 (DN 65 to DN 300), CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa).
c. NPS 14 to NPS 24 (DN 350 to DN 600), CWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa).
d. Body Design: Clear or full waterway.
e. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.
f. Ends: Flanged.
g. Trim: Bronze.
GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 - 7
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
h. Gasket: Asbestos free.
B. Class 250, Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
d. Hammond Valve.
e. Milwaukee Valve Company.
f. NIBCO INC.
g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP -71, Type I.
b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12 (DN 65 to DN 300), CWP Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa).
c. NPS 14 to NPS 24 (DN 350 to DN 600), CWP Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa).
d. Body Design: Clear or full waterway.
e. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.
f. Ends: Flanged.
g. Trim: Bronze.
h. Gasket: Asbestos free.
2.9 IRON, GROOVED -END SWING CHECK VALVES
A. 300 CWP, Iron, Grooved -End Swing Check Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Anvil International, Inc.
b. Shurjoint Piping Products.
c. Tyco Fire Products LP; Grinnell Mechanical Products.
d. Victaulic Company.
2. Description:
a. CWP Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa).
b. Body Material: ASTM A 536, ductile iron.
c. Seal: EPDM.
d. Disc: Spring operated, ductile iron or stainless steel.
2.10 FLOW BALANCING VALVES
A. Automatic Flow Control Valve: Provide automatic flow control valves with variable openings
which respond to pressure, factory set to control the water flow over an operating pressure
differential at least 10 times the minimum required for full flow conditions. Valves shall be
tamper proof when installed, and shall have body pressure tappings with a set of pressure and
temperature test ports. Valves shall have flanged or grooved ends or a union either integral or
directly adjacent to permit replacement of the control element. The automatic flow controls shall
GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 - 8
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
be selected for the project by the manufacturer to provide flow rates matching the equipment
requirements, including any increased or decreased flow rates that are indicated. The control
range pressure differential shall not exceed 3 to 40 psi.
B. Manufacturer:
1. Autoflow, Inc.
2. Griswold
3. Approved substitution
C. Calibration Meter: Provide one portable differential pressure gauge calibration meter kit of
same manufacturer as valves. Kit shall be housed in a hand -carrying case and shall contain all
devices required, including pressure gauges, 5 foot meter hoses with disconnect ends, positive
shutoff valves, operating instructions, and flow versus pressure drop curves, to enable testing
and balancing of each size and type of balancing valve installed.
2.11 CHAINWHEELS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Babbitt Steam Specialty Co.
2. Roto Hammer Industries.
3. Trumbull Industries.
B. Description: Valve actuation assembly with sprocket rim, brackets, and chain.
1. Brackets: Type, number, size, and fasteners required to mount actuator on valve.
2. Attachment: For connection to butterfly valve stems.
3. Sprocket Rim with Chain Guides: Ductile or cast iron, of type and size required for valve.
4. Chain: Hot -dip, galvanized steel, of size required to fit sprocket rim.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove
special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and
handling.
B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made
accessible by such operations.
C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper
size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is
suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.
Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 - 9
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
E. Install chainwheels on operators for butterfly valves NPS 4 and larger and more than 96 inches
above floor. Extend chains to 60 inches above finished floor.
F. Install isolation/shutoff valve at all main risers and main branch takeoffs, to permit isolation of
piping sections for drainage.
G. Install isolation/shutoff valves on each inlet and outlet of each piece of equipment to which
water is piped to allow isolation, venting and drainage. Provide a flange, union, or groove
between the valve and the equipment to permit disconnection, removal and service.
H. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:
1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.
2. Y -pattern horizontal swing check valves shall be used in vertical lines.
3. Horizontal swing check valves shall be used with ball valves;
4. Wafer check valves shall be used with butterfly valves.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but
before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.
3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:
1. Shutoff Service: Ball, or butterfly valves.
2. Butterfly Valve Dead -End Service: Single -flange (lug) type.
3. Throttling Service: Ball or butterfly valves,
B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves
with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.
C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:
1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder -joint valve -
end option is indicated in valve schedules below.
2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve -end
option is indicated in valve schedules below.
3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.
4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends.
GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 - 10
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve -end
option is indicated in valve schedules below.
6. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.
7. For Grooved -End Copper Tubing and Steel Piping except Steam and Steam Condensate
Piping: Valve ends may be grooved.
3.5 CHILLED -WATER VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:
1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder -joint ends instead of threaded ends.
2. Ball Valves: Two piece, standard port, bronze with bronze trim.
3. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.
B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger
1. Iron Ball Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 10 (DN 65 to DN 250): Class 150.
2. Iron, Single -Flange Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: 200 CWP, EPDM seat,
aluminum -bronze disc.
3. Iron, Grooved -End Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: 175 CWP.
4. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, metal seats.
5. Iron, Grooved -End Check Valves, NPS 3 to NPS 12: 300 CWP.
3.6 HEATING -WATER VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:
1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder -joint ends instead of threaded ends.
2. Ball Valves: Two piece, standard port, bronze with bronze trim.
3. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.
B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:
1. Iron Ball Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 10 (DN 65 to DN 250): Class 150.
2. Iron, Single -Flange Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: 200 CWP, EPDM seat,
aluminum -bronze disc.
3. Iron, Grooved -End Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: 175 CWP.
4. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, metal seats.
5. Iron, Grooved -End Check Valves, NPS 3 to NPS 12: 300 CWP.
3.7 FLOW BALANCING VALVES
A. Location: Provide flow balancing valves where indicated. The exact location shall be
determined using field measurements relating to the specific piping arrangement and the
manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Manufacturer' Recommendation: Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations
including valve orientation and increases or decreases in pipe size at points of installation,
together with minimum recommended lengths of straight pipe before and after points of
installation.
GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 - 11
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
C. Calibration Meter: At the conclusion of the system test and balance and prior to final completion
the meter shall be turned over to, and shall become the property of, the Owner.
3.8 DRAIN VALVES
A. Location: Install drain valves at the base of all water piping risers (both supply and return) and
at all low points in the piping system. Drain valves shall be fitted with schedule 80 hose
connection end with cap unless otherwise indicated.
END OF SECTION 230523
GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 - 12
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.
2. Fastener systems.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for structural -steel shapes and plates for trapeze
hangers for pipe and equipment supports.
2. Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC" for vibration isolation devices.
3. Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand
the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according
to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting
combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of
supported equipment and connected systems and components.
3. Design seismic -restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to
AWS DI.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code- Steel."
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Carbon -Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Description: MSS SP -58, Types 1 through 58, factory -fabricated components.
2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.
3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to
support bearing surface of piping.
5. Hanger Rods: Continuous -thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.
2.2 FASTENER SYSTEMS
A. Mechanical -Expansion Anchors: Insert -wedge -type, zinc -coated steel anchors, for use in
hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon -steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and
galvanized.
Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory -mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic -cement, nonshrink and
nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
2. Design Mix: 5000 -psi , 28 -day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Metal Pipe -Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP -69 and MSS SP -89. Install hangers,
supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building
structure.
B. Fastener System Installation:
Install mechanical -expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,
washers, and other accessories.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
D. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of
expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
E. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
F. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses
from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
G. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed
maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME 831.9 for building services piping.
H. Insulated Piping:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal -hanger shield
insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services
piping.
2. Install MSS SP -58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
a. Option: Thermal -hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight -
distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
3. Install MSS SP -58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields
shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
a. Option: Thermal -hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight -
distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 : 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
b. NPS 4 : 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
5. Thermal -Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
3.2 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be
shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding;
appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the
following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so
contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
B. Trim excess length of continuous -thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.
3.4 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop
painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field -painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils .
B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas
of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting"
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing -repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE
A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and
equipment.
B. Comply with MSS SP -69 for pipe -hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.
C. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in
direct contact with copper tubing.
D. Use carbon -steel pipe hangers and supports and attachments for general service applications.
E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
F. Horizontal -Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or
insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 .
G. Vertical -Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to
NPS 24 .
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
H. Hanger -Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
Use mechanical -expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete
construction.
END OF SECTION 230529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 230548 - VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Isolation pads.
2. Isolation mounts.
3. Spring isolators.
4. Duct silencers.
5. Acoustic housings.
6. Ductwork lagging.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ICC -ES: ICC -Evaluation Service.
B. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development for the State of California.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.:
1. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans.
American National Standards Institute:
1. ANSI S1.4 - Sound Level Meters.
2. ANSI S1.8 - Reference Quantities for Acoustical Levels.
3. ANSI S1.13 - Methods for the Measurement of Sound Pressure Levels in Air.
4. ANSI S12.36 - Survey Methods for the Determination of Sound Power Levels of Noise
Sources.
C. Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute:
1. ARI 575 - Method of Measuring Machinery Sound within Equipment Space.
D. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers:
1. ASHRAE 68 - Laboratory Method of Testing In -Duct Sound Power Measurement Proce-
dure for Fans.
2. ASHRAE Handbook - 2007 HVAC Applications Chapter 47.
E. ASTM International:
1. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound
Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements.
VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
2. ASTM E477 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Acoustical and Airflow Performance
of Duct Liner Materials and Prefabricated Silencers.
3. ASTM E596 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of the Noise Reduction
of Sound -Isolating Enclosures.
F. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association:
1. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible.
2. SMACNA - Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Wind -Restraint Loading:
1. Basic Wind Speed: 110 mph.
2. Building Classification Category: I.
3. Minimum 10 Ib/sq. ft. multiplied by the maximum area of the HVAC component projected
on a vertical plane that is normal to the wind direction, and 45 degrees either side of
normal.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation
device.
2. Interlocking Snubbers: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.
3. Acoustical Silencers.
B. Delegated -Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic -restraint details indicated to
comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and
operation, wind forces required to select vibration isolators, wind restraints, and for
designing vibration isolation bases.
a. Coordinate design calculations with wind load calculations required for equipment
mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Division 23 Sections for
equipment mounted outdoors.
C. If the standard sizes of silencers offered by the silencer manufacturer or vendor do not provide
attenuation equal to or greater than the specified insertion loss in each octave band 1 through 6,
then at the time of bidding the manufacturer/vendor making the submission shall note all such
discrepancies and provide alternative proposals and pricing to make up the discrepancies. The
controlling requirements are the insertion loss, pressure drop and self -noise.
D. Welding certificates.
E. Sheet Metal: Coordinated shop drawings shall be submitted for review and approval to indicate
the following:
1. Length, width, height, and elevation of bottom of each duct segment.
2. Sheet metal gauge
VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
3. Location of duct silencers, fire dampers, and balancing dampers.
F. Air moving devices for classrooms (AHU's): Submit sound power levels in octave bands from
63 Hz through 8000 Hz inclusive for the operating conditions specified. Data shall be obtained
in accordance with AMCA 300-85. If fans are variable speed, provide sound power level data
for maximum rpm and also at 80% and 60% of maximum rpm. Provide discharge, inlet and
case -radiated sound power data for all fans.
1. Submit for each fan a performance curve showing the operating point for which the
acoustical data has been provided.
G. Silencers: Submit test data from an independent laboratory showing the insertion loss and
air -flow -regenerated noise of the specified silencers in octave bands from 63 Hz to 8000 Hz,
measured in accordance with ASTM E477-73. Pressure drop ratings shall be measured for the
same silencer tested for acoustical performance; the data shall be submitted with the acoustical
performance data. The insertion loss of the silencers shall be measured and reported in octave
band or 1/3 octave bands.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding
Code - Steel."
B. Wind Restraint devices shall comply with the wind rating as specified within this section.
Restraint devices shall be suitable for the specific application and have a Florida structural
engineering seal for compliance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.
2. Kinetics Noise Control.
3. Mason Industries.
Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad
area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized -steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes
that match requirements of supported equipment.
1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.
C. Mounts: Double -deflection type, with molded, oil -resistant rubber, hermetically sealed
compressed fiberglass, or neoprene isolator elements with factory -drilled, encapsulated top
plate for bolting to equipment and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color -code or
otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.
1. Materials: Cast -ductile -iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and
opposing, oil -resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded
element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.
VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
2. Neoprene: Shock -absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge -
bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.
D. Spring Hangers with Vertical -Limit Stop: Combination coil -spring and elastomeric-insert hanger
with spring and insert in compression and with a vertical -limit stop.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a
maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger -rod misalignment without binding or reducing
isolation efficiency.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil -resistant rubber or neoprene.
7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up -stop" on lower
threaded rod.
8. Self -centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support
spring coil.
2.2 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory -assembled and -tested equipment
before shipping.
1. Powder coating on springs and housings.
2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot -dip galvanize metal components for exterior use.
3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use.
4. Color -code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and wind -control devices to indicate
capacity range.
2.3 DUCT SILENCERS
A. All prefabricated duct silencers shall be furnished by a single manufacturer with a minimum five
years experience. The following manufacturers are pre -approved based on the quality of their
products. The Acoustics Consultant and Architect must approve any alternates. All provided
equipment must be in compliance with the specified design and performance requirements:
1. Industrial Acoustics Company, Bronx, New York
2. Vibro-Acoustics, Scarborough, Ontario
3. AeroAcoustic Corporation, Roselle, New Jersey
4. Pre -Approved Alternate Manufacturer Prior to Bid
B. Rectangular duct silencers shall have outer casings of not less than 22 -gauge galvanized steel.
Seams shall be lock formed and mastic filled. The internal baffles (splitters) shall be not less
than 24 -gauge galvanized perforated steel having an open area of about 30%. The nosings
shall be full radius or airfoil shape.
C. The sound absorbing media shall be not less than 4.5 pcf glass/mineral fiber packed under 5%
compression. The fiber fill shall be incombustible, mildew resistant and vermin proof. The
sound absorbing material shall be protected from erosion.
VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
D. If the silencer is supplied in modular sections, the silencer shall meet or exceed the specification
for single -module silencers with respect to insertion loss, pressure drop, regenerated noise and
air leakage.
E. Rating:
1. ASTM E477 Minimum Required Insertion Loss and Maximum Allowable Generated Noise
at 1000 fpm (7 m/sec). See schedules on Drawings.
2. Static Pressure Drop: see schedules on Drawings.
3. Air Tight Static Pressure: 10 inches wg (2.5 kPa).
F. Performance: Achieve insertion loss self generated noise, and static pressure drop for cfm flow
required per schedules on Drawings.
2.4 DUCTWORK LAGGING
A. Acoustic Insulation: 2 inch thick, 3 to 5 Ib/cu ft density glass fiber or mineral wool insulation.
B. Covering: Sheet lead with surface weight minimum 4 Ib/sq ft.
C. Provide Duct lagging from sound attenuator location within mechanical room to mechanical
room wall to prevent break-in noise.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and wind -control devices for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance.
B. Examine roughing -in of reinforcement and cast -in-place anchors to verify actual locations before
installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLICATIONS
A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application
by an evaluation service member of ICC -ES.
B. Strength of Support and Seismic -Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of
components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads
within specified loading limits.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548 - 5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to
restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at
least seven days' advance notice.
3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary
load -spreading members.
4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by
Architect.
5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.
6. Measure isolator restraint clearance.
7. Measure isolator deflection.
8. Verify snubber minimum clearances.
9. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory
results are achieved.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.
B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height.
After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during
normal operation.
C. Adjust active height of spring isolators.
D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.
3.5 HVAC VIBRATION -CONTROL RESTRAINT DEVICE SCHEDULE
A. Supported or Suspended Equipment:
1. Air Handling Unit Vibration Pads:
a. Material: Neoprene.
b. Thickness: 3/4 inches.
c. Provide Full sheet of Neoprene Under Base Rail of Units.
END OF SECTION 230548
VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548 - 6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Equipment labels.
2. Warning signs and labels.
3. Pipe labels.
4. Duct labels.
5. Stencils.
6. Valve tags.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Valve numbering scheme.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of
surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Metal Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: Aluminum, 0.032 -inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled
or stamped holes for attachment hardware.
2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than
2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.
3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24
inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the
size of principal lettering.
4. Adhesive: Contact -type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number,
Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the
Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.
C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8 -1/2 -by -11 -inch
bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where
equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number
and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and
maintenance data.
2.2 CEILING GRID TAGS FOR EQUIPMENT LOCATED ABOVE HARD OR LAY -IN CEILING
A. Description: 3/4" x 3" vinyl label, 3.0 Mil self adhesive vinyl similar to DuraLabel Pro. Label color
shall be black text on a white background. The label shall contain the following information:
1. Equipment name: Per Scheduled Equipment Naming convention.
B. All scheduled equipment above finish hard or lay -in ceiling shall be identified with an Equipment
Tag.
2.3 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch
thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
B. Letter Color: Red.
C. Background Color: White.
D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F
E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2
by 3/4 inch.
F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches , 1/2
inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches , and proportionately larger lettering for greater
viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal
lettering.
G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets.
H. Adhesive: Contact -type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification
instructions.
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
2.4 PIPE LABELS
A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color -coded, with lettering
indicating service, and showing flow direction.
Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of
pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
C. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow -Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both
directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches.
2.5 DUCT LABELS
A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch
thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
B. Letter Color: Black.
C. Background Color White.
D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2
by 3/4 inch.
F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2
inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater
viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal
lettering.
G. Adhesive: Contact -type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
H. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, duct size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow -Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both
directions, or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches.
2.6 VALVE TAGS
A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4 -inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2 -
inch numbers.
1. Tag Material: Aluminum, 0.032 -inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or
stamped holes for attachment hardware.
2. Fasteners: Brass wire -link or beaded chain; or S -hook.
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8 -1/2 -by -11 -inch bond paper. Tabulate valve
number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or
space), normal -operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification.
Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
1. Valve -tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification
devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and
encapsulants.
3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
C. All mechanical equipment, located above the ceiling and requiring maintenance or accessibility,
shall be labeled on the ceiling or ceiling grid, directly below the indicated equipment.
1. Provide ceiling grid tags to locate scheduled equipment above T -bar type panel
ceilings. Locate in corner of grid closest to equipment.
2. Provide ceiling tags to locate scheduled equipment above access panels in hard
ceilings. Locate in corner of access panel closest to equipment.
3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
Piping Color -Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 9 Section "Interior Painting."
B. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces;
machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and
exterior exposed locations as follows:
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in
areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.
C. Pipe Label Color Schedule:
Chilled -Water Piping:
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
a. Background Color: White.
b. Letter Color: Blue.
2. Refrigerant Piping:
a. Background Color: Black.
b. Letter Color: White.
3.4 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install plastic -laminated duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color
codes:
1. Blue: For cold -air supply ducts.
2. Yellow: For hot-air supply ducts.
3. Green: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed -air ducts.
B. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of
50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.
3.5 VALVE -TAG INSTALLATION
A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within
factory -fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn -watering
hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing -in connections of end-use
fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.
Valve -Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and
with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:
1. Valve -Tag Size and Shape:
a. Chilled Water: 2 inches, square.
2. Valve -Tag Color:
a. Chilled Water: Natural.
3. Letter Color:
a. Chilled Water: Black.
END OF SECTION 230553
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Balancing Air Systems:
a. Constant -volume air systems.
b. Variable -air -volume systems.
c. General exhaust systems.
d. Outside Air/Stale Exhaust systems.
2. Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems:
a. Variable -flow hydronic systems.
1) Systems installed with pressure independent control valves shall not require
hydronic system balancing. Flow shall be verified and adjusted for the
pressure independent valve assembly for field conditions using the pressure
independent control valve manufacturer's documented procedure for 25% of
the total installed product. Exact locations of tested product to be
coordinated with the commissioning agent.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.
E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. LEED Submittal:
1. Air -Balance Report for LEED Prerequisite EQ 1: Documentation of work performed for
ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 7.2.2, "Air Balancing."
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
B. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation
that the TAB contractor and this Projects TAB team members meet the qualifications specified
in "Quality Assurance" Article.
C. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed,
submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.
D. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB
strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.
E. Certified TAB reports.
F. Sample report forms.
G. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:
1. Instrument type and make.
2. Serial number.
3. Application.
4. Dates of use.
5. Dates of calibration.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC, NEBB or TABB.
1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC, NEBB or
TABB.
2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC, NEBB
or TABB as a TAB technician.
B. TAB Conference: Meet with Architect, Owner Representative, General Contractor, Engineer
and Commissioning Authority on approval of the TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop
a mutual understanding of the details. Require the participation of the TAB field supervisor and
technicians. Provide seven days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.
1. Agenda Items:
a. The Contract Documents examination report.
b. The TAB plan.
c. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.
d. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.
C. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB
reports.
2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures
specified and referenced in this Specification.
D. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Commissioning
Authority.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER
E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy,
Section 5, "Instrumentation."
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
JULY 25, 2014
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111,
A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB
period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's
operations.
B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial
Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's
operations.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and
times.
B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been
satisfactorily completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer
wells, flow -control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify
that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.
C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.
D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions
for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and
assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
E. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to
verify that they meet the leakage class of connected ducts as specified in Division 23 Section
"Metal Ducts" and are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in
plenum walls are sealed and fire -stopped if required.
F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.
1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects
that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all
or part of a system.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
2. Calculate system -effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when
installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment
performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in
AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design."
Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.
G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality -control testing,
cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.
H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.
I. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned
and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
J. Examine terminal units, such as variable -air -volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible
and their controls are connected and functioning.
K. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with
indicated perforations.
L. Examine heat -transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
M. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.
N. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.
O. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe
and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from
indicated values.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
B. Complete system -readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:
1. Permanent electrical -power wiring is complete.
2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
3. Automatic temperature -control systems are operational.
4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
5. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
6. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air -pattern adjustments are required and
access to balancing devices is provided.
7. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be
met.
3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
contained in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance", ASHRAE 111, NEBB's
"Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems", and
SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and in this Section.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 7.2.2, "Air Balancing."
B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.
1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness
as used to construct ducts.
2. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with
requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."
3. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation,
coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation."
C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper -control positions, valve position
indicators, fan -speed -control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other
suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.
D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch -pound (IP) units.
3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with
required fan volumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as -built" duct layouts.
C. For variable -air -volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct -airflow measurements.
E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor -air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust -
air dampers through the supply -fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F. Locate start -stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
I. Check for airflow blockages.
J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
K. Check for proper sealing of air -handling -unit components.
L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts."
3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT -VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by
fan manufacturer.
1. Measure total airflow.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
a. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot -tube traverse
measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the
total airflow.
2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure:
a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and
upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
C. Measure inlet static pressure of single -inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as
possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct
restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double -inlet fans through the wall of the plenum
that houses the fan.
3. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air -handling unit,
rooftop unit, and other air -handling and -treating equipment.
a. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured.
4. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heat -
recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.
5. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus
actual static pressures. Calculate actual system -effect factors. Recommend adjustments
to accommodate actual conditions.
6. Obtain approval from Engineer and Commissioning Authority for adjustment of fan speed
higher or lower than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Sections
for air -handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated
air -handling -unit performance.
7. Do not make fan -speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan -speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan -
motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full -cooling,
full -heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum
required brake horsepower.
B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated
airflows within specified tolerances.
1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.
a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot -tube
traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and
calculate the total airflow for that zone.
2. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust
volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
3. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to
adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
C. Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
Measure terminal outlets using a direct -reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written
instructions and calculating factors.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
D. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of
indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and
the dampers at air terminals.
1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated
quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the
Contract Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
3.6 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE -AIR -VOLUME SYSTEMS
A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the
indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a minimum set -point
airflow with the remainder at maximum -airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal
units equals the indicated airflow of the fan. Select the reduced -airflow terminal units so they
are distributed evenly among the branch ducts.
B. Pressure -Independent, Variable -Air -Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been
adjusted, adjust the variable -air -volume systems as follows:
1. Set outdoor -air dampers at minimum, and set return- and exhaust -air dampers at a
position that simulates full -cooling load.
2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply -fan airflow and static pressure.
Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure
for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal -unit manufacturer's
recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome
terminal -unit discharge system losses.
3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow.
4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the
designed maximum airflow. Use terminal -unit manufacturer's written instructions to make
this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from
terminal units the same as described for constant -volume air systems.
5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the
designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow the
same as described for constant -volume air systems.
a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave
outlets balanced for maximum airflow.
6. Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and
minimum outdoor airflow.
Adjust the fan and balance the return -air ducts and inlets the same as described
for constant -volume air systems.
7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static -pressure
controller at the main supply -air sensing station to ensure that adequate static pressure is
maintained at the most critical unit.
8. Record final fan -performance data.
C. Pressure -Dependent, Variable -Air -Volume Systems with Diversity: After the fan systems have
been adjusted, adjust the variable -air -volume systems as follows:
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 7
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1. Set system at maximum indicated airflow by setting the required number of terminal units
at minimum airflow. Select the reduced -airflow terminal units so they are distributed
evenly among the branch ducts.
2. Adjust supply fan to maximum indicated airflow with the variable -airflow controller set at
maximum airflow.
3. Set terminal units at full -airflow condition.
4. Adjust terminal units starting at the supply -fan end of the system and continuing
progressively to the end of the system. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to
indicated airflow. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from
terminal units the same as described for constant -volume air systems.
5. Adjust terminal units for minimum airflow.
6. Measure static pressure at the sensor.
7. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and
minimum outdoor airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return -air ducts and inlets the
same as described for constant -volume air systems.
3.7 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at pump to
end of system. Check the sum of branch -circuit flows against the approved pump flow rate.
Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as -built" piping layouts
C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the
general preparation procedures specified above:
1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow.
2. Check flow -control valves for specified sequence of operation, and set at indicated flow.
3. Set differential -pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at
fully closed position when pump is positive -displacement type unless several terminal
valves are kept open.
4. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to district loop.
5. Check pump -motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow -balancing device so
motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.
6. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.
3.8 PROCEDURE FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A. Systems installed with pressure independent control valves shall not require hydronic system
balancing. Flow shall be verified and adjusted for the pressure independent valve assembly for
field conditions using the pressure independent control valve manufacturer's documented
procedure for 25% of the total installed product. Exact locations of tested product to be
coordinated with the commissioning agent.
3.9 PROCEDURES FOR CHILLERS
A. Balance water flow through each evaporator and condenser to within specified tolerances of
indicated flow with all pumps operating. With only one chiller operating in a multiple chiller
installation, do not exceed the flow for the maximum tube velocity recommended by the chiller
manufacturer. Measure and record the following data with each chiller operating at design
conditions:
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 8
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1. Evaporator -water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure drop, and water flow.
2. For water-cooled chillers, condenser -water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure
drop, and water flow.
3. Evaporator and condenser refrigerant temperatures and pressures, using instruments
furnished by chiller manufacturer.
4. Power factor if factory -installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatts.
5. Kilowatt input if factory -installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatts.
6. Capacity: Calculate in tons of cooling.
7. For air-cooled chillers, verify condenser -fan rotation and record fan and motor data
including number of fans and entering- and leaving -air temperatures.
3.10 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.
2. Motor horsepower rating.
3. Motor rpm.
4. Efficiency rating.
5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter thermal -protection -element rating.
B. Motors Driven by Variable -Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying
from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper operation.
Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number, serial number,
and nameplate data.
3.11 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT -TRANSFER COILS
A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each water coil:
1. Entering- and leaving -water temperature.
2. Water flow rate.
3. Water pressure drop.
4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
5. Wet -bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils.
6. Airflow.
7. Air pressure drop.
B. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each electric heating coil:
1. Nameplate data.
2. Airflow.
3. Entering- and leaving -air temperature at full load.
4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each incremental stage.
5. Calculated kilowatt at full load.
6. Fuse or circuit -breaker rating for overload protection.
3.12 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 9
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent.
2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent.
3. Cooling -Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.
3.13 REPORTING
A. Initial Construction -Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as
specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems'
balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to
facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to
HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and
balancing devices.
B. Status Reports: Prepare monthly progress reports to describe completed procedures,
procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems
found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and
each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.
3.14 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections
for tested systems and balanced systems.
1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the
certified testing and balancing engineer.
2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field -report data, include the following:
1. Pump curves.
2. Fan curves.
3. Manufacturers' test data.
4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and
product data.
C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of the TAB contractor.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Architect's name and address.
6. Engineer's name and address.
7. Contractor's name and address.
8. Report date.
9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.
10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.
Number each page in the report.
11. Summary of contents including the following:
a. Indicated versus final performance.
b. Notable characteristics of systems.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 10
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
Documents.
12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.
14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.
15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:
a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust -air dampers.
b. Conditions of filters.
C. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
f. Inlet vane settings for variable -air -volume systems.
g. Settings for supply -air, static -pressure controller.
h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present
each system with single -line diagram and include the following:
1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
2. Water and steam flow rates.
3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
5. Terminal units.
6. Balancing stations.
7. Position of balancing devices.
Air -Handling -Unit Test Reports: For air -handling units with coils, include the following:
1. Unit Data:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Unit arrangement and class.
g. Discharge arrangement.
h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
i. Center -to -center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches .
j. Number, make, and size of belts.
k. Number, type, and size of filters.
2. Motor Data:
a. Motor make, and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full -load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
f. Center -to -center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.
3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 11
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
a. Total air flow rate in cfm.
b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
e. Filter static -pressure differential in inches wg.
f. Cooling -coil static -pressure differential in inches wg.
g. Heating -coil static -pressure differential in inches wg.
h. Outdoor airflow in cfm.
Return airflow in cfm.
j. Outdoor -air damper position.
k. Return -air damper position.
Vortex damper position.
F. Apparatus -Coil Test Reports:
1. Coil Data:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Coil type.
d. Number of rows.
e. Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c.
f. Make and model number.
g. Face area in sq. ft.
h. Tube size in NPS.
i. Tube and fin materials.
j. Circuiting arrangement.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Air flow rate in cfm.
b. Average face velocity in fpm.
c. Air pressure drop in inches wg.
d. Outdoor -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
e. Return -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
f. Entering -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
g. Leaving -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
h. Water flow rate in gpm.
Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.
j. Entering -water temperature in deg F.
k. Leaving -water temperature in deg F.
G. Electric -Coil Test Reports: For electric furnaces, duct coils, and electric coils installed in
central -station air -handling units, include the following:
1. Unit Data:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Coil identification.
d. Capacity in Btu/h.
e. Number of stages.
f. Connected volts, phase, and hertz.
g. Rated amperage.
h. Air flow rate in cfm.
i. Face area in sq. ft.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 12
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
J.
Minimum face velocity in fpm.
2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Heat output in Btu/h.
b. Air flow rate in cfm.
c. Air velocity in fpm.
d. Entering -air temperature in deg F.
e. Leaving -air temperature in deg F.
f. Voltage at each connection.
g. Amperage for each phase.
H. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
1. Fan Data:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Arrangement and class.
g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
h. Center -to -center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.
2. Motor Data:
a. Motor make, and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full -load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
f. Center -to -center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.
g. Number, make, and size of belts.
3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Total airflow rate in cfm.
b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
e. Suction static pressure in inches wg.
Round and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the
duct cross-section and record the following:
Report Data:
a. System and air -handling -unit number.
b. Location and zone.
c. Traverse air temperature in deg F.
d. Duct static pressure in inches wg.
e. Duct size in inches.
f. Duct area in sq. ft.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 13
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
g. Indicated air flow rate in cfm.
h. Indicated velocity in fpm.
Actual air flow rate in cfm.
j. Actual average velocity in fpm.
k. Barometric pressure in psig.
J. Air -Terminal -Device Reports:
1. Unit Data:
a. System and air -handling unit identification.
b. Location and zone.
c. Apparatus used for test.
d. Area served.
e. Make.
f. Number from system diagram.
g. Type and model number.
h. Size.
i. Effective area in sq. ft.
2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Air flow rate in cfm.
b. Air velocity in fpm.
c. Preliminary air flow rate as needed in cfm.
d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm.
e. Final air flow rate in cfm.
f. Final velocity in fpm.
g. Space temperature in deg F.
K. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and
include the following:
1. Unit Data:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Service.
d. Make and size.
e. Model number and serial number.
f. Water flow rate in gpm.
g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.
h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig.
Pump rpm.
j. Impeller diameter in inches.
k. Motor make and frame size.
I. Motor horsepower and rpm.
m. Voltage at each connection.
n. Amperage for each phase.
o. Full -load amperage and service factor.
p. Seal type.
2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 14
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
a. Static head in feet of head or psig.
b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig.
c. Actual impeller size in inches.
d. Full -open flow rate in gpm.
e. Full -open pressure in feet of head or psig.
f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig.
g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig.
h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig.
i. Final water flow rate in gpm.
j. Voltage at each connection.
k. Amperage for each phase.
L. Instrument Calibration Reports:
1. Report Data:
a. Instrument type and make.
b. Serial number.
c. Application.
d. Dates of use.
e. Dates of calibration.
3.15 INSPECTIONS
A. Initial Inspection:
1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check
measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and
balance readings documented in the final report.
2. Check the following for each system:
a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets.
b. Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals.
c. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the
reading to the set point.
d. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position.
e. Note deviations from the Contract Documents in the final report.
B. Final Inspection:
1. After initial inspection is complete and documentation by random checks verifies that
testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report,
request that a final inspection be made by Commissioning Authority.
2. The TAB contractor's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the
presence of Commissioning Authority.
3. Commissioning Authority shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final
report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total
measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a
normal 8 -hour business day.
4. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the
final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as
"FAILED."
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 15
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total
measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be
considered incomplete and shall be rejected.
C. TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If TAB Work fails,
proceed as follows:
1. Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing
device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final
inspection.
2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB
contractor to complete TAB Work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the
cost of the services from the original TAB contractor's final payment.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.16 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are
being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.
B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near -peak summer and
winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near -peak summer and winter conditions.
END OF SECTION 230593
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 16
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 230700 - HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Insulation Materials:
a. Cellular glass.
b. Flexible elastomeric.
c. Mineral fiber.
2. Adhesives.
3. Mastics.
4. Sealants.
5. Factory -applied jackets.
6. Field -applied jackets.
7. Tapes.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 21 Section "Fire -Suppression Systems Insulation."
2. Division 22 Section "Plumbing Insulation."
3. Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water -vapor
permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field -applied if any).
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, documentation including
printed statement of VOC content and chemical components.
C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of
insulation and hanger.
2. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, dampers, specialties and flanges for each
type of insulation.
3. Detail application of field -applied jackets.
4. Detail application at linkages of control devices.
HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY. JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation
materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include
dates of tests and test methods employed.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship
program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of
Apprenticeship and Training.
Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire -test -
response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84,
by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label
insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers,
with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame -spread index of 25 or less, and smoke -developed
index of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame -spread index of 75 or less, and smoke -developed
index of 150 or less.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate
ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct
Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation
application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain
clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field -applied jackets and finishes and
for space required for maintenance.
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after
installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have
satisfactory test results.
B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of
construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
HVAC INSULATION 230700-2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be
applied.
B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less
than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing
process.
F. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid,
hermetically sealed cells. Factory -applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory -Applied
Jackets" Article.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas Super K.
2. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I.
3. Special -Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III.
4. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV.
5. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory -Applied ASJ: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type ll,
Class 2. ASJ jacketing for all piping areas outside of mechanical rooms.
6. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Field -Applied PVC jacketing: Comply with ASTM C 552,
Type II, Class 2. PVC jacketing for all piping areas inside mechanical rooms.
7. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.
G. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed -cell, sponge- or expanded -rubber materials. Comply with
ASTM C 534, Type 1 for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel.
b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.
c. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180.
Flexible Elastomeric Permitted Locations
a. Pump housing.
b. 4'-0" piping runout to AHU's.
H. Mineral -Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type 11 and ASTM C 1290, Type I. Factory -applied jacket
requirements are specified in "Factory -Applied Jackets" Article.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap.
b. Johns Manville; Microlite.
c. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap.
d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.
e. Owens Corning; All -Service Duct Wrap.
HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
Mineral -Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide
insulation. For equipment applications, provide insulation. Factory -applied jacket requirements
are specified in "Factory -Applied Jackets" Article.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board.
b. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX.
c. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas.
d. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board.
e. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board.
f. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series.
2.2 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
Cellular -Glass Adhesive: Solvent -based resin adhesive, with a service temperature range of
minus 75 to plus 300 deg F.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -96.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-33.
2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
C. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL -A -24179A, Type II, Class I.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal.
b. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive.
c. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75.
d. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive.
2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
D. Mineral -Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL -A -3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -82.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20.
c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80.
d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225.
e. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
E. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL -A -3316C, Class 2, Grade A for
bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -82.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20.
c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80.
d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225.
e. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
F. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Dow Chemical Company (The); 739, Dow Silicone.
b. Johns -Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive.
c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive.
d. Speedline Corporation; Speedline Vinyl Adhesive.
2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.3 MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with
MIL -C -19565C, Type II.
Vapor -Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient
services.
C. For indoor applications, use mastic that has a voc content of 50 G/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, subpart D (EPA Method 24).
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -35.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-90.
c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB -50.
d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590.
e. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-40.
f. Vimasco Corporation; 749.
2. Water -Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43 -mil dry film
thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F .
4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
2.4 SEALANTS
A. Joint Sealants:
1. Joint Sealants for Cellular -Glass Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -76.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-45.
c. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444.
2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
3. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.
4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F.
5. Color: White or gray.
6. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
B. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -76.
2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
5. Color: White.
6. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.5 FACTORY -APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory -applied jackets on various applications. When
factory -applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
ASJ: White, kraft -paper, fiberglass -reinforced scrim with aluminum -foil backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
2.6 FIELD -APPLIED JACKETS
A. Field -applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B. PVC Jacket: High -impact -resistant, UV -resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784,
Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming.
Thickness is indicated in field -applied jacket schedules.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Johns Manville; Zeston.
b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series.
c. Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke.
HVAC INSULATION 230700-6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.
2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.
3. Color: White.
4. Factory -fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.
Shapes: 45- and 90 -degree, short- and long -radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges,
unions, reducers, end caps, soil -pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P -trap
and supply covers for lavatories.
5. Factory -fabricated tank heads and tank side panels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other
conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of
defects.
2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation.
adversely affect insulation application.
Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated.
corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:
Remove materials that will
Before insulating, apply a
Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300
deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating
materials and application methods for operating temperature range.
C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with
stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including fittings,
valves, and specialties.
B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required
for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system
schedules.
HVAC INSULATION 230700-7
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor -barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper
and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor -barrier mastic.
3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation
material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thicknesses.
L. Install insulation with factory -applied jackets as follows:
1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.
2. Cover circumferential joints with 3 -inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket.
Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip,
spaced 4 inches o.c.
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches . Install insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.
Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.
a. For below ambient services, apply vapor -barrier mastic over staples.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer
to maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor -barrier mastic on seams and joints and
at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking
due to thermal movement.
HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 8
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches
similar to butt joints.
P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1. Vibration -control devices.
2. Testing agency labels and stamps.
3. Nameplates and data plates.
4. Manholes.
5. Handholes.
6. Cleanouts.
3.4 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush
with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.
Insulation Installation at Fire -Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation
continuously through penetrations of fire -rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation at fire
damper sleeves for fire -rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper
sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.
1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for
firestopping and fire -resistive joint sealers.
3.5 EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Install insulation
over entire surface of tanks and vessels.
Apply 100 percent coverage of adhesive to surface with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive.
Seal longitudinal seams and end joints.
B. Insulation Installation on Pumps:
1. Fabricate metal boxes lined with insulation. Fit boxes around pumps and coincide box
joints with splits in pump casings. Fabricate joints with outward bolted flanges. Bolt
flanges on 6 -inch centers, starting at corners. Install 3/8 -inch- diameter fasteners with
wing nuts. Alternatively, secure the box sections together using a latching mechanism.
2. For below ambient services, install a vapor barrier at seams, joints, and penetrations.
Seal between flanges with replaceable gasket material to form a vapor barrier.
3.6 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more
specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:
HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 9
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with
continuous thermal and vapor -retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same
material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly
against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular
surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is
uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt
each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with
adhesive.
4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets,
valve stuffing -box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with
insulating cement.
5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating
cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and
replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable
insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor
barrier.
6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.
Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe
insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a
mastic. Install vapor -barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for
above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric -reinforcing mesh. Trowel the
mastic to a smooth and well -shaped contour.
S. Label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size and
color of pipe labels.
C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps,
test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels,
and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the
connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the
following:
1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same
thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe
insulation.
2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation
from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-
steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide
the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of
mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached
insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe
HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 10
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied
in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.
5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field -applied jacket schedules, finish exposed
surfaces with a metal jacket.
3.7 CELLULAR -GLASS INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without
deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions
with vapor -barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory -applied jackets on above ambient services, secure laps with
outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
4. For insulation with factory -applied jackets on below ambient services, do not staple
longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation
material manufacturer and seal with vapor -barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular -glass block insulation of
same thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at
least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of
cellular -glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed sections of cellular -glass insulation to valve body.
2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation.
3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
3.8 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate
openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 11
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness
as pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive
to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated,
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.
2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive
to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when
available.
2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet
insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow
valve operation without disturbing insulation.
3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to
surface being insulated.
3.9 MINERAL -FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit
area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. Install either capacitor -discharge -weld pins and speed washers or cupped -head,
capacitor -discharge -weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of
vertical ducts as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal
centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16
inches o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches , place pins 16 inches o.c.
each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to
hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and
plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.
f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous
unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with
HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 12
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure
laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2 -inch outward -clinching staples, 1 inch o.c.
Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field -applied jacket, adhesive, vapor -barrier
mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor -
barrier seal.
b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18 -foot
intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor -barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped
pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.
Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the
insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches.
5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints.
At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.
6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section
for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat -oval duct elbows with individually
mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with
6 -inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of
stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
B. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit
area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. Install either capacitor -discharge -weld pins and speed washers or cupped -head,
capacitor -discharge -weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of
vertical ducts as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal
centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16
inches o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c.
each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to
hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and
plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous
unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with
insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure
laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2 -inch outward -clinching staples, 1 inch o.c.
Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field -applied jacket, adhesive, vapor -barrier
mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor -
barrier seal.
b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18 -foot
intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor -barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped
HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 13
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.
Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the
insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches.
5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section
for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and
inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat -oval duct elbows with
individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with
6 -inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of
stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
3.10 FIELD -APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1 -inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end
joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks
and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the
finish bead along seam and joint edge.
3.11 FINISHES
A. Duct, Equipment, and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass -Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material:
Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09 painting Sections.
Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material
and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.
a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex -emulsion size.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of
insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
inspection of the completed Work.
3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field -applied jacket and
insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be
limited to three location(s) for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule,
General" Article.
2. Inspect field -insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field -
applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of
inspection shall be limited to three location(s) for each type of equipment defined in the
"Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For large equipment, remove only a portion
adequate to determine compliance.
HVAC INSULATION 230700-14
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
3. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing
field -applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of
inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded
fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two
locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of
flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General"
Article.
C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals
noncompliance with requirements.
3.13 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:
1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.
2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air.
3. Indoor, concealed return located in nonconditioned space.
4. Indoor, exposed return located in nonconditioned space.
5. Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.
6. Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.
Items Not Insulated:
1. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
2. Factory -insulated flexible ducts.
3. Flexible connectors.
4. Factory -insulated access panels and doors.
3.14 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Concealed, round and flat -oval, supply -air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral -Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-Ib/cu. ft. nominal density.
B. Concealed, round and flat -oval, return -air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral -Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-Ib/cu. ft. nominal density.
C. Concealed, rectangular, supply -air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral -Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-Ib/cu. ft. nominal density.
D. Concealed, rectangular, return -air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral -Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
E. Concealed, rectangular, supply/return-air duct insulation inside mechanical rooms shall be the
following:
1. Mineral -Fiber Board: 1-1/2 inches thick and 2-Ib/cu. ft. nominal density.
HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 15
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
F. Concealed, return -air plenum insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral -Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-Ib/cu. ft. nominal density.
3.15 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for
a type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B. Insulate indoor equipment in paragraphs below that is not factory insulated.
C. Chilled -water air -separator insulation shall be the following:
1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.
3.16 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for
each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system,
selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
3.17 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Chilled Water, above 40 Deg F :
1. NPS 6 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches thick.
b. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick (Limited to 4 foot run -outs to cooling coils).
3.18 INDOOR, FIELD -APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory -applied jacket, install the field -
applied jacket over the factory -applied jacket.
B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
C. Piping, Mechanical Rooms:
1. PVC: 20 mils thick.
3.20 OUTDOOR, UNDERGROUND CHILLED WATER PIPING.
A. All outdoor chilled water piping shall be pre -insulated metal piping with welded joints. Pre -
insulated piping manufacturer shall provide shop drawings routing, thrust blocks, expansion
loops, etc. for engineer's review.
END OF SECTION 230700
HVAC INSULATION 230700-16
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 230900 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control
components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory -wired controls.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping" for measuring equipment that
relates to this Section.
2. Division 23 Section "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls" for requirements that
relate to this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. DDC: Direct digital control.
B. I/O: Input/output.
C. MS/TP: Master slave/token passing.
D. PC: Personal computer.
E. PID: Proportional plus integral plus derivative.
1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
A. Comply with the following performance requirements:
1. Graphic Display: Display graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data
within 10 seconds.
2. Graphic Refresh: Update graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data
within 8 seconds.
3. Object Command: Reaction time of less than two seconds between operator command
of a binary object and device reaction.
4. Object Scan: Transmit change of state and change of analog values to control units or
workstation within six seconds.
5. Alarm Response Time: Annunciate alarm at workstation within 45 seconds. Multiple
workstations must receive alarms within five seconds of each other.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
6. Program Execution Frequency: Run capability of applications as often as five seconds,
but selected consistent with mechanical process under control.
7. Performance: Programmable controllers shall execute DDC PID control loops, and scan
and update process values and outputs at least once per second.
8. Reporting Accuracy and Stability of Control: Report values and maintain measured
variables within tolerances as follows:
a. Water Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F.
b. Water Flow: Plus or minus 2 percent of full scale.
c. Water Pressure: Plus or minus 5 percent of full scale.
d. Space Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F.
e. Ducted Air Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F.
f. Outside Air Temperature: Plus or minus 2 deg F.
g. Dew Point Temperature: Plus or minus 3 deg F.
h. Temperature Differential: Plus or minus 0.25 deg F.
i. Relative Humidity: Plus or minus 2 percent.
j. Airflow (Pressurized Spaces): Plus or minus 3 percent of full scale.
k. Airflow (Measuring Stations): Plus or minus 5 percent of full scale.
I. Airflow (Terminal): Plus or minus 10 percent of full scale.
m. Air Pressure (Space): Plus or minus 0.01 -inch wg.
n. Air Pressure (Ducts): Plus or minus 0.1 -inch wg.
o. Electrical: Plus or minus 5 percent of reading.
1.5 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
See Control Diagrams on Design Documents for Sequences of Operations.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device. Indicate
dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes for
materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product indicated.
1. DDC System Hardware: Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer,
and model number. Include technical data for operator workstation equipment, interface
equipment, control units, transducers/transmitters, sensors, actuators, valves,
relays/switches, control panels, and operator interface equipment.
2. Control System Software: Include technical data for operating system software, operator
interface, color graphics, and other third -party applications.
3. Controlled Systems: Instrumentation list with element name, type of device,
manufacturer, model number, and product data. Include written description of sequence
of operation including schematic diagram.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
1. Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model number.
2. Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control
devices.
3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
4. Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling.
5. Written description of sequence of operation.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
6. Schedule of dampers including size, leakage, and flow characteristics.
7. Schedule of valves including flow characteristics.
8. DDC System Hardware:
a. Wiring diagrams for control units with termination numbers.
b. Schematic diagrams and floor plans for field sensors and control hardware.
c. Schematic diagrams for control, communication, and power wiring, showing trunk
data conductors and wiring between operator workstation and control unit
locations.
9. Control System Software: List of color graphics indicating monitored systems, data
(connected and calculated) point addresses, output schedule, and operator notations.
10. Controlled Systems:
a. Schematic diagrams of each controlled system with control points labeled and
control elements graphically shown, with wiring.
b. Scaled drawings showing mounting, routing, and wiring of elements including
bases and special construction.
c. Written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram.
d. Points list.
C. Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certify that each proposed DDC system
component complies with ASHRAE 135.
D. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: Include the following:
1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.
2. Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with data
files.
3. Device address list.
4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.
5. Software license required by and installed for DDC workstations and control systems.
E. Field quality -control test reports.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For HVAC instrumentation and control system to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01
Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Maintenance instructions and lists of spare parts for each type of control device and
compressed -air station.
2. Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components and
devices.
3. Keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function.
4. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration
tolerances.
5. Calibration records and list of set points.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Automatic control system manufacturer's authorized representative who
is trained and approved for installation of system components required for this Project.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C. Comply with ASHRAE 135 for DDC system components.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Factory -Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are indicated to
be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to equipment
manufacturer.
B. System Software: Update to latest version of software at Project completion.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with plans
and room details before installation.
B. Coordinate equipment with Division 27 Section "Clock Systems" to achieve compatibility with
equipment that interfaces with that system.
C. Coordinate equipment with Division 16 Section "Network Lighting Controls" to achieve
compatibility with equipment that interfaces with that system.
D. Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical branch circuits for control units and operator
workstation.
E. Coordinate equipment with Division 16 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" to
achieve compatibility of communication interfaces.
F. Coordinate equipment with Division 16 Section "Panelboards" to achieve compatibility with
starter coils and annunciation devices.
G. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place
Concrete."
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
Replacement Materials: One replacement diaphragm or relay mechanism for each
unique valve motor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Manufacturers:
1. Johnson Controls
2. Delta Controls
3. Trane; Worldwide Applied Systems Group
4. Schneider Electric
B. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface
equipment, other apparatus, and accessories to control mechanical systems.
C. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface
equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers
operating in multiuser, multitasking environment on token -passing network and programmed to
control mechanical systems. An operator workstation permits interface with the network via
dynamic color graphics with each mechanical system, building floor plan, and control device
depicted by point -and -click graphics.®
D. Control system shall include the following:
1. Building lighting control system specified in Division 16 Section "Network Lighting
Controls."
a. BMS contractor shall provide a digital signal to the network lighting controllers for
operation of all lighting systems for the facility.
b. BMS contractor shall provide a 7 day/365 days a year schedule for programming
the operation of the lighting system.
2. Power Monitoring of Electric Water Heaters.
3. Trending and Alarming required to implement the measurement and verification required
by Part D of the IMPMV guidelines.
2.3 DDC EQUIPMENT
A. Operator Workstation: One PC-based microcomputer(s) with minimum configuration as follows:
1. Motherboard: With 8 integrated USB 2.0 ports, integrated Intel Pro 10/100 (Ethernet),
integrated audio, bios, and hardware monitoring.
2. Processor Intel Core 4 Quad Processor E4400, 2 MB L2 Cache, 2.00 GHz, 800 FSB.
3. Random -Access Memory: 2 GB Dual Channel DDR2 SDRAM at 667 MHz — 2DIMMS.
4. Graphics: Video adapter, minimum 128MB NVIDIA GeForce 8300GS
5. Monitor: 19 inches, LCD color.
6. Keyboard: QWERTY, 105 keys in ergonomic shape.
7. Floppy -Disk Drive: 1.44 MB.
8. Hard -Disk Drive: 300 GB.
9. 16X DVD -ROM Read/Write Drive
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
10. Mouse: Three button, optical.
11. Uninterruptible Power Supply: 2 kVa.
12. Operating System: Microsoft Windows XP Professional with high-speed Internet access.
a. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Workstation shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol and
communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) datalink/physical layer protocol.
13. Printer: Color, ink -jet type as follows:
a. Print Head: 4800 x 1200 dpi optimized color resolution.
b. Paper Handling: Minimum of 100 sheets.
c. Print Speed: Minimum of 17 ppm in black and 12 ppm in color.
14. Application Software:
a. I/O capability from operator station.
b. System security for each operator via software password and access levels.
c. Automatic system diagnostics; monitor system and report failures.
d. Database creation and support.
e. Automatic and manual database save and restore.
f. Dynamic color graphic displays with up to 10 screen displays at once.
g. Custom graphics generation and graphics library of HVAC equipment and
symbols.
h. Alarm processing, messages, and reactions.
Trend logs retrievable in spreadsheets and database programs.
j. Alarm and event processing.
k. Object and property status and control.
Automatic restart of field equipment on restoration of power.
m. Data collection, reports, and logs. Include standard reports for the following:
1) Current values of all objects.
2) Current alarm summary.
3) Disabled objects.
4) Alarm lockout objects.
5) Logs.
n. Custom report development.
o. Utility and weather reports.
p. Workstation application editors for controllers and schedules.
q. Maintenance management.
15. Custom Application Software:
a. English language oriented.
b. Full -screen character editor/programming environment.
c. Allow development of independently executing program modules with
debugging/simulation capability.
d. Support conditional statements.
e. Support floating-point arithmetic with mathematic functions.
f. Contains predefined time variables.
B. Diagnostic Terminal Unit: Portable notebook -style, PC-based microcomputer terminal capable
of accessing system data by connecting to system network with minimum configuration as
follows:
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1. System: With one integrated USB 2.0 port, integrated Intel Pro 10/100 (Ethernet),
integrated audio, bios, and hardware monitoring.
2. Processor: Intel® CoreTM 2 Duo T5250 (2MB cache/1.5GHz/667Mhz FSB)
3. Random -Access Memory: 1GB3 Shared Dual Channel4 DDR2 SDRAM at
667MHz. Specifications - Memory
4. Graphics: Video adapter, minimum Intel® Integrated Graphics Media Accelerator X3100
5. Monitor: 13.3" UltraSharpTM WXGA display with TrueLifeTM
6. Keyboard: QWERTY 105 keys in ergonomic shape.
7. Hard -Disk Drive: 200 GB.
8. Integrated Slot -Load DVD+/-RW13 Drive
9. Pointing Device: Touch pad or other internal device.
C. Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with programmable, nonvolatile, random-
access memory; local operator access and display panel; integral interface equipment; and
backup power source.
1. Units monitor or control each I/O point; process information; execute commands from
other control units, devices, and operator stations; and download from or upload to
operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit.
2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions
include the following:
a. Global communications.
b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O.
c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.
d. Software applications, scheduling, and alarm processing.
e. Testing and developing control algorithms without disrupting field hardware and
controlled environment.
3. Standard Application Programs:
a. Electric Control Programs: Demand limiting, duty cycling, automatic time
scheduling, start/stop time optimization, night setback/setup, on-off control with
differential sequencing, staggered start, antishort cycling, PID control, DDC with
fine tuning, and trend logging.
b. HVAC Control Programs: Optimal run time, supply -air reset, and enthalpy
switchover.
c. Chiller Control Programs: Control function of condenser -water reset, chilled -water
reset, and equipment sequencing.
d. Programming Application Features: Include trend point; alarm processing and
messaging; weekly, monthly, and annual scheduling; energy calculations; run-time
totalization; and security access.
e. Remote communications.
f. Maintenance management.
g. Units of Measure: Inch -pound and SI (metric).
4. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator workstation or
diagnostic terminal unit.
5. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Control units shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol and
communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) datalink/physical layer protocol.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 7
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
D. Local Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with electronically programmable,
nonvolatile, read-only memory; and backup power source.
1. Units monitor or control each I/O point, process information, and download from or
upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit.
2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions
include the following:
a. Global communications.
b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O.
c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.
3. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator workstation or
diagnostic terminal unit.
4. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Control units shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol and
communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) datalink/physical layer protocol.
E. I/O Interface: Hardwired inputs and outputs may tie into system through controllers. Protect
points so that shorting will cause no damage to controllers.
1. Binary Inputs: Allow monitoring of on-off signals without external power.
2. Pulse Accumulation Inputs: Accept up to 10 pulses per second.
3. Analog Inputs: Allow monitoring of low -voltage (0- to 10-V dc), current (4 to 20 mA), or
resistance signals.
4. Binary Outputs: Provide on-off or pulsed low -voltage signal, selectable for normally open
or normally closed operation.
5. Analog Outputs: Provide modulating signal, either low voltage (0- to 10-V dc) or current
(4 to 20 mA).
6. Tri-State Outputs: Provide two coordinated binary outputs for control of three-point,
floating -type electronic actuators.
7. Universal I/Os: Provide software selectable binary or analog outputs.
F. Power Supplies: Transformers with Class 2 current -limiting type or overcurrent protection; limit
connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity. DC power supply shall match output current
and voltage requirements and be full -wave rectifier type with the following:
1. Output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak.
2. Combined 1 percent line and load regulation with 100-mic.sec. response time for 50
percent load changes.
3. Built-in overvoltage and overcurrent protection and be able to withstand 150 percent
overload for at least 3 seconds without failure.
G. Power Line Filtering: Internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for
workstations or controllers with the following:
1. Minimum dielectric strength of 1000 V.
2. Maximum response time of 10 nanoseconds.
3. Minimum transverse -mode noise attenuation of 65 dB.
4. Minimum common -mode noise attenuation of 150 dB at 40 to 100 Hz.
2.4 ELECTRONIC SENSORS
A. Description: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as
required.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 8
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
B. Thermistor Temperature Sensors and Transmitters:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Ebtron, Inc.
b. I.T.M. Instruments Inc.
c. RDF Corporation.
2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 deg F at calibration point.
3. Wire: Twisted, shielded -pair cable.
4. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches long; use where not affected by
temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft.
5. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 18 inches long, rigid; use where prone to temperature
stratification or where ducts are larger than 10 sq. ft.
6. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass or stainless-steel socket with minimum insertion
length of 2-1/2 inches.
7. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.
a. Set -Point Adjustment: Exposed.
b. Set -Point Indication: Concealed.
c. Thermometer: Concealed.
d. Color: White.
e. Orientation: Vertical.
8. Outside -Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight.
9. Room Security Sensors: Stainless-steel cover plate with insulated back and security
screws.
C. Humidity Sensors: Bulk polymer sensor element.
1. Manufacturers:
a. BEC Controls Corporation.
b. General Eastern Instruments.
c. MAMAC Systems, Inc.
d. ROTRONIC Instrument Corp.
e. TCS/Basys Controls.
f. Vaisala.
2. Accuracy: 2 percent full range with linear output.
3. Room Sensor Range: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity.
4. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.
a. Set -Point Adjustment: Concealed.
b. Set -Point Indication: Concealed.
c. Color: White.
d. Orientation: Vertical.
5. Duct Sensor: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity range with element guard and mounting
plate.
6. Outside -Air Sensor: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity range with mounting enclosure,
suitable for operation at outdoor temperatures of minus 22 to plus 185 deg F.
7. Duct and Sensors: With element guard and mounting plate, range of 0 to 100 percent
relative humidity.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 9
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
D. Pressure Transmitters/Transducers:
1. Manufacturers:
a. BEC Controls Corporation.
b. General Eastern Instruments.
c. MAMAC Systems, Inc.
d. ROTRONIC Instrument Corp.
e. TCS/Basys Controls.
f. Vaisala.
2. Static -Pressure Transmitter: Nondirectional sensor with suitable range for expected
input, and temperature compensated.
a. Accuracy: 2 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent.
b. Output: 4 to 20 mA.
c. Building Static -Pressure Range: 0- to 0.25 -inch wg.
d. Duct Static -Pressure Range: 0- to 5 -inch wg.
3. Water Pressure Transducers: Stainless-steel diaphragm construction, suitable for
service; minimum 150-psig operating pressure; linear output 4 to 20 mA.
4. Water Differential -Pressure Transducers: Stainless-steel diaphragm construction,
suitable for service; minimum 150-psig operating pressure and tested to 300-psig; linear
output 4 to 20 mA.
5. Differential -Pressure Switch (Air or Water): Snap acting, with pilot -duty rating and with
suitable scale range and differential.
6. Pressure Transmitters: Direct acting for gas, liquid, or steam service; range suitable for
system; linear output 4 to 20 mA.
2.5 STATUS SENSORS
A. Status Inputs for Fans: Differential -pressure switch with pilot -duty rating and with adjustable
range of 0- to 5 -inch wg.
B. Status Inputs for Pumps: Differential -pressure switch with pilot -duty rating and with adjustable
pressure -differential range of 8 to 60 psig, piped across pump.
C. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Comply with ISA 50.00.01, current -sensing fixed- or split -core
transformers with self -powered transmitter, adjustable and suitable for 175 percent of rated
motor current.
D. Current Switches: Self -powered, solid-state with adjustable trip current, selected to match
current and system output requirements.
E. Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indicator: Visual scale indicating percent of travel and 2- to
10-V dc, feedback signal.
F. Water -Flow Switches: Bellows -actuated mercury or snap -acting type with pilot -duty rating,
stainless-steel or bronze paddle, with appropriate range and differential adjustment, in
NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.
1. Manufacturers:
a. BEC Controls Corporation.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 10
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
b. I.T.M. Instruments Inc.
2.6 FLOW MEASURING STATIONS
A. Air Flow Measuring Device: Provide where indicated multi -point thermal dispersion airflow
traverse stations for continuous measurement of air volume. Each traverse station shall consist
of a multiple array Dual "bead -in -glass" sensing locations. Air flow measurement station shall be
sized to match actual duct size. Sensor density shall comply with manufactures
recommendations (Density type) to insure specified accuracy in actual installation field
conditions/location.
1. Air flow measurement station shall be + 2% of reading, with 0.25% repeatability.
a. Provide Bacnet interface for BMS system interface. BMS shall monitor the
following points at each AFM location:
1) Instaneous Airflow
2) Time weighted airflow average
3) Temperature
b. Acceptable Manufacture/Model:
1) Ebtron Gold Series - GTN116-PD
2) Or approved equal
2. Chilled Water Flow: Provide chilled water monitoring station consisting of a chilled water
flow meter, chilled water supply and return water temperature sensors utilizing matching
calibrated sensors.
a. The BCS shall monitor chilled water usage in "ton -hours" or "kiloton -hours", with an
accuracy of plus or minus 0.75% with a turn down range from 0.1fps to 33 fps.
b. Acceptable Manufacture/Model:
1) Onicon F3200 with System 10 BTU Meter
2) Or approved equal
2.7 THERMOSTATS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Erie Controls.
2. Danfoss Inc.; Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Div.
3. Heat -Timer Corporation.
4. Sauter Controls Corporation.
5. tekmar Control Systems, Inc.
6. Theben AG - Lumilite Control Technology, Inc.
Low -Voltage, On -Off Thermostats: NEMA DC 3, 24-V, bimetal -operated, mercury -switch type,
with adjustable or fixed anticipation heater, concealed set -point adjustment, 55 to 85 deg F set -
point range, and 2 deg F maximum differential.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 11
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
C. Immersion Thermostat: Remote -bulb or bimetal rod -and -tube type, proportioning action with
adjustable throttling range and adjustable set point.
D. Electric, Low -Limit Duct Thermostat: Snap -acting, single -pole, single -throw, manual -reset
switch that trips if temperature sensed across any 12 inches of bulb length is equal to or below
set point.
1. Bulb Length: Minimum 20 feet .
2. Quantity: One thermostat for every 20 sqft. of coil surface.
2.8 HUMIDISTATS
A. Manufacturers:
1. MAMAC Systems, Inc.
2. ROTRONIC Instrument Corp.
B. Duct -Mounting Humidistats: Electric insertion, 2 -position type with adjustable, 2 percent
throttling range, 20 to 80 percent operating range, and single- or double -pole contacts.
2.9 ACTUATORS
A. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating
action or two -position action.
1. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Common Motor Requirements for
HVAC Equipment."
2. Permanent Split -Capacitor or Shaded -Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed
and sealed. Equip spring -return motors with integral spiral -spring mechanism in
housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary
switches, or feedback potentiometer.
3. Nonspring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2 : Size for running torque of
150 in. x Ibf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x Ibf .
4. Spring -Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2 Size for running and
breakaway torque of 150 in. x Ibf .
5. Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running torque
of 150 in. x Ibf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x Ibf .
6. Spring -Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft. : Size for running and
breakaway torque of 150 in. x Ibf .
B. Electronic Actuators: Direct -coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full -stroke cycles at
rated torque.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc.
2. Valves: Size for torque required for valve close off at maximum pump differential
pressure.
3. Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows:
a. Parallel -Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-Ib/sq. ft. of damper.
b. Opposed -Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-Ib/sq. ft. of damper.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 12
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
c. Parallel -Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-Ib/sq. ft of damper.
d. Opposed -Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-Ib/sq. ft. of damper.
e. Dampers with 2- to 3 -Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to 2500
fpm : Increase running torque by 1.5.
f. Dampers with 3- to 4 -Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500 to 3000
fpm : Increase running torque by 2.0.
4. Coupling: V -bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle.
5. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation -sensing circuitry.
6. Fail -Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring -return mechanism. Provide external, manual
gear release on nonspring-return actuators.
7. Power Requirements (Two -Position Spring Return): 24-V ac.
8. Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24-V ac or 8 W at 24-V dc.
9. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position feedback
signal.
10. Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F.
11. Temperature Rating (Smoke Dampers): Minus 22 to plus 250 deg F .
12. Run Time: 12 seconds open, 5 seconds closed.
2.10 CONTROL VALVES
A. Butterfly Valves: 200-psig, 150-psig maximum pressure differential, ASTM A 126 cast-iron or
ASTM A 536 ductile -iron body and bonnet, extended neck, stainless-steel stem, field -
replaceable EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals.
1. Body Style: Wafer.
2. Disc Type: Aluminum bronze.
3. Sizing: 1-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate.
2.11 DAMPERS
Manufacturers:
1. Air Balance Inc.
2. Don Park Inc.; Autodamp Div.
3. TAMCO (T. A. Morrison & Co. Inc.).
4. United Enertech Corp.
5. Greenheck
6. Ruskin
B. Dampers: AMCA-rated, parallel -blade design; 0.108 -inch- minimum thick, galvanized -steel or
0.125 -inch- minimum thick, extruded -aluminum frames with holes for duct mounting; damper
blades shall not be less than 0.064 -inch- thick galvanized steel with maximum blade width of 8
inches and length of 48 inches .
1. Secure blades to 1/2 -inch- diameter, zinc -plated axles using zinc -plated hardware, with
oil -impregnated sintered bronze blade bearings, blade -linkage hardware of zinc -plated
steel and brass, ends sealed against spring -stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust
bearings at each end of every blade.
2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
3. Edge Seals, Standard Pressure Applications: Closed -cell neoprene.
4. Edge Seals, Low -Leakage Applications: Use inflatable blade edging or replaceable
rubber blade seals and spring-loaded stainless-steel side seals, rated for leakage at less
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 13
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
than 10 cfm per sq. ft. of damper area, at differential pressure of 4 -inch wg when damper
is held by torque of 50 in. x Ibf; when tested according to AMCA 500D.
2.12 CONTROL CABLE
A. Electronic and fiber-optic cables for control wiring are specified in Division 16 Section
"Communications Horizontal Cabling."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that power supply is available to control units and operator workstation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install software in control units and operator workstation(s). Implement all features of programs
to specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation.
B. Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation specified.
C. Verify location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with Drawings
and room details before installation. Install devices 48 inches above the floor.
1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern.
D. Install automatic dampers according to Division 15 Section "Air Duct Accessories."
E. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor
temperatures.
F. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 15 Section
"Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
G. Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 15 Section
"Hydronic Piping."
Install steam and condensate instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to
Division 15 Section "Steam and Condensate Heating Piping."
I. Install refrigerant instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 15
Section "Refrigerant Piping."
J. Install duct volume -control dampers according to Division 15 Sections specifying air ducts.
K. Install electronic and fiber-optic cables according to Division 16 Section "Communications
Horizontal Cabling."
3.3 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 14
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
A. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 16 Section "Raceway and Boxes for
Electrical Systems."
B. Install building wire and cable according to Division 16 Section "Low -Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables."
C. Install signal and communication cable according to Division 16 Section "Communications
Horizontal Cabling."
1. Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping
are exposed.
2. Install exposed cable in raceway.
3. Install concealed cable in raceway.
4. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables where
several cables follow a common path.
5. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against
abrasion. Tie and support conductors.
6. Number -code or color -code conductors for future identification and service of control
system, except local individual room control cables.
7. Install wire and cable with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of
piping and equipment.
Connect manual -reset limit controls independent of manual -control switch positions. Automatic
duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers.
E. Connect hand -off -auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is
in hand position.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to
inspect, test, and adjust field -assembled components and equipment installation, including
connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
3. Test calibration of electronic controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating
operation with compatible signal generator.
4. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control
set points are as required.
5. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with sequence
of operation. Adjust PID actions.
6. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation.
7. Test software and hardware interlocks.
C. DDC Verification:
1. Verify that instruments are installed before calibration, testing, and loop or leak checks.
2. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility.
3. Check instrument installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion depth,
and other applicable considerations.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 15
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
4. Check instrument tubing for proper fittings, slope, material, and support.
5. Check installation of air supply for each instrument.
6. Check flow instruments. Inspect tag number and line and bore size, and verify that inlet
side is identified and that meters are installed correctly.
7. Check pressure instruments, piping slope, installation of valve manifold, and self-
contained pressure regulators.
8. Check temperature instruments and material and length of sensing elements.
9. Check control valves. Verify that they are in correct direction.
10. Check DDC system as follows:
a. Verify that DDC controller power supply is from emergency power supply, if
applicable.
b. Verify that wires at control panels are tagged with their service designation and
approved tagging system.
c. Verify that spare I/O capacity has been provided.
d. Verify that DDC controllers are protected from power supply surges.
Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing procedures.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Calibrating and Adjusting:
1. Calibrate instruments.
2. Make three-point calibration test for both linearity and accuracy for each analog
instrument.
3. Calibrate equipment and procedures using manufacturer's written recommendations and
instruction manuals. Use test equipment with accuracy at least double that of instrument
being calibrated.
4. Control System Inputs and Outputs:
a. Check analog inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span.
b. Check analog outputs using milliampere meter at 0, 50, and 100 percent output.
c. Check digital inputs using jumper wire.
d. Check digital outputs using ohmmeter to test for contact making or breaking.
e. Check resistance temperature inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using a
precision -resistant source.
5. Flow
a. Set differential pressure flow transmitters for 0 and 100 percent values with 3 -point
calibration accomplished at 50, 90, and 100 percent of span.
b. Manually operate flow switches to verify that they make or break contact.
6. Pressure:
a. Calibrate pressure transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span.
b. Calibrate pressure switches to make or break contacts, with adjustable differential
set at minimum.
7. Temperature:
a. Calibrate resistance temperature transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span
using a precision -resistance source.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 16
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
b. Calibrate temperature switches to make or break contacts.
8. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers without positioners, following the
manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that valve or damper is 100 percent open
and closed.
9. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers with positioners, following manufacturer's
recommended procedure, so that valve and damper is 0, 50, and 100 percent closed.
10. Provide diagnostic and test instruments for calibration and adjustment of system.
11. Provide written description of procedures and equipment for calibrating each type of
instrument. Submit procedures review and approval before initiating startup procedures.
B. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.
C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,
provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to
two visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
END OF SECTION 230900
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 17
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014
INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SECTION 230993 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes control sequences for HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" for control equipment and
devices and for submittal requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. DDC: Direct digital control.
1.4 CENTRAL REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT SEQUENCES
A. Start and Stop Condenser -Water Pump(s):
1. Enable: Allow pump to start when water is in cooling tower:
a. Input Device: Water pressure transducer.
b. Output Device: Hard wired through motor starter; DDC system binary output.
c. Action: Confirm water in cooling -tower sump.
2. Enable: When outdoor -air temperature conditions are met:
a. Input Device: DDC system outdoor -air temperature.
b. Output Device: Hard wired through motor starter; DDC system binary output.
c. Action: Confirm outdoor -air temperature is above 50 deg F.
3. Enable: When demand conditions are met:
a. Input Device: DDC system software demand.
b. Action: Confirm cooling demand from ventilation system(s).
4. Initiate:
a. Input Device: DDC system time schedule.
b. Output Device: Binary output.
c. Action: Energize pump(s).
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 230993 - 1